eSe

TEKLA

Tekia Structures
Connection map

Tekia Structures 10.1 June 09, 2004
Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation

Copyright © 2004 by Tekla Corporation All rights reserved. No part of the contents of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without the written permission of Tekla Corporation. Limitation of warranty and liability NOTICE: THE FOLLOWING LIMITED WARRANTIES APPLY ONLY TO THE CIRCUMSTANCES SET FORTH HEREIN. THERE ARE NO OTHER WARRANTIES, WHETHER ORAL OR WRITTEN, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND ANY WAR. RANTY AGAINST INFRINGEMENT OF ANY PATENT TRADEMARK OR COPYRIGHT EXCEFF AS OTHERWISE HEREIN PROVIDED. Tekla Corporation (Tekla”) warrants that its software products will perform on computer configurations approved by Tekla as described in this manual and other Tekla’s documentation accompanying the relevant software so long as they are installed, implemented and operated in accor dance therewith. Furthermore Tekia warrants that the instructions and information contained in this manual will, when applied by adequately qualified operators (or developers as the case may be), or where appropriate, qualified civil/structural engineers, result in the software performing substantially as described in the documentation accompanying the software. This warranty sets out Tekla’s entire liability to the customer, its employees, servants, agents and sub-contractors, including but not limited to, its liability in contractor tort and including any liability for the actions and omissions of Tekla’s employees, servants, agents and sub-contrac tors. Tekla does not exclude or limit the application of any warranty or condition implied by the relevant legislation which may not be excluded, restricted or modified by agreement. Tekla does not give any warranty in respect of third party software except that Tekla’s software is, to the extent referred to in this manual and other documentation accompanying the software product, compatible with third party software products. Neither does this warranty extend to any modifications or enhancements of Tekla’s software products made by other than Tekla. The results and performance of the software prod ucts due to modifications or enhancements including direct interfacing with Tekla’s software shall be the sole responsibility of the person mak ing such modifications or enhancements. The customer is not entitled to make any modification or alteration in or to the software without the prior written consent of Tekla. Tekla’s sole responsibility under this warranty shall be limited to correcting errors in or replacing Tekla’s software so that it performs substan tially as specified in the documentation for such software products or correcting such errors in this manual that prevent the use of software. The contents of this warranty are supplemented by the terms and conditions that are defined in the TAC2000 agreement document that has been reviewed by and agreed to comply by the customer’s primary officer who signed the COSLA for the Tekla software at the time of purchase. Tekla does not warrant that the software products will: I. 2. 3. 4. Be suitable for use as intended by the customer. Operate uninterrupted or error-flee. tnteract with application packages other than those specified in the accompanying documentation and/or this manual. Operate with hardware or hardware configurations other than those approved by Tekla.

Except as expressly set out in this manual Tekla shall not be liable for: t. 2. 3. Misuse or negligent use and/or use by unqualified persons of the software products including ilure to use the software products in accor dance with accompanying manuals. Loss or damage arising from any errors that may be contained in the text of this manual or other documentation accompanying the relevant software product, or of the operation of the software. Indirect special or consequential damages (including loss of profits revenue or contracts) whether based on contract tort or any other legal theory. The foregoing limitation of liability shall not apply in the event that the software product is determined by a court of competent jurisdiction to be defective and to have directly caused bodily injury, death, or property damage provided that, to the extent permitted by law, Tekla’s liability shall in no event and for any damage exceed the license fee for the specific software that caused such damage.

This warranty shall be null and void and of no effect unless and until the customer shall advise Tekla in writing of any and all claims based in whole or in part on warranty within ten days of the customer becoming aware of such claims. This warranty shall be interpreted pursuant to the laws of Finland. Trademarks Windows ttt XP, Internet Explorer, FrontPage, Visual C++, COM and VBScript are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Unix is a trademark of UNIX System Laboratories Inc. JavaScript is a trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc. Xsteel is a trademark of Tekla Corporation.***

Tekia Structures Connection Map Table of Contents
Connections are listed by the connection number. There are some duplicate numbers. For an alphabetical list of the connections see the Index.

Connections
Windbracing (1) page 13 Cold rolled overlap (I) page 22 Seating cap plate (2) page 16 Eave Beams-Stanchion (3) page 22 Cross (4) page 16 Cold rolled sleeved (2) page 22 Rubber window gasket (4) page 22 Cold rolled sleeved (4) page 23 Wind column (5) page 21 Tube splice (6) page 17 Bearing plate (7) page II Gutter (7) page 22 Shaped Valley Cleat (8) page 22 Shear plate to hip (8) page 22 Notched seating (9) page I 6 Welded gusset (10) page 13 Stay (10) page 22 Bolted gusset (11) page 13 Purlin connections (11) page 22 Stiffener seating (12) page 11 Diag brace conn (12) page 22 Fitting (13) page 12 Joining plates (14) page 17 Simple hip (14) page 23 Stiffened shearplate(l7) page II Bracing cross (19) page 13 Cold rolled overlap (19) page 23 Tube gusset (20) page 13 Tube crossing (22) page 13 Round tube (23) page 12 Two sided end plate (24) page 1 I LS Brace Col End P1(24) page 25 TS Brace Col End P1(25) page 25 Muffe (26) page 17 Wind Col 1 (26) page 26 Stiffened end plate (27) page II Bolted Cap Plate (27) page 26 Stub (28) page 21 Brace Clamp (28) page 25 End plate (29) page Ii H/V Sloped Shear P1(29) page 24 Seating (30) page 16 H/v Shallow Framing (30) page 24 Welded column (31) page 12 Simple Clip Angle (31) page 24 Welded Tee (32) page Il Simple Endplate (32) page 24 Tab plate (33) page]?

Tekia Stuctures Reterenco3

Two Side Clip Angle (33) page 24 Two Side Endplate (34) page 24 Shear P1 Simple (35) page 24 Seating with nail (36) page 16 Shear P1 Welded Top (36) page 24 Seating cap (37) page 16 Shear P1 Full Depth Special (37) page 24 Shear P1 to Top Special (38) page 24 Seating (39) page 16 Haunch (40) page 16 Shear P1 Parallel (40) page 24 Cranked beam (41) page 16 Shear P1 Col with Stiff (41) page 24 Column splice (42) page 17 Shear P1 Col with Stiff Special (42) page 24 Line/Plane INTERSECTION (42) page 26 Welded shear plate (43) page II Shear and Flange Plates (43) page 24 Line/Part INTERSECTION (43) page 26 Weld preparation (44) page 12 Brace Corner Tubes and P1(44) page 25 Clip Angles (44) page 26 Box girder splice (45) page 17 Bracing Cross Under Beam (45) page 25 HQL (46) page 11 Bracing Wrap Around (46) page 25 Plate with nail (47) page II Shear P1 to Tube Column (47) page 24 Spacer plate (48) page Il Bent Shear Plate (48) page 24 New notch (49) page 12 Brace Corner Simple (49) page 25 Double plate (50) page 16 Central Brace Tube/Conn P1(50) page 25 Fit haunch (51) page 16 Central Bracing Simple (51) page 25 Traction bar (52) page 16 Seat Conn Type 1(52) page 26
4
Tekla Structures Reference

Diagonal splice (53) page 13 Bracing Wrap Around w/Attachments (53) page 25 Seat Conn Type 2 (54) page 26 Corner tube gusset (56) page 13 Splice Type 1(56) page 25 Corner bolted gusset (57) page 13 Seat Conn Type 4 (57) page 26 Boomerang wrapped diagonal (58) page 13 Joist Seat (58) page 26 Boomerang tube diagonal (59) page 13 Seat Conn Type 3 (59) page 26 Boomerang bracing cross (60) page 13 Seat Type 5 (60) page 26 Wrapped cross(61) page 13 Purlin 1(61) page 25 Splice Plate 2 (62) page 25 Gusset wrapped diacro (62) page 13 2L Splice Connection (63) page 25 fLV Shear P1(64) page 24 Partial stiff end plate (65) page II Tube Column Splice (65) page 25 Hss Brace Special (66) page 25 Standard bracing connection (67) page 13 Hss Brace Special (67) page 25 Column Splice 3 (68) page 25 Shear P1 Built-up T (69) page 24 Rail Joint (70) page 21 Brace w/L’s (70) page 25 US base plate connection (71) page 14 Brace w/L’s (71) page 25 US seat joint (72) page 21 US seat joint 2(73) page 21 Seat type 9 (73) page 26 US seat joint 3 (74) page 21 US seat joint 4 (75) page 21 Notch (76) page 12 US Splice joint (77) page 17 Simple Clip Angle 2 (82) page 26

r

p

Purlin connections (93) page 16 HQ end plate (97) page II Column tube seating (100) page 16 End plate (101) page 12

End plate (144) page 10 Brace Middle Tubes and PL (144) page 25 Shear plate simple (146) page 10 Welded to top flange (147) page 10 Welded to top flange special (149) page 10 Brace Middle Simple (149) page 25 Tapered column-beam stub (150) page 11 Joist to beam typel (160) page 21 Joist to column type 1(161) page 21 2-sided joist to column (162) page 21 Joist to column type 2(163) page 21 Joist to beam and column (164) page 21 Heavy brace (165) page 13 Angle profile box (170) page 21 Gusset stiffener (171 page 14)

Eaves haunch (102) page 16 Shear plate(103) page 12 Tube seat (104) page 16 Eaves beam to stanchion (104) page 23
Portal bracing (105) page 13 Gable Post Fin Plate (105) page 23 Apexhaunch(106) page 16

Non-Continuous Rail (106) page 23 Windbrace connection (110) page 13 End plate Comp flange (111) page 12
-

Two sided end plate Comp flange (112) page 12
-

Tube rail (113) page 16 Panel stabilizer (114) page 16 Two sided end plate (115) page 12 Two sided shearplate (118) page 12 Joining stub (119) page II

L splice (175) page 17
Parallel L profiles (176) page 17 Leg -2 or 3 diagonals (177) page 13 Leg-i diagonal (178) page 13 Moment connection (181) page 10 Column with stiffeners W (182) page 10 Beam prep (183) page 12 Full depth (184) page 10 Full depth special (185) page 10 Column with stiffeners (186) page 10 Column with stiffeners special (187) page 10 Column with stiffener (188) page 10 Shear plate tube column (189) page 10 Bent plate (190) page 10

Welded beam to beam (123) page 12
Circularjoining plates (124) page 17 Moose splice (125) page 17 Turnbuckle connection (126) page 17 Welded column with stiffener (128) page 12 Beam with stiffener (129) paQe 10 Moment connection (130) page 12 Column with shear plate (131) page 10 Column splice (132) page 17 Stub (133) page II Bolted moment connection (134) page 10 Beam to beam stub (135) page II Tapered column (136) page 17 Column site weld splice (137) page 17 Double bent gusset (140) page 13 Clip angle (141) page 10 Two sided end plate (142) pa2e 10 Two sided clip angle (143) page 10

Offshore Z(192) page 17 Offshore U (193) page 17 Offshore (194) page 12 Offshore 4(195) page 17

Tekia Stuctures Reference

5

Details
Simple Base Plate (55) page 26 End plate detail (1002) page 14 Stiffeners (1003) page 14 Base plate (1004) page 4 Stiffened notch (1006) page 14 Shear stud (1010) page 15 Stub (1011) page 15
Stub plate (1013) page 21 Stiffened base plate (1014) page 14

Angle profile box (1040) page 21
Stiffeners (1041) page 14

r

Base plate (1042) page 14 Stair base detail (1043) page 20 US bearing plate (1044) page 16 Twin profile connection plate (1046) page 15 US base plate (1047) page 14 US seat detail (1048) page 21 US seat detail 2(1049) page 21 Standard Tee(L050) page 14 Standard L0051) page 14 Circular base plate (1052) page 14 Base plate(l053) page 14 Dividing part (1054) page 17 Folded plate (1055) page 17 Ladder pieces (1056) page 20 Angle cut (1057) page 15 Penetrating diaphragm (1058) page 14 Inner diaphragm (1059) page 14
Web stiffeners (1060) page 14 Nethooks (1061) page 15

Wood girder bearing(l015) page 16 Web stiffened base plate (1016) page !4 Horizontal stiffener (1017) page 14 LProf base detail (1020) page 22
Doubler plate (1022) page 15

Connection plate (1026) page 20 Duct hole sleeve (1029) page 15 Stiffeners (1030) page 14 Lifting/alignment pieces (1031) page 15 Simple Base Plate 2(1031) page 26 Manlock column (1032) page 15 Seat Det Type 2(1032) page 26 Manlock beam (1033) page 15 Seat Del Type 1(1033) page 26 Stiffeners (1034) page 26 Pum #1(1035) page 15 Pum #2 (1036) page 15 Pum #3(1037) page 15 Stair base detail (1038) page 20 Stair base detail (1039) page 20

C

Safety rope hooks (1062) page 15 Staging paris (1063) page 15 Multiple stiffeners (1064) page 14 Standard gusset (1065) page 14 Box column base (1066) page 14 Joist bearing plate (1067) page 21

Stairs and handrail
Ladder (35) page 19

U-pan stairs (S71) page 19 Wooden step stairs (S72) page 19 Polybeam pan stairs (S73) page 19 Z.pan stairs (S74) page 19 Kickplate (S75) page 19

Helicoida] stairs (S59) page 19 Cage ladder (S60) page 19 Zinc coating hole (S61) page 15 Spiral stairs (S68) page 19 S

a

Tepda Structures Reterence

Stanchions (S76) page 19 Railings (S77) page 19 Stairs (582) page 19 Multiple beam railing (S84) page 19 Handrailing (1024) page 19 Connection plate (1026) page 20 Stringer stanchion Lprof(68) page 20 Stringer stanchion stiff (69) page 20 Handrail 1 (74) page 26 Stanchion side plate (83) page 20 Stanchion curved (84) page 20

Stanchion weld (85) page 20 Stanchion side profile (86) page 20 Stanchion double plate (87) page 20 Railing beam to beam (88) page 19 Railing beam to plane (89) page 19 Railing plane to plane (90) page 19 Railing plane to beam (94) page 19 Railing double curve (95) page 19 Grating penetration (92) page 20 Stringer cut (1023) page 20

Macros
Portal span (S2) page I 8 Turnbuckle bracing (S3) page 18 Built up box(S6) page 18 DWG profile to library (6) page 22 Panel in database (8) page 22 Generation of profiles (9) page 22 Profile cross-section from plate (10) page 22 Box girder (S13) page 18 Rolled cans (S2l) page 17 Tubular NC data (S22) page 17 Cross profile (S32) page 18 Cross plate (533) page 18 Dowco Bolt Macro (41) page 26 Tower generation (S43) page 18 Tapered column (S44) page 18 Tapered beam (S45) page 18 Crushed tube in points (S46) page 15 Gusset tube in points (547) page 15 Crushed tube in bolts (548) page 15 Gusset tube in bolts (549) page 15 Cross angles between points (550) page 15 Double angle between bolts (S51) page 15 Concrete var beam (S52) page 18 Tapered frame comonor (S53) page 18 Sagrods (S54) page 18 Windbracing (555) page 18 Vertical bracing (S56) page 18 Shed (S57) page 18 Building (S58) page 18 Tower member (S63) page 18 Footipak anchoring (564) page 14 Cross arms (S65) page 18 Tower diagonal (S66) page 18 Auto position (567) page 8 Hollow column stubs (569) page 17 Set Clearance (S70) page 17 Truss (578) page 8 Composite brace (S79) page 18 Bridging Macro (S80) page 22 Batten plates (585) page 15 Tapered beam (598) page 18 Tapered column (S99) page 18

Tekia Structures Reterence

7

0

U
8
Tekra Structures Reference

This map is current through Tekia Snuctures version 101 The connections shown in this map are those found on the All components toolbar.S. connections) TaMe Structures Reference Tekra Structures Connecton Map 9 .) There are some minor dif ferences found between the All components toolbar and the Components toolbar. (U. (Found on the menu: Window> Toolbars> All components.I Introduction Tekia Structures Connection Map This connection map is intended you help familiarize you with the location of the connections contained on each page of the Tekia Structures connection menu.

Create current connection Display AutoConnection dialog Find a component Previous page arrow Next page arrow 4 I Tekla Structures Connections Page 1 End plate (144) Two-sided end plate (142) Clip angle (141) Two-sided clip angle (143) Bent pLate (190) Shear plate simple (146) Welded to top flange (147) Welded to top flange S (149) Full depth (184) Full depth S(185) Beam with stiffener (129) Column with shear plate (131) Column with stiffeners (186) Column with stiffeners (188) Column with stiffeners S (187) Column with stiffeners W (182) Moment connection (181) Shear plate tube column (189) FJ1 I)I Bolted moment connection (134) Bent plate (151) ‘3 10 Tekja Structures Reference Tekia SucIures Connection Map .

2
End plate (29)

Tekla Structures Connections Page 2

1fr:
]: ]J
]j[

Two-sided end plate (24)

Welded shear plate (43)

Stiffened shear plate (17)

Stiffened end plate (27)

Partial stiff end plate (65)

Stiffener seating (12)

Spacer plate (48)

I V II jff
[ J[

Welded tee (32)

Bearing plate (7)

Hql (46)

Plate with nail (47)

fl E I______

fl

HQ End plate (97)

Stub (133)

Beam to beam stub connection (135) Joining Stub (119) Tapered column-beam stub (150)

Tekia Structures Reference 11 Tekia Structures connectton Map

0
)

3
Fitting (13)

Tekla Structures Connections Page 3

rr
or:

New notch (49)

Notch (76)

Weld preparation (44)

Round tube (23)

Welded column (31)

Beam prep (183)

It
ElF ]fl H

Welded column with stiffeners (128)

Offshore (194)

Welded beam to beam (123)

0
-I

End plate (101)

Two-sided end plate (115)

End plate Comp flange (111)
-

n

Two-sided end plate Cfl (112)
-

Clip angle (116)

Two-side clip angle (117)

Moment connection (130)

Shear plate (103)

Two side shear plate (118)

‘S
12
Tekla Structures Reterence Tekia Structures Connection Map

4
Boomerang bracing cross (60) Boomerang tube diagonal (59)

Tekla Stmctures Connections Page 4

Boomerang wrapped diagonal (58)

H fl fl J II L{ fl

Corner bolted gusset (57)

Corner tube gusset (56)

Corner wrapped gusset (63)

Bolted gusset (11)

Bracing cross (19)

Tube gusset (20)

Tube crossing (22)

Gusset wrapped diacro (62)

Wrapped cross (61)

Welded gusset (10)

Portal bracing (105)

Diagonal splice (53)

fj44 fl

Std bracing connection (67) Leg -2 3 Diagonals (177)

Windbracing (1)

Leg

-

1 Diagonal (178)

Windbrace connec tion (110) Heavy brace (165)

Double Bent Gussets (140)

Heavy brace gusset (166)

Tekia Structures Reference 13 Tekta Sthjctures Connection Map

r
5 DC ULAII
Tekla Structures Connections Page 5

Stiffeners (1003) Web stiffeners (1060)

Multiple Stiffeners (1064) Stiffeners (1041)

End plate detail (1002)

Stiffened notch (1006)

Horizontal stiffener (1017)

Stiffeners (1030)

Penetrating diaphragm (1058)

I I
-S

C fl

mni Diaphragm (1059)

Standard gusset (1065)

Standard Tee (1050)

Standard L (1051)

Gusset stiffeners (171)

U.S. Base plate connection (71) Base plate (1004)

Base plate (1042)

1 1F1 ‘h 1 •40• i11 Içi 1F1F •.II., ‘I I’

U.S. Base plate (1047)

Stiffened base plate (1014)

Circular base plates (1052) Box column base plate (1066)

a

in

Web stiffened base plate (1016)

Base plate (1053)

liii

Footipak anchoring (S64)

Caste-in plate (1069)

0
14
Teka Structures Reference Teka Svuctures Connection Map

6
StubilOll)

Tekla Structures Connections Page 6

She&Stud(l0l0)

Lifting/alignment pieces (1031)

Pum3 (1037)

Puml (1035)

LI[1E I51j3L
u0011

Pum2 (1036)

Manlock column (1032)

g

Manlock beam (1033)

Duct hole sleeve (1029)

4
[]j

Zinc coating hole (561)

Crushed tube in points (S46)

Gusset tube in points (S47)

Crushed tube in bolts (548)

Gusset cube in hefts (549)

Doubler plate (1022)
In

Twin profile connection plate (1046)

Batten plates (S85)

Cross angles between points (S50)

Double angle between bolts (S51) Net Hooks (1061)

a

Angle cut (1057) Safety rope books (1062)

1 [‘

Staging Parts (1063)

Tekia Structures Reference 15 Tekta Stuctures connection Map

n

7
Seating (30) Seating with nail (36)

Tekia Structures Connections Page 7

Cross (4)

4

Purlin connections (93)

Notched seating (9)

Seating (39)

Seating cap (37)

Seating cap plate (2)

U.S. Bearing plate (1044)

Column Tube Seating (100)

Tube seat (104)

Lø IF fl4 $ 2

Tube rail (113)

Cranked beam (41)

Fit haunch (51)

Haunch (40)

Double plate (50)

Eaves haunch (102)

Apex haunch (106)

Wood girder bearing (1015)

Traction bar (52)

Panel stabilizer (114)

I$

Tekia Stnjctures Reference Tekia Structures connection Map

8
Joining plates (14)

Tekla Structures Connections Page 8

X
r’ i
,, ,,

Tab plate (33)

Column splice (132)

Column splice (42)

Tube splice (6)

t- -4

Box girder splice (45)

Muffe (26)

Turnbuckle connection (126) L splice (175)
‘I

U.S. splice joint (77)

Parallel L profiles (176)

0

o[

Etz

Offshore 4(195)

Dividing part (1054)

Offshore Z (192)

PL IT
Offshore U (193)

t1;
Tube Rolled NC Cans

Folded plate (1055) Rolled cans (S21)

Tubular NC data (522)

Set Clearance (S70) Inner diaphragm (1059) Moose splice (125)

J Q:
I I

Penetrating diaphragm (1058)

tapered Column (136)

Column Site Weld Splice (137)

Circularjoining plates (124)

Hollow column stubs (S69)

2L Splice (152)

Tekia Structures Reference 17 Tekia Structures Connection Map

e

Tekia Structures Connections Page 9

Cross profile (S32)

i$
I

Cross plate (533)

Box girder (S 13)

o o’
I

Tapered beam (598)

Tapered column (S99) Tapered beam 2 (545)

if

Tapered column 2 (S44)

Concrete var beam (S52)

Tapered frame comonor (S53)

Composite brace (S79)

Tumbuckle bracing (S3)

Truss (S78)

Sag rods (S54)

Jf]9 r’t”
j5f’

Windbracing (S55)

Vertical bracing PS (556)

i 1 rf

Shed (557)

Building (S58)

Tower Generation (S43)

Tower member macro (563)

Cross anns (565)

Tower diagonal (566)

,._JI

Auto Position (S67)

Portal span (52)

Built up box (S6)

N’
18
TelcIa Structures Relerence Tekia Structures Connection teap

10 Stairs (S82) Wooden steps pan (S72) Tekla Structures Connections Page 10 4: 4 OKA II U pan (571) Polybeam pan (S73) Z pan (574) Ladder (535) Handrailing (1024) 6 U lEt 0 11111 iii I ‘I Helicoidal stairs (559) Cage Ladder (560) Multiple beam railing (S84) Railings (577) Stanchions (576) ! ‘I Kickplate (S75) Railing double curve (95) Railing beam to plane (89) Railing plane to plane (90) Railing plane to beam (94) Railing beam to beam (88) Spiral stair (S68) I Tekia Structures Reference 19 Tekia Sfructures Connectbn Map .

f[] Stanchion side profile (86) Stanchion double plate (87) Stanchion curved (84) Stringer cut (1023) Grating penetration (92) Stringer stanchion Lprof(68) Stringer stanchion stiff (69) Stairs detail (1038) Stairs detail (1039) Stairs detail (1043) 4’5 4.II Connection plate (1026) Stanchion side plate (83) Tekia Structures Connections Page 11 Stanchion weld (85) JkJ fl>j .-J Ladder pieces (1056) 20 Tek[a Structures Reference Tekia Shuctures Connection Map .

S. type 1(160) ]j Joist to Column. (164) Joist bearing plate (1067) Telda Struclures Reference 21 Telda Stuctures Connection Map . type 1(161) 2-Sided Joist to Col. Seatjoint 4(75) Wind column (5) Joist to Beam. (162) ] [J jj Joist to Column. Seat detail (1048) llhI I I Ifr 111ki flj H 111= [II ‘awl Stub (28) Angle profile box (1040) US. Seat joint 2(73) U. Seat joint 3 (74) U. Seat detail 2(1049) U.I2 Rail joint (70) Stub plate (1013) Tekla Structures Connections Page 12 Angle profile box (170) U.S. type 2(163) Joist to Beam and Col. Seat joint (72) U.S.S.S.

f 13 Cold rolled overlap Eave Beams-Stanchion Tekla Structures Connections Page 13 Cold Rolled Sleeved (2) Shear plate to hip Shaped Valley Cleat (8) LProf base detail (1020) Stay (10) Purlin connections (11) Diag brace conn. (12) Gutter (7) Profile cross-section from plate (10) DWG profile to library (6) Panel in database (8) Rubber window gasket (4) Generation of profiles (9) Bridging Macro (S80) to 22 Tekla Structures Reterence Teka Sfruclures Connection Map .

Tekia Structures Connections Page 14 Cold rolled sleeved (4) Cold rolled overlap (19) Eaves beam to stanchion (104) Gable Post Shear Plate (105) Non-Continuous Rail (106) Shearplate to hip (8) SimpTe Hip (14) Tekia Structures Reference 23 Tekia Sbuctures Connectron Map .

V1 Tekla Structures Connections Page 1X Simple Clip Angle (31) ] ][ Two Side Clip Angle (33) Simple Endplate (32) Two Side Endplate (34) Shear Pt Simple (35) Shear P1 Welded Top (36) Shear P1 Full Depth (37) Shear P1 to Top Special (38) Shear P1 Full Depth Special (39) Shear P1 Parallel (40) Shear P1 Built-up T (69) JtL IjJ Bent Shear Plate (48) H/V Shear P1(64) WV Sloped Shear P1(29) Shear P1 to Tube Column (47) H/V Shallow Framing (30) Shear P1 Col with Stiff (41) Shear P1 Col with Stiff Special (42) Shear and Flange Plates (43) tl 24 Tek[a Structures Reterence Tekia Stuctures Connecflon Map .

Tekla Structures Connections Page 2X Brace Corner Tubes and PL (44) Brace Middle Tubes andPL (144) Cenfll Brace Tube! Conn P1(50) Bracing Wrap Around w! Attachments (53) Brace Corner Simple (49) ll1 Brace Middle Simple (149) Central Bracing Simple (51) Bracing Wrap Around (46) LS Brace Col End P1(24) t TS Brace Col End P1(25) Bracing Cross Under Beam (45) Brace Clamp (28) Hss Brace Special (66) Hss Brace Special (67) Brace w!L’s (70) Brace wit’s (71) Splice Type 1(56) :‘ Splice Plate 2 (62) Purlin 1(61) Iuu Column Splice 3 (68) II 2L Splice Connection (63) II Tube Column Splice (65) DC Tekia Structures Reference 25 Tekia Structures Connecton Map .

n T Simple Clip Angle 2(82) Seat Conn Type 2 (54) Tekla Structures Connections Page 3X Seat Conn Type 1 (52) Seat Det Type 1(1033) ru’I Seat Conn Type 3 (59) Seat Type 5 (60) Seat Det Type 2(1032) Seat Conn Type 4 (57) Joist Seat (58) Wind Col 1(26) 1’ Seat Type 9 (73) Simple Base Plate (55) Simple Base Plate 2(1031) ) A DC Bolted Cap Plate (27) Handrail 1 (74) Dowco Bolt Macro (41) Stiffeners (1034) Clip Angles (44) Line/Plane INTERSECTION (42) 31F Line/Part INTERSECTION (43) 1 26 Tekla Structures Reterence Tekia Structures Connection Map .

(162) 17 21 C Cage Ladder (S60) Caste-in plate (1069) Central Brace Tube/Conn P1(50) Central Bracing Simple (51) Circular base plates (1052) Circularjoiningplates(124) Clip angle (116) Clip Angles (44) Cold rolled overlap Cold rolled overlap (19) Cold Rolled Sleeved (2) Cold rolled sleeved (4) Column Site Weld Splice (137) Column splice (132) Column splice (42) Column Tube Seating (100) Column with shear plate (131) Column with stiffeners (186) Column with stiffeners (188) Column with stiffeners 5 (187) Column with stiffeners W (182) Composite brace (579) Connection plate (1026) Corner bolted gusset (57) Corner tube gusset (56) Corner wrapped gusset (63) Crankedbeam(41) Create current connection Cross (4) Cross angles between points (S50) Cross arms (565) Cross plate (S33) Cross profile (S32) Crushed tube in bolts (S48) Crushed tube in points ($46) 19 14 25 25 14 17 12 26 22 23 22 23 17 17 17 16 10 10 10 10 10 18 20 13 13 13 16 10 16 15 18 18 18 15 15 A Anglecut(1057) Angle profile box (1040) Angle profile box (170) Apex haunch (106) Auto Position (S67) 15 21 21 16 18 B Base plate (1004) 14 Base plate (1042) 14 Base plate (1053) 14 Batten plates (585) 15 Beam prep (183) 12 Beam to beam stub connection (135) 11 Beam with stiffener (129) 10 Bearing plate (7) 11 Bentplate(151) 10 Bent Shear Plate (48) 24 Bolted Cap Plate (27) 26 Bolted gusset (11) 13 Bolted moment connection (134) 10 Boomerang bracing cross (60) 13 Boomerang tube diagonal (59) 13 Boomerang wrapped diagonal (58) 13 Box column base plate (1066) 14 Box girder (S13) 17 Box girder splice (45) 15 Brace Clamp (28) 25 Brace Corner Simple (49) 25 Brace Corner Tubes and PL (44) 25 Brace Middle Simple (149) 25 Brace Middle Tubes and PL (144) 25 Brace wIL’s (70) 25 Brace w/L’s (71) 25 Bracing cross (19) 13 Bracing Cross Under Beam (45) 25 Bracing Wrap Around (46) 25 Bracing Wrap Around w/ Attachments (53) . D Diag brace conn.Index NUMERICAL 2L Splice (152) 2-Sided Joist to Col.25 Bridging Macro (S80) 22 Building ($58) 18 Built up box (56) 18 . (12) Diagonal splice (53) Display AutoConnecfion dialog Dividing part (1054) Double angle between bolts (S51) Double Bent Gussets (140) Double plate (50) Doubler plate (1022) Dowco Bolt Macro (41) 22 13 10 17 15 13 16 15 26 27 Tekia Structures Reterence Index .

(164) Joist to Beam. type 2(163) 17 11 21 26 21 21 21 21 r E Eave Beams-Stanchion Eaves beam to stanchion (104) Eaves haunch (102) End plate Comp flange (111) End plate (101) End plate(144) End plate(29) End oate detail (1002) - 22 23 16 12 12 10 11 14 K Kickplate (S75) 19 F Find a component Fithaunch(51) Fitting (13) Folded plate (1055) Footipak anchoring (564) Fulldepm(164) Full depth S (185) 10 16 12 17 14 10 10 L L splice (175) Ladder (535) Ladder pieces (1056) Leg 1 Diagonal (178) Leg -23 Diagonals (177) Lifting/alignment pieces (1031) Line/Part INTERSECTION (43) Line/Plane INTERSECTION (42) LProf base detail (1020) LS Brace Col End P1(24) - G Gable Post Shear Plate (105) Generation of profiles (9) Grating penetration (92) Gusset stiffeners (171) Gusset tube in bolts (649) Gusset tube in points (547) Gusset wrapped diacro (62) Gutter (7) 23 22 20 14 15 15 13 22 17 19 20 13 13 15 26 26 22 25 M Manlocic beam (1033) Manlock column (1032) Moment connection (130) Moment connection (181) Moose splice (125) Muffe (26) Multiple beam railing (S84) Multiple Stiffeners (1064) 15 15 12 10 17 17 19 14 c’ H HN Shallow Framing (30) HNShearPl(64) Handrail 1 (74) Handrailing (1024) Haunch (40) Heavy brace (165) Heavy bracegusset(166) Helicoidal stairs (S59) Hollow column stubs (S69) Horizontal stiffener (1017) Hql(46) Hss Brace Special (66) Hss Brace Special (67) 24 24 26 19 16 13 13 19 17 14 11 25 25 N NetHooks(1061) New notch (49) Next page arrow Non-Continuous Rail (106) Notch (76) Notched seating (9) 15 12 10 23 12 16 0 Offshore (194) Offshore4(195) Offshcre U (193) OffthoreZ(192) 12 17 17 17 I Inner Diaphragm (1059) 17 ‘4 28 Tekla Strucwres Reference ndex .Duct hole sleeve (1029) DWG profile to library (6) . type 1(160) Joist to Column. type 1(161) Joist to Column.15 22 J Joining plates (14) Joining Stub (119) Joist bearing plate (1067) Joist Seat (58) Joist to Beam and Col.

p Panel in database (8) Panel stabilizer (114) Parallel L profiles (176) Partial stiff end plate (65) Penetrating diaphragm (1058) Plate with nail (47) Polybeam pan (573) Portal bracing (105) Portal span (S2) Previous page arrow Profile cross-section from plate (10) Pumi (1035) Pum2(1036) PumS (1037) Purlin 1(61) Purlin connections (11) Purlin connections (93) .22 16 17 11 14 11 19 13 18 10 22 15 15 15 25 22 16 R Rail joint (70) Railing beam to beam (88) Railing beam to plane (89) Railing double curve (95) Railing plane to beam (94) Railing plane to plane (90) Railings (S77) Rolledcans(S21) Round tube (23) Rubber window gasket (4) 21 19 19 19 19 19 19 17 12 22 S Safety rope hooks (1062) Sag rods (S54) Seat Conn Type 1 (52) Seat Conn Type 2 (54) Seat Conn Type 3 (59) Seat Conn Type 4 (57) Seat Det Type 1 (1033) SeatDetType2(1032) Seat Type 5 (60) SeatType9(73) Seating (30) Seating (39) Seating cap (37) Seating cap plate (2) Seating with nail (36) Set Clearance (570) Shaped Valley Cleat (8) Shear and Flange Plates (43) Shear P1 Built-up T (69) Shear P1 Col with Stiff (41) Shear P1 Col with Stiff Special (42) Shear P1 FuW Depth (37) Shear P1 Full Depth Soecial (39) 15 18 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 16 16 16 16 16 17 22 24 24 24 24 24 24 Shear P1 Parallel (40) Shear P1 Simple (35) Shear P1 to Top Special (38) Shear P1 to Tube Column (47) Shear P1 Welded Top (36) Shear plate (103) Shear plate simple (146) Shear plate to hip Shear plate tube column (189) ShearStud (1010) Shed (557) Simple Base Plate (55) Simple Base Plate 2 (1031) Simple Clip Angle (31) Simple Clip Angle 2 (82 Simple Endplate (32) Simple Hip (14) Spacer plate (48) Spiral stair (S68) Splice Plate 2 (62) Splice Type 1 (56) Staging Parts (1063) Stairs (S82 Stairs detail (1038) Stairs detail (1039) Stairs detail (1043) Stanchion curved (84) Stanchion double plate (87) Stanchion side plate (83) Stanchion side profile (86) Stanchion weld (85) Stanchions (S76) Standard gusset (1065) Standard L (1051) Standard Tee (1050) Stay (10) Std bracing connection (67) Stiffened base plate (1014) Stiffened end plate (27) Stiffened notch (1006) Stiffened shear plate (17) Stiffener seating (12) Stiffeners (1003) Stiffeners (1030) Stiffeners (1034) Stiffeners (1041) Stinger cut (1023) Stringer stanchion Lprof (68) Stringer stanchion stiff (69) Stub (lOll) Stub (133) Stub (28) Stub plate (1013) 24 24 24 24 24 12 10 23 10 15 18 26 26 24 26 24 23 11 19 25 25 15 19 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 19 14 14 14 22 13 14 11 14 11 11 14 14 26 14 20 20 20 15 11 21 21 T Tab plate (33) Tapered beam (S98) Tapered beam 2(S45) 17 18 18 Tekia Stwolures Reference Index 29 .

Seat joint (72) U. Seat detail 2(1049) U. Seat joint4 (75) 19 14 14 16 21 21 21 21 21 21 a 30 Tekla Sbuclures Reference index . Seat joint 3(74) U.S. Seat detail (1048) U.S. Base plate (1047) U.S. Base plate connection (71) U.S.S.17 Tapered column (599) 18 Tapered column 2(S44) 18 Tapered column-beam stub (150) 11 Tapered frame comonor (S53) 18 Tekia Structures Connections Page 1 10 Tekla Structures Connections Page 10 19 Tekla Structures Connections Page 12 21 Tekia Structures Connections Page 13 22 Tekta Structures Connections Page 14 23 Tekla Structures Connections Page 1X 24 Tekla Structures Connections Page 2 11 Tekla Structures Connections Page 2X 25 Tekla Structures Connections Page 3 12 Tekla Structures Connections Page 3X 26 Tekla Structures Connections Page 4 13 Tekla Structures Connections Page 5 14 Tekia Structures Connections Page 6 15 Tekla Structures Connections Page 7 16 Tekia Structures Connections Page 8 17 Tekla Structures Connections Page 9 18 Tower diagonal (S66) 18 Tower Generation (843) 18 Tower member macro (S63) 18 Traction bar(52) 16 Truss (S78) 18 TS Brace Col End Pt (25) 25 Tube Column Splice (65) 25 Tube crossing (22) 13 Tube gusset (20) 13 Tube rail (113) 16 Tube seat (104) 16 Tube splice (6) 17 Tubular NC data (S22) 17 Turnbuckle bracing (S3) 18 Turnbuckle connection (126) 17 Twin profile connection plate (1046) 15 Two Side Clip Angle (33) 24 Two Side Endplate (34) 24 Two side shear plate (118) 12 Two-side clip angle (117) 12 Two-sided clip angle (143) 10 Two-sided end plate Cfl (112) 12 Two-sided end plate (115) 12 Two-sided end plate (142) 10 Two-sided end plate (24) 11 - U. Seat joint 2 (73) U.S. Bearing plate (1044) U.S. splice joint (77) 17 V Vertical bracing PS (856) 18 t w Web stiffened base plate (1016) Web stiffeners (1060) Weld preparation (44) Welded beam to beam (123) Welded column (31) Welded column with stiffeners (126) Welded gusset (10) Welded shear plate (43) Welded tee (32) Welded to top flange (147) Welded to top flange S(149) Windbracing (1) Wind Col 1(26) Wind column (5) Windbrace connection (110) Windbracing ($55) Wood girder bearing (1015) Wooden steps pan (572) Wrapped cross (61) 14 14 12 12 12 12 13 11 ii 10 10 13 26 21 13 18 16 19 13 z Zpan(S74) Zinc coating hole (561) 19 15 ( U Upan (S71) U.S.S.S.Tapered Column (136) .

0 Basic Training 9 November 2007 Copyright © 2007 Tekla Corporation .* 1EKLA Tekia Structures Basic Training Steel Teka Structures 13.

0 BASIC TRAINING Introduction Copyright © 2007 Tekla Corporation .F’ TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.

Contents Introduction to Tekia Structures Basic Trainhig Overview Basic Modeling 1 System Components Basic Modeling 2 Interactive Detailing Numbering and Reports Principles of Drawings Assembly and Single Part Drawings General Arrangement Drawings Multi-Drawings and Multi-Numbering Drawing Management How to use the training material .1 1 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 6 Copyright@ 2007 Tekla Corporation TEKLASTRUCTURES 130 BASIC TRAININS Introduction iii .

0 BASt TRAINING Introduction CopflbtCO7TaCcqwdm .C 0 I U iv TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.

which is comprised of two blocks mode] I and model 2. The training is divided into lessons. and produce drawings and reports from the model with Tekia Structures. each of which covers a certain particular task of the design process and introduces the commands and functions required to complete that particular task. and the training model is taken from a real building project. The training workflow is designed to resemble a real design project. — Copydghl © 2007 Tekla corporaton IESLA STRUCTURES 13M BASIC TRAINING Introduction . The substructures are made of reinforced concrete. The model is a paper industry building.Introduction to Tekia Structures Basic Training Overview This training course will demonstrate how to create a 3D model of a building. and the superstructures are modeled with both steel and concrete structures. a de inking plant.

use CAD principles like absolute and relative reference points use polar tracking manipulate memtrs within the model (copy.e Basic Modeling I This lesson introduces the basic modeling thnctions of Tekla Structures. You will learn how to: • start a new structural 3D model • • • • • • create rids create views create concrete and steel parts. You will learn how to: • create connections • • • work with connection parameters save the parameters for later use clash check the model 2 IEKLASTRuCTIJRES 130 BASIC TRAiNING Introduction Copyrightt 2007 Tetla Corporation . mirror) System Components This lesson introduces the basics of creating connections in Tekla Structures. move.

to create reports CopyiigfiI ® 2007 Tekla Corpoiation TLKLA STRUCtURES 13. You will learn how to: • adjust member attributes • • • • • • • • • use coordinate locks input construction points work in true planes (sloped.Basic Modeling 2 In this lesson we will recap the basic functions introduced in lesson 1. skewed) combine separate models. cuts) • • • add system components to previously exploded connections create unique connection objects interactively. and you will learn some more about the basic functions. bolts.0 BASIC TRAJNINS Introduction 3 . define and apply custom components Numbering and Reports How to handle part marking within Tekla Structures is covered in this chapter. welds. create a backup model import a previously created model define select filters work with phases setup job specific information Interactive Detailing This lesson introduces how to interactively create unique or customized connections between paris You will learn how to: • explode system connections and modi connection objects (parts. You will learn: • numbering basics • • • how to customize the numbering system numbering in phases how.

You will learn how to: • create anchor bolt plans • • • • • • create erection plans of individual views create general arrangements of multiple views on one sheet modi& drawings properties modi view properties modi& object properties create drawing objects 4 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13t BASIC TINlNG Introduction Copyright® 2007 Tekla corporaton . General Arrangement Drawings This lesson covers how to create erection plans. details and section views. You will learn: • the integration between the drawings and the model • • • the drawing types available in Tekla Structures the basics of the drawing list the various levels of editing drawings F’ Assembly and Single Part Drawings The next step is to learn how to create fabrication drawings for the items that were created in the model. You will learn: • how to create individual drawings • • • • how to use selection filters to create groups of drawings of members with similar attributes how to create drawings automatically using wizards editing drawings manually handling drawing after changes are made to the model.Principles of Drawings This lesson introduces the basics of how to create and handle drawings in Tekia Structures.

Drawing Management This lesson covers more advanced aspects of handling drawings You will learn how to • control revisions • • • • • • edit drawings more effectively using classifiers and cloning customize drawing borders by adding logos make and use basic drawing templates plot drawings export drawings in other file formats share your model eleconically CopyrfhI ti 2007 Tekla Corparafion TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.Multi-Drawings and Multi-Numbering This lesson introduces multi-drawings and explains the principles of multi-numbering. You wilt learn how to • create multi-drawings • • • collect multiple assembly or single-part drawings to one multi-drawing sheet apply multi-numbering to multi-drawings update and modib’ multi-drawings.0 BASIC TRAINING Introduction 5 .

Each view is displayed In its own window inside the TekIa Sr. the links provide you with the information you need to complete the course by yourself. Therefore you should go through the lessons in numerical order. The label titles in the left side margin are an indication that you will be asked to do something.’ucrures window. Help link For mote infonna lion see j1Zling>ftthgsta. For example.2 Grids Lia ) 2)View plane [j View properties Defining grid View ProF [2) creating end modifyng - structure part(s) and component(s) • along the grid lines • of the entire • of selected Each view has properties whch define its aFpeaance You tar c1ane the appearance of a -new afta you create t so choose the rrpatinn mpthnri that q. 2)Dispeyt. 2 Step—by—ste instruction & lekia Structures Online Help Back Irdex - 1] A Hide çoreerts Print Starch Qptions Fevctaes - TEJCLA [21 Telda Slrtfl.gw’dh’±o - ) Retresh. The online help will assist you in getting the most from this course.. Each view has a view plane on which the nith al-c visible and points are i epiesented as yellow crosset Points outside die view plane appear asoed dots. If you cannot attend a training course.iedTeii Label views (rRieate views aIon5 idhnes. The necessary background data is given either by the teacher (in training courses) or through links to the Tekla Structures online help.r How to use the training material Al] the lessons in this training material deal with the same project (except the Analysis & Design lesson). Note that with the assistance of online help you will learn to use Tekla Structures as efficiently as possible from the very beginning. you can create views: U * Re. which are complemented by background and additional information. See the figure below for an example of the step-by-step instructions and an online help link. 6 TEKLASTRuCTSJRES 13_a SASIC TRAINING Introduction Copyright (5 2137 Tukla Corporation . the sc-eel.inn ocerw.3 Views Intro d u cti on There are severaJ ways to create views in Tekia Structures.it en’’ This cpr. I Select one widtine Riahi-click and select Create view> Grid views from die pop-tip menu to open the Creation of views along grid lines dialog box. ctstg. All lessons are comprised mainly of step-by-step instructions.easa lisa Mcdeg j Prelece EVJ -t Introduction 2 Getting Slatted 1 Basics • 2. A V]C’A is a ‘epresenranion oft model from a specik oeation. . and enable the usage of this training material also for self-learning. Each lesson starts with a short introduction to its contents. Pictures of the dialog boxes and of the mode] help you to visualize the instructions and show the desired result. We wilt tios create Etevetjou and Plan t-iews alone the ecidluies created in the previous it cc jot. These links give you the related information quickly and easily.res orfrie he [2) ustig crhne ne4o I? TekStrflresrodcies 2.

lgnonng the text accompanying these may cause something to fail or cause a process to produce unexpected results. • • Stop Signs are severe warnings. The aim of this training material is to teach you best practices. Tips are shown with a light bulb icon. Technical Information is denoted by gear wheels. the most efficient way to use Tekla Structures.. Blue. ‘. You can choose to ignore this info until you are more confident with the system or you can pay attention to it if you are curious.0 BASIC TRAINING Introduction 7 . lOpt Program text is written in Courier New lOpt Icons are also used to highlight certain information: A warning triangle highlights a note that is worth remembering. However. Or it may serve to point out a potential problem to be avoided.. This means that repeated tasks are occasionally calTied out with using different procedures than those presented earlier in the lessons.Certain styles of text will be used throughout in order to help the reader differentiate between different instructions: Normal text is wTitten in Times New Roman 10 Pt Filenames are written in Mat Qpt Terms that are first introduced are written in Times New Roman Italics lOpt Items that are shown on screen are written in Aria! Bold Spt Help File Paths are written in Times New Roman Bold. Copyri9ht © 2007 Tekla CoiparaCon TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. the aim is also to introduce alternative methods to carry out tasks. They provide additional information that may help speed up your learning or help you produce better or quicker results.

1) ‘Ii 8 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BAS[C TRAINING Introduction Copyright© 2007 Tokla Corporation .

e*e TEKLA Basic Modeling I Tekia Structures 13.0 Basic Training 29 October 2007 Copyright © 2007 Tekla Corporation .

0 BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling I Copyght © 2007 Tekla Corporation .) 0 1—li TEKL STRUCTURES 13.

9 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.11 Start Tekia Structures Create a New Model BasicModell Create Grids Create Plane Views along Gridlines Create Foundations Create Columns Silos Create Beams Create Bradng Add lnfill Beams Add Horizontal Bracing — I 2 3 6 10 17 24 27 30 45 52 55 Copyright © 2007 TekIa Corporation TEKI.A STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling I 1-ui .8 1.1 1.4 1.Contents Basic Modeling 1.5 1.7 1.6 1.

0 BASIC TRAINiNG Basic Modeling I Copyrighl© 2007 Tekla Corporation .C I -iv TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.

0 BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling I 1—1 .F. - Basic Modeling In this lesson In this lesson we will go through the basic fUnctions of Tekla Structures: How to create anew structural 3D model.çr 7 p Copyhght © 2007 Tekia Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. grids. When you have completed this lesson the model will look as shown below. . grid views and structural members in the model.

At first.. —- — — fl—I — — — — — IAI -*tij niAWC a’.0 BASIC TMINING Basic Modeling I Copytght © 2007 TekIa corporation 4’) . 1 •Ø ala Ic.MMa iPAPflaiØdI tniai—’-*. Navigate through Programs> Tekia Structures> Single user> Tekia Structures enu US Imperial. j.- A4 1-2 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. This Will start Tekla Structures in an imperial measure environment using the English language. When you open an existing model or create a new model. dick the Windows Start button. the icons and available menu options will become active. . ’’. r. Start Tekia Structures Documentation Tco[s 1’ — felda Sfructajres enu US Irnperi T&da S :tit-es enu US ‘etrc k The modeling interface is now opened as shown below. most of the menu options and icons are gray indicating that they are inactive.1 Start Tekia Structures To start Tekla Structures.1. — -—.

fl\SteeN Model nate: Basic iodeI1-FirstNaneLas1ame Model type: Single-user [ 4. Every model must have a unique name. This is particularly usefUl when a number of detailers are working on one contract. you first need to create an empty model database with a unique name.. At the lower center of the New Model dialog box. The menus and icons become activated and the model name appears in the title bar of the Tekla Structures window.1. 5. Name the model BasicModell-yournarne.0 BASIC TRArNINIG Basic Modeling I 1-3 . especially during the training class) J 3.2 Create a New Model Start a — BasicModell To stan a new model. duplicate Copyraht © 2007 lekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. (Adding your own name to the model name helps to identii your model on a netwurk. from the pull-down menu or click the New model icon in the Standard toolbar to open the New model dialog box. Select File> New.. 2. In this lesson use the name BasicModel 1 followed by your name. Click the OK button to create the new model. new model 1. Tekia Structures does not allow model names. ) in model names. Save in C:\TeklaStnjcturesModels\Vi 3. Tekla Structures suggests the name New ModeL for the model (see below). The fill path of the model folder is shown in the top field. ‘I. OK Select single user mode. r: TekLa Structures zIe Eda - C:\TektaStructuresModels\BasicModetl Parts Loads Detailing Drawing Prcperties Setup Tools View Points J hil 1 €1 t 1 c4d-¾-d CQC! L LLL V iaIj 1 )I. Do not use special marks ( / \. The Multi-User facility in Tekla allows a multiple amount of users in one model.

‘I Tekla Structures automatically created a grid and a 3D view according to the saved standard view properties.‘I. dashed line cube. ‘-4 Remember to save your model often. 3d D C B A 1. and always save when opening a new model or exiting Tekla Structures model. If you already have a model open.0 BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling I Copytghl @2007 Tea Ccrpcraton . 4 Lines show the projections of the grids that are visible on the view plane. Tekla Structures prompts you to save that model. The default 3D view and grid are shown below. Tekla Structures indicates the work area of a view using a green. ‘I. For more information. V •Viewl - You can only have one model open at a time. To save the model: Save the model Select File> Save from the pull-down menu or click the Save icon in the Standard toolbar. see: Help: Modeling> Getting started> Basics. 3 -. 4% 1-4 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.

‘I.Tekla Structures also includes an auto save feature that backs up and saves your work automatically at set intervals.aia Autosave Autosave inteival Autosave after evely Autosave after creating every [Aavanced.r. pull-down menu. see: Help: Modeling> Introduction> Screen layout Help: Modeling> Introduction > Toolbars Copyrtghl © 2007 Tekla Corporalion TEKLt SThUCTURES 13.. V There are several ways to execute commands in Tekla Structures: Icons Commands in main pull-down menu Commands in pop-up menu By default all the commands are found in pull-down menu.D BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling I 1-5 .. These intervals are set in the Autosave properties dialog box obtained from the Tools> Options. If you have an object selected. I 20 10 modeling or editing commands drawings LOK ir Apply flcanc& I For more information on saving and auto saving. and most of them in the icons. In this training manual we will mainly use the pop-up menu to activate commands.. see: Help: Modeling> Getting started> Basics> Saving a model and exiting Tekla Structures Most commands for Tekla Structures are found both in menus (main or pop-up) and in toolbars (icons). For more information on Tekla Structures screen layout and toolbars. A pop-up menu appears when you click the right mouse button (right-click). IR Options [jj Cleats check standard Hidden lines No dotted [Save osJ standard zceLzng >cu5e settir4a C Olli pals ddled CAt pails dcjted So5ds s’ Ntithexing Crientsticn zarks Omits and decl. the commands on the pop-up menu relate to that object.

. select different saved settings from the pull down menu and Load them. You can see and modi& the properties of an object by double clicking on the object in the model. pull-down menu. or save changed settings with a new Save As name typed in to the field now named Standard. beams. 1-6 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.sicModel as shown below. You can also Close the dialog box. Modify an existing grid. views. Ii Deate Mody Get /rII Cbse In this case you will have the option to Create a new grid. These are typical for most property dialog boxes in Tekla Structures. Save j standaid You have the option to Save the settings as they stand.3 Create Grids Properties dialog box In order to create or modi& the grid you need a basic understanding of how to use a property dialog box. connections. All entities in Tekia Structures such as grids.. To create the appropriate grid for Ba. Double click on the grid and the grid properties dialog box will open. or Get the properties of an existing grid by highlighting the grid and clicking the Get button.0 BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling I CopyTtght 2001 TekIa Corporalion . These are typical for most property dialog boxes in lekia Structures. Note the buttons along the top of the dialog box. #5 an .1. you can delete the existing grid and create a new one from the Points > Grid. even points and welds have properties. Or you can modiz the existing grid. Note the buttons along the bottom of the box.

Complete the Grid dialog box as shown below by fillmg In the X. To modi’ the existing grid: Modify the existing grid 1. V and Z coordinates and the labels for the gridlines. .Elevation • .0 BASIC I RAINING Basic Modeling I 1—7 . Double-click on a gridline. Copyñght © 2007 Tek]a Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. . 2. This opens the Grid properties dialog box.

4.-a” D U’ a-’ E Magnetic grid plane EExensbIneticeree C the. GHID•BASICMQDEL1 Iseveasi GRID-BASICPiIODEL1 I I 0 Click Close to close the dialoQ box. Feet and inches (755/8 or 75. There are a number of ways you can type fractions in Tekia Structures including fractional inches (75/8).CPJRES 13. GRID-BASICMODEL1. 1-B WCA STR.’gs E Create ‘Jser-de1ed attiRes. p Get Close H Hoddy jj ‘I. 3. Decimal inches (7. I R1 5.0 SAS TRAINiNG C 1 GopyTigni ( 2007 Tekia Corporal’on Basic Modeling I . enter the grid file name.r v [Save as standard Cooidinates RN Ez Labels U’ 61 9-8’ 0” 43-2’ 012-79/2240 44-0” 1234567 AB Eiz 012-71/2 24’0’ 44W Origi flight/Above Line extersions Leit/Below EXO 0” —] LJY 6’•O’ 6-0” Eva 0” 8-0’ P1 agnetisrn 6. sett.5 for 7’/z’). Click Modify to apply the new grid values. You don’t have to type the inch symbol when you mean inches. and click the Save as button to save the grid values for later use. It will always assume this by default. In the Save as field..5’ for 7-6) The program will convert whatever you type into a format that it can use.625) or even decimal feet (7.

was not updated. select the magnetic grid plane checkbox.. enter a distance from the grid line to extend the area within which the objects are bound to the end lines. To fit the work area according to the modified grid: Fit work area I. To bind objects to grid lines. The border will turn red when the view is active. Right-click and select Fit work area from the pop-up menu. dialog box obtained from the Tools>Options pull-down menu. When the grid was modified. Units and decimals topic. Click in the view to activate it.0 BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling I 1-9 .V / — You can make grids and grid lines act magnetically so that the objects on the grid lines follow if you move the grid line. the work area of the view.A STRUCTURES 13. For more information on grids and dialog box buttons. In the Extension for magnetic area field.e Fit work area Redrau window The view should now look as shown below: Bl A 6 AZ Copyrighl © 2007 Tekla Corporalion TEKL. see: Help: Modeling> Introduction > Inputting information > Common buttons The numeric units used in the Grid dialog box (as well as in other modeling dialog boxes) can be controlled from the Units and decimals. 2. shown with the dashed line cube.. -‘rIQerves Ivlo. qeerrun.

1i::J E!i:i View Name: An*: Projection: Pepierentatior. the Angle of view is 3d and the view will be looking lip 50’-O and Down 3’-O into virtual reality from the location where the view was cut at the 0-0” level 4 1-10 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.4 Create Plane Views along Gridlines We will now create Elevation and Plan views along the gridlines created in the previous section.To hide the work area cube. Each view is displayed in its own window inside the main Tekla Structures window.INING Basic Modeling I Copyñght © 2007 TelcIe Corporation U .0000 20. For more information. Create Plan view To create a plan view 1.0 BASIC T. Get E Visible object group: r H Modify [ 2. 0000 Orthogon Rendered staiard . Visibility of object types: 1 Object group. OK jj Apply j[w/rlflCancel 1 Note the Name 3d.. Open the view properties dialog box by double clicking anywhere in the 3d view. These are the properties of the 3d view. Select the view then hold down the CTRL+SHIFT keys and right click then select Redraw Window r 1.. Each view has a view plane on which the grids are visible. View type: standard [Save a] standard 3O Rotation aroundZ: Rotation around K -30.- Color ad transpaency in all views: Visibility View depth: E Up: Down: 50-0” 3-0’ Display.. A view is a representation of a model from a specific location. see: Help: Modeling> Getting started> Views.

. This is typical of most property dialog boxes in Tekia Structures. Note the setting for the angle of view is now Plane instead of 3d.. that elevation becomes the default. 0000 -J 1 2 Projection: Representation 2 Rotation aroundX: fR erdeie. Create Basic Views 6. Click on the Create basic view icon The following dialog box Will open. angle and up and down depth of the view would still be set as 3d.ight @} 2007 Tekia Corporation TEKL4 STRUCTURES 1O BASIC TRAiNING Basic Modeling I 1-11 . It is important to click the apply button or you will create a view with the “old” applied settings which in this case were 3d. [ Down: Visibility ot oect types: Visible object group: OK IL Apply jflModwy IL Get Cancel 4.0000 20. and the view is going to look Up and Down into virtual reality 3’-O” from the location of the cut in the model so you don’t see the steel in the floor above or below. select Plan View and click Load. The default elevation is 0”. Enter the elevation to cut the view you applied setting. will be used for the next view created. j Cancel Copy. in this case 0-0. 9.3. Click Create.2 standard ‘I [ View type: 2 Color and lransparency in all views: Visibility View depth: Up: V [epresentation] —1 Lpjspi... Once a different elevation as been input.. 7. and the new view created would be considered a copy view. In the name field after the text PLAN AT EL. From the pull down menu at the top of the view properties dialog box. in this case 0. v object group. !Plan View View 2 Name: IHa-i 2 Orthogonal Plan View I PLAN AT EL OO 0 L Plane Rotation around 2: -30. type the elevation of the view you wish to create. Click Apply so these settings. Plane: Coordinate: 0” Create v 8.-n. The name. or attributes. 5.

0000 E Rotation around X: fLei!dered standard V Color and transparency in all views: Visibility View depth: [Representation] Up: JDown Visibility ol object types: Visible thject group: Display. 2.. 3. (a 1-12 TEKLA STRUCTuRES 13. 4. but you can never modi& or change where the view was cut. 0000 20. will be used for the next view created. Select Elevation View from the pull down menu at the top of the dialog box and click Load.You should now have a p]an view cut at elevation O’O”. Click Apply so these settings. Create elevation view S To create an elevation view. Elevation View Save asj ElevationView View Name: ELEVATION ON GRID A E Angle: Projection: Repiesentation View type: C Plane Orthogonal Roion agoi.0 BASFC TRAiNING Coprnght © 2007 TekIa Corporalion Basic Modeling I . or attributes. the type of cut.. In the Name field... standard [object group. (Plan or 3d) and the distance the view will display up and down.ndZ: •30. after the text ELEVATION ON GRID type the name of the grid line for which you wish to cut an elevation view. You can double click in the view and modi’ the name of the view. Open the view properties dia]og box if it isn’t already open.] OK ][ Apply ][ Modily ] Get ]IP’/r]F Cancel J 5.

Right-click and select Create view> Grid views from the pop-up menu. As you move the cursor you win see arrows pointing the direction the cut will face.Create view Dy two points I 2. Tekla Snctures offers a tool to quickly create views for each elevation and grid line as specified in the grid properties. CopyTight© 2007 Teka Corporaton TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. Create grid views 1. Click OK to close the Views dialog box. You have now created on elevation view for grid liie A.0 BASIC TRAJNING Basic Modeling I 1-13 . 2. click on the intersection of grid lines A and I. To automatically create views along gridlines and elevations. Select a gridline to highlight the grid. Note that these views will always be cut looking north and west. Click on the Create view by two points icon in In the plan view you created at elevation 0. 4. Click on the intersection of grid lines A and 7. and name these views with the markers you specified. 1 B 2 3 4 5 6 7 A A 3.

This opens the Creation of views along grid lines dialog box shown here. All invisible (closed) named views are listed on the left. Creation at views along grid lines V j standaid View plane Number oF views View name preFix XY All All YZ OK All Create v PLANATEL v ELEVATION ON GRID ELEVATION CN GRID View properkies PlanView ElevatnView Elevati. Click OK to close the Creation of views along grid lines dialog box. 5. Note the view properties. To view these setting you can click on the Show button and the view properties dialog box will open. The Views dialog box appears presenting all the created views. the views you create using this method could be named wrong or cut at the wrong elevations. for example a label was missing. and all visible views on the right (see below). ‘4 1-14 TEK STRUCTURES 13. Note that if the grid properties were incorrect in some way. These are the same settings you selected from the pull down menu at the top of the dialog box when you created each view.“tetuot Propeies Inquire Copy rAoe Delete Exact lines —I Ce FC€ C n Create flew Bind to dane Zoom Update w1ndow Next window Eas.0 BASIC TINING Basic Modeling I pght © 27Tekla rratn L . 6.c Grid ews 3. Click Create in the Creation of views along grid lines dialog box and the views will automatically be created.View I v] Showj Show V 1 “I Sh [Canoe 4.

To select multiple views. 2. Select the view(s) you want to display or hide. 0 c-AID GRID B PLAN A! EL. h± dow. 12—7112 PLAN Ii EL.0 BASIC T4INING Basic Modeling I 1-15 .A PLAN AT EL.4sit4y To seled mt1jle views.Seled and move ews between the hsls to co. Visible views: 1 [• Celele - - - IL-i3JlO-NOU SAID. 44—0 OK J copyflght © 2007 Tetra Corpcralion TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. -n 4 Select and move views between the lists to contiol visibility.ATIOt: 1:172J1010 A1:Oc 5 101 ON GRID 1 OtT 2t0 2 ON OAID 3 @2104 ON LVste vws 3d cc t. Named ews. 0• I B. 3.td . ELEVATIOR ELZ’JMICU ELEVAIIDN ELEVATICI-I ELEVATION C-N 041 ON ON ON ELEVATION ON ILrYATIC•N 3fl ELEVATION ON GAIl GAID SAID SAID @210 c-aiD i 2 3 4 S 3 7 2 1.J 4. hold down ctil key while selecting.n oW -key v secIing * 1 Named vws ELEVATION :LE7aIDtc ILEVATEOR ELEATIOE :Ir. 24—0 For more information on view properties. Delete ON ON 2210 ELr5:OI OR 2C0 :Lt. Clicking the Open named view list icon will open the Views dialog box (which is already open). see: Help: Modeling> Getting started> Views> View properties To display or hide views: Display or hide views 1. 24—C’ PLAN AT EL.c:or Ott SAID 3 502-i’: AT 1L 5L-N AT IL. Use the arrows to move view(s) from left to right (visible) or vice versa (invisible).

To switch between views.K: 7 B S.. 3.:‘•ç 6 . N. / I. hold down the “Ctrl” key. which can bevery usefUl when working on your model.. The center of rotation is displayed with the symbol below. 1 B 2 3 4 56 AL 3) 41 i L 1-16 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. J. A H.)< . Nine is the mimum number of open views. You can rotate the model in a 3D view using the default center of rotation. Delete unnecessary views from the view list.4..:‘.. The keyboard shortcut CtrItP” is how you dothis. Change between 3D I Plane To rotate the model.Q Rotate the model / — Do not keep too many views open at the me time. To reset the center of rotation.. press the V key on your keyboard. press “Ctrl+Tab” on your keyboard. In the view. 4 _. 5 3 2 . click where you want the center of rotation to be.ç•. 2. You can switch a view from plane (2D) to 3D by using the keyboard.0 BASIC TRAlJlNG Basic Modeting I Copyright © 2007 Tekla Corporation 4 . You can open or close named views by clicking the Open named view list icon. then click and hold down the middle mouse button while moving the mouse to rotate the model. . or you can set a new center of rotation.

Close all open views but the 3d view and plan view at elevation 0. ____________________ _______ Pad footing properties standard v [saveasi standard 4. You can also double click on the view border to make it fill the work area.0 BASIC TRAINING 1-17 Basic Modeling I . 2 Class 2 L erde.’ned a2rrtes LOK j[ APPbJj MceJty J[ s J[w/rI[ Caicel CDpyrrght © 2007 Tekla Corration TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. From the Window pull down menu s&ect Tile vertically to make the views fill the work area. E 6 5. Click Apply. 2. In the plan view. then click OK to close the Views dialog box. pick the id intersection A-I to create the footing. Attributes Position Cast unit 2 Name j1 Prolthe PAO_FQCThNZ 77W X00 2 2 Finish [eiect.5 Create Foundations ‘We ‘will now create foundations in the model. This opens the Pad footing properties dialog box. 6. S 3.__________________ _______________ _ ______ 1. Double-click on the Create pad footing icon. To create footings for columns: Create Pad Footing 1. The dialog box for Pad footing properties should appear as shown (Change any attributes that may appear differently). .

Help: Modeling> Parts> Part location> Position on work plane Help: Modeling> Pans> Part location> Position depth Help: Modeling> Parts> Part properties> Profile You can undo (and redo) previous commands one by one since the last save. Click OK. Create the rest of the 70*70 footings at the other intersections of gridline A by picking each position.A / I_____________ 7. You don’t have to click Apply and OK every time. by clicking the icons or typing “Ctrl + Z” (Undo) and ‘•Ctrt + Y” (Redo). I 7ppJ LModiIy ii [F/zn Cancel A 1-18 if you dont click the OK button. Completethe Pad footing properties dialog box for a 106106 footing as shown € Pad footing properties Save as Attr. Clicking Apply will apply the settings but keep the dialog box open.. You can also close a dialog box by clicking the Cancel button or Kin the top right corner of that dialog box.0 BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling I Copyright® 2007 Tekia Corporaton . 0 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. 1. the dialog box will remain open. 0 ProFile Material El Finish Class El LY! attr&*es.C -r--4-— 4 — - >/‘.butes Position Cast unit s1idard Name PAD_FOG TINS 105906” 3000 8 iF_Select. (p Footings along grid line B While Still in the Create pad footing command. Only use Apply if you want to keep the box open. 2.

we will use parametric profiles. Right-click and select Interrupt to end the command. press “Enter’. Foundations for silos parametric profiles — menu. For the foundation. nterrupt Poirt or grid intersection End Center Mid Commands will stay active until you interrupt them. right-click and select Interrupt from the pop-up press the “Esc’ key. 4. To restart the last command used. At first.0 BASt TRAINiNG Basic Modeling I 1-19 . parametric. one foundation will be created at the coordinate (14’-9”. Double-click on the Create pad footing icon. This takes you to the section profile catalog Complete the Pad footing properties dialog box as shown below.Help: Modeling> Introduction> Inputting information 3. 14-9”) and the other foundation will be created as a copy of the first one. astd user.defined profiles. 3. Kelp: Modeling> Parts> Part properties> Profile Help: Modeling> Advanced modeling> Parametric Profiles Create silo footing 1. Tekla Structures contains standard (library). copyiDht© 2007 Tekia Corporaton TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. Tn the Profile click the button th three dots as shown. 2. or We will create two identical circular foundations for the silos. Create the footings at intersections along gridline B by picking each position. To end commands.

5.Pad footing properties standard Attributes Name Profile Material PDsitionCast unit PAD_FU UT INS Save as] standard 106’ ‘l O6•’ - E Finish Class r Apply 000 I[. D275”112 Filter: • Citoilat sections + * - I L ] [ 0 U S - Prclile subtype: Ptctute a i •Jri Dkcudae H S 0 •Ross. — ProBe name. Qid @RB ROD rUD ‘8 r1&r Plies 8 r Zoe res Inn Plate ptctfes °roets S D-atrsm d Val 27J2 0 Plate 8 Peril plate • • t 0 Floor plate Flat.. 1-20 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. A tJser-deined ath&jtes.. L proNe.. t’ ][ ModJfJrs& JIW/rJçpcd Then find the Round Shapes profile category and then the Di parametric shape Seloe:t profile General Analysis User atotbier Prolietirpe Psslile typo: I proNe.1 Select. and Bars ‘8 Gratng 23 Show al proliles 23 deteiI. You can also enter a profile name in the Profile field in the part properties dialog box. [ThJ[ 4.0 BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling I Copyrght © 200T Telcia Corporation L . T protiles Cproilcs Circular hollow sections lm.ta tdk.. ClickOK A You can select the profile for a part from the Select profile dialog box that opens next to the Profile field in the part properties dialog box..

You should still be in the Create pad footing command. J Enter a numeric location Location: $1 4-91 4-S LF1I The “R” key will open up the Enter a numeric location dialog box with an’@ ‘symbol in the field. click once on the Create pad footing icon.9. (Absolute Snaps are relative to the origin of the model) Help: System> Appendix IL: Reserved Shortcuts Click OK or hit the “Enter’ key. This is known as a Relative Snap. Copyright © 2007 tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. Hit the “A” key on the keyboard. OK IL JEIL sJIP/rjI Cancel 6.0 BASIC ThRINING Basic Modeling I 1-21 . The “A” key is known as an Absolute Snap. If you do not see the prompt “Pick Position’ in the status bar. This stalls the command with the last applied settings.I? Pad looting properties 5< IIEJ LL2J Attñbutes jName ProIiIe jMakend standard Cast unit J Save as) standaid Position PAD_FOOTING D2751)2 XOO 1 3 j Finish Class B E I_tiser-deiiiedaItiAe. and the silo footing is created. (The coordinates you enter will be relative to the last point you clicked.) Pick position Locate the Silo Footing 7. 14-9 after the S to define the position for the footing. 9. 8. The Enter a numeric location dialog box will automatically open with aS in the field. (You will see the prompt “Pick Position’ in the status bar located in the lower left corner of the main Tekia Structures window. Enter 14.

cuts. The last icon allows you further narrow your selection by specWying more detailed information about an object. or specific parts of the model by dragging a box around the entire model. The next 4 icons allow you to select connections and assemblies as a whole or as individual entities. bolt groups. loads. V / / ifi sai ‘F 1’ From left to right the select icons are as follows: all. For more information on using the select filter see Help: Modeling> Settings and tools >FiIter 1-22 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. views. reinforcing bar. These icons allow you to select all parts. single bolts. Pull down options are offered by Tekla Structures to allow you to select types of members such as beams or columns. To open toolbars you can click on the Window pull down menu and select Toolbars. points. and distances. connections. Interrupt Pcint ci qrid r:ersecticr End Snap and Select Icons In order to work in the model it is important to understand the functionality of the snap and select icons.0 BASIC TRrINING Basic Modeling I 4 Copyright © 2007 Tekla Corporation . grid lines. welds. objects. Below are the select icons. surfaces. grid. Right-click and select Interrupt to end the command.10. You can also exit any command by using the escape key. 00 4 a.

A If you are working in semi transparent mode (CTRL+2) instead of filly rendered mode (CTRL-I-4) then you will have to select the edges of items rather than the surfaces... 2.0 BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling I 1-23 . Click the footing once to select it.. Mirror.. - Copyright 0 2007 TekIa Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. (JO i — aV”S Help: Modeling> Settings and tools> Tools> Snapping Copy the footing 1.. With three ponts — 3. Move special Delete notate. from the pop-up menu. These snap icons are hierarchal from left to right.The snap icons function similarly to other computer aided drawing applications. The two end icons designate if you want to snap only to work points (used mostly for modeling) or all points on corners and edges of objects. This opens the Copy translate dialog box shown here. Right-click and select Copy Special Copy Copy secal Move > Translate..

Right-click and select Interrupt to end the command. Interrupt Point or grid intersection End 3 Now the footings should look as shown: e4 s C 1. Complete the Column properties dialog box as shown on the following (for both the Attributes and Position tabs) I 1-24 TEKLA STR.6 Create Columns We will first create two of the colunms and then use the Copy command to create the other columns. Number ol copies Eth’ 0” OK 1[ Copy j [ Clear j [P/F [Cancel I 4. Create Column Tool To create the first two co]umns: I.0 2J<I2” I Pick.0 SPSi0 TPJH..XThRES 13.HG Basic Modeling I Copyiignt © 2007 IskIa corporalon 0 4 . For more information on copy go to Help: Modeling >Settings and tools> Copying and Moving objects 5. Double-click on the Create column icon. 2. Complete the dialog box as shown and click Copy then OK..

Narre 211 El Relation: 9isce4el Levers ElT ES&iom V V I\fl. Select the columns that you just created by dragging a window across them in a right to left direction. Look in 3d view from time to time to check for correct placement..:5cI A99 I sdea. 4. Middle Front Middle V Des.w C CDt. Right-click and select Interrupt to end the command. Click OK. Pick the intersection of gridlines A-I (p1) to create one column.J Select. and then pick grid B-I (p2)to create the second column.0 CopynDht © 2007 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.) A 5.1 Mcdy IwW7r_Ii_J 3.J C.0 BASIC TRAINING BasIc Modeling I 1-25 .es 1 Attbtes Fsr Pos tics ElVedsal._1 44 U Class: El lJserdetrnod attributes LJH1EP w/r ca.UMN U 0 fl0 E Assembly 21 21 P&e El Malarial: El Finish. End re ea.. (The crossing command thnctions similar to other computer drawing applications. Start number. hrarsin D&Or1O Stat Seres NLJrmtherirt series Pretre: Part .olunin projwitios v Se o!idd Column properlieN Sled reieaoeo koJes End releaos Des9i OeIo’mino Pcrokizr. Copy columns II .

With three points - Delete 3.(LA STRUCTURES 13. Mirror. TE. Columns should Right-click and select Interrupt to end the command. jjdrf1S8’ th’ U” I Pick. Now all the columns appear in the model. A 1-26 Basic Modeling I You can select multiple parts in the model by holding down the “Ctfl” key when selecting objects in the model individually. This opens the Copy translate dialog box shown here. Right-click and select Copy Special Copy Copy specal Move Moe special > Translate..0 ESC Ttl4lNG CopyTight 203? TekIa Corporation . Interrupt copy. Complete the dialog box and click Copy then OK.2. C Rotate. Ntsiber ci coiesI S ] [w/r H Cancel OK j{ Copy jj CIearj 4. C Point or grid intersection End 6... 5. from the pop-up menu..

2.0 BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling I 1-27 . To select the profile the catalog.7 Silos We will now model the silos.Help: Modeling> Introduction> Selecting model objects> How to select objects 1. Create silos I... — Click the Select. 00000 —- C -ii 1 El Prie 2) Material: SOSlT&ALUMINUM El Finish El Class: El [userdetined attnbules El Bottoe Li] LDL/r_H Cancei 3. Double-click on the Create column icon. I V coiuinn properties Twcaunnn w Design stdaic ‘ I)rOlwt t: Start releases Attributes atandrd End releases Pardon j_ De{ornrno Analysis Nsxitardg series Pret: Start number Start peteases End releases Position Attt&tss __j Position Middle w 0 El Vertical Design Delorming Analysis El Part EAssw4 A!ttxIes w C El El -zz1 r ElHizo’a& Levels 4I Wc& . Complete the Column properties dialog box as shown below (for both the Attributes and Position tabs). button on the right and go to TUBE profiles in Copyright @ 2007 Tekta Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.

4 I c’jrncEiig RflR1-TR1 Al IIMINIIM 7. Hovering your cross hairs over the top edge of the circular base will automatically highlight the snap point at the center because the ‘Points and Grid Intersections Snap is activated. in E Show all plotiler E Show details rC [ 4..s 4 5 Timbei Riches 4 5 Double Tees [PCI Plateprofiles Welded boir profiles Parametric proBes L RCDL profiles BCDX protiles + • _ Property Diameter Plalelhickn.. 5.C P’ollenane EslIe. 6.. 4.0 BASIC TRMNING Basic Modeling I Copyright 2007 Tekla Corporation .d Anefitsis User aUrtes Circuler hollow sections d’t V Profile type Profile type: Prolile subtype: Picture I L T C I profiles L profiles profiles C oroliles Qrculan hollow sections FIFE tattles hUll Q Ff55 profdes ICDIJ Uthet C1o4n LHS 0 EPO OPD - • Q flectar4a oiov sections Ciokssetha. +.. ruE25D”1)8 Fter Uece. C 1-28 TEt(LA STRUCTURES 13.. button next to the Material option Click OK 0 ISeIect material S elected grade: 6061-TE ALUMINUM I Steel Concrete 4 Reinforcing bar 4 Timber Miscellaneous + A. OK Apc4 Click OK To select aluminum as the grade required.. click the Select. Syrb d Vtn 250 1/B - Ur K.

Help: Modeling> Getting started> Settings and Tools> Displaying and hiding objects in views Copyright © 2007 TeRla Corporalion TEKIA STRUCTURES 13. or grid intersection End A A The visibility of objects in views depends on the work area. In the pictures hereafter all the model objects created may not always be visible. and view filter. Right-click and select Interrupt to end the command. You can also temporarily hide parts in a view by using the Hide tool (on the pop-up menu). Interrupt Ponit Now the silos appear in the model.0 BASIC TINING Basic Modeling I 1-29 .LiJiHHIX z 8. view setup. view depth.

4.0 BASiC TRJiNiNC Basic Modeling I 2007 leida Corraiion U . Create steel beams 3.5 to set the desired representation for parts h the model or components which we will create later. 12-7”112 view. use the shortcuts Clrl+1 . 6. IIE standard End releases j Position Anab’sis [Save asj standard Design Loaig Start nurrber: - Start releases Attribtes D elcwning Comsae Numbering series Prehx: Part JAssembly Attributes C E 1 1 2 Name: 2 Prolile: Matetial: Fiiish: Class: SEAM W24X62 A2 ] [ileoi. [DK fl Apply [ Modily fl Set fl wir ]7ancei 5.1. Hit the “CtrI+4” hotkey to change the object representation to Rendered.8 Create Beams We will first create the beams at the 12-7” 1/2 level and then copy them (using the select filter) to the two upper levels. In rendered views.A STRIJ0EJRES 13. Complete the Beam properties dialog box as shown below. ‘I. 2. Click OK.. I 3 2 User-defined attributes. Pick the intersection of gridlines A-4 and then 8-4 as shown below and notice how the beam automatically appears at the correct level in the 3D view simultaneously CopyTiglit © 1-30 TEK.. 1. Double-click on the Create beam icon.5 and Shift-I-I .. Open the PLAN AT EL.

3 4 5 6. 7 AL 6: 8.0 BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling I 1-31 . Interrupt Point or grid intersection End A Copyrighi © 2007 lekia Corporation TEKL4 STRUCTURES 13.B 4. Note that it is very important to input beams from left to right and bottom to top. B 3 A 4 5! S A 7. 6 and?. Input beam between columns on grid lines A and B. Continue adding beams along gridlines 5. Right-click and select interrupt to end the command. Tekla Structures will consider the first end input in the model as the lefi end.

This is where you want to ‘pick up the items you are copying.0 BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling I CopygnI © 2007 Texle corporalion U C . Help: Modeling> Settings and tools> Filter> Select filter By dragging the mouse (right to left). U Copy beams 1. 1-32 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.Filter beams 1. C n A 2. Notice this only highlights the beams. Select a base point at the intersection of Grid A & 1271/2. Open the ELEVATION AT GRID 7 view. Choose the select filter option Beam_filter from the drop down list. Beam liter S. right-click and select Copy from the pop-up menu. Interrupt Copy Soecal rylo. se] ect an area in the model as shown below. A select filter provides you control over selecting different types of objects using both standard and user-defined filters.e Specia Deere 2.

ects7 Q Do nol rhow this menae agan I 5.. en 0becls wce placed oxn. ObjeL Is oijl side II. work a. A message may appear stating objects are outside the work area. click Expand as shown below..0 BASIC TRAINING 1-33 Basic Modeling I .-a” 24-0” 12’-7”1/2 0” o’I B 3. i Right-click and select Interrupt to end the Command.12’J’i /2 A 44-0” B 44. Select a destination point at the intersection of GRID A & 24-0 as shown above. If so.Do nJ wart to exn he woel< aea 0 ockide the rtw o. 4.e the wck sea. Copyright © 2007 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.

0 U A Beams around silos Next we will create beams at elevation 44’-(). so you will be able to select objects other than beams. Select both Silos (select one then hold the “Ctrl” key down while selecting the other) and right-click to open up the pop-up menu. When you select the Hide option without the “Shift” key down. this portion of the model should look like this. They will change to Reference Lines. 1. Hit the “Ctrl-’-4” hotkey to change the object representation to Rendered.A STROCEJRES 13. While holding the “Shift” key down. select the Hide option as shown below. Use the “Ctrl-’-P” hotkey to change this view to 3d. Change the select filter option back to standard (as shown below) and click in a view. You can also hide objects without holding down the ‘Shift” key. Open the PLAN AT EL 44’-O. 2. Seam lilter aridar d Angle_Filter B ea’n_uilter In the 3d view. Hide silos 4.Interrupt Point r grid irtersec:Dn r V A End 6. 3. A 1-34 Basic Modeling I U TEKI.0 BASiC 1iNiNG Copyñghl © 2007 TeKia Corporailen . the object will not become completely hidden.

Interrupt Copy Copy special Move Move special Delete Center of avity Clash check Exact lines Rirle npc II. Copyfight @ 2007 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.’ Add to Assembly Remove from assembly Create grid beams a 1. Create the missing beams at the gridline intersections shown in the figure below. / I :1 Hide ShOw assembly Fit by parts Create view Compare Drawing £ Zoom Update window Next windo.0 BASIC TINING Basic Modeling I 1-35 .cJ. 2. I. Click the Create beam icon.

TEKLA STRUCtURES 13. The snapping tools help you pick points to create objects precisely where you need them. A 1-36 If you double-click on an existing beam in the model and click Apply in the Beam Properties dialog box.0 BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling I Copynght © 2007 TelcIa Corporation .C) 1 A Create the rest of the beams Next we will create beams in locations where no gidlines intersect. without having to know the coordinates or layout additional lines or points. Help: Modeling> Settings and tools> Tools> Snapping c. Then only a single click on the Create Beam icon is required to add beams with those settings to your model. those settings become active.

Create beam A I. Auto V Outline planes I. Pick a midpoint of the beam between A-2 and A-3 (pl) and then the midpoint of the beam between B-2 and B-3 (p2) as shown below.. 2. (See below. CcpyTight © 2007 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES 13M BASrC TRAINING Basic Modeling I 1-37 . We will then pick the second position of beam B using the temporary snap switch Perpendicular. Make sure the Snap to mid points icon is pressed down. A green cross will be placed there. Then move the cursor (do not pick Auto V Outline planes Hold down the “Ctrl” key first and then click gridline intersection A-I (p1). Make sure only the Snap to reference lines! paints icon of the two main snap switches on the right is pressed down. Make sure the Snap to points and grid intersections icon is also pressed down. This will be a temporary reference point.) ) to the gridline intersection B-i (p2). Create beam B We will pick the start position of beam B by using the gridline intersection A-i as a temporary reference point and tracking along gridline I in the direction of intersection B-i for 29’-6”. I 3. Auto V Outline planes - ‘I 2. IL4I Pick the first position of beam B I.

While the cursor is resting at B-I (p2). Click OK or “Enter” and the cursor snaps to the correct position (which is 29’-6” from A1 in the direction of B-i) as shown below.0 BASJC TRAINING Basic Modeling I Copydght© 2007 Tekia Corparalion (I U . push “A” on the keyboard and a numeric locator dialog box will open. the distance.) U 4. 1-38 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. (If youjust start typing after picking a reference point the Enter a numeric location dialog box will open automatically.r p2 Tracking moves p1 towards p2 (29’-69 L p1 3. Type 29-6” for the numeric location or in this case.

Pick the intersection of beam B and gridline 2 (p1) and then the intersection of gridlines B-2 (p2) as shown here.on Perpendicular [‘lear 6.Pick second position of beam B 5. h9terrupt Point or grid intersectIon End Create beam C 8.0 BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling I 1-39 . Interrupt Point or grid intersection End Center Mid Interseci. or let the snap grab perpendicular to select a point for the other end of the beam. Click once on the beam icon to get back in the beam command. X 4 Auto ‘. Oe planes v Copyrighl @ 2007 TekIa Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. Make sure the Intersection Snap is set. Pick the second position on beam A (p as shown below. Right click and select Perpendicular. Right-click and select Interrupt. ) 2 2 7.

) Click OK or “Enter”. Tracking moves p1 towards p2 (1 3’-09 0 3. Hold the CTRL Key again and click this point 4.. (The Enter a numeric location dialog box will open automatically. A green cross will be placed there. I. (0 140 TEKL. Hold down the “Ctrl” key and pick gridline intersection A-I (pi) to set a temporary reference point. Move the cursor to the intersection ofAl again. 5. See below.0 aASiC TRAINING Basic Modeling I Copynght © 2007 Tekla Corporation . While the cursor is resting at B-i. Then move the cursor (do not pickl I) to the gridline intersection B-I (p2). 2. type 13’-O for the numeric location or in this case distance.A STRuCTURES 13.. 6.2 t Create beam D We will first create one of the beams that ifame around the silo and then by using the Copy Special > Rotate command create the other three. the cursor will snap to the correct position 13-0 away from (p1) as shown on the following page. Help: Modeling> Settings and tools> Settings and tools reference> Edit>Copy >Rotate.

9.A 1- 7. Select the beam that you just created. 2. The beam will now appear Right click and select Interrupt to end the command. input the value as shown and click OK. interrupt Point or grid ntersection End Copy rotate the beam 1. Track the cursor once again to the right.0 BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling I 1-41 . Once a snap point is highlighted. from the pop-up menu.. but do not click Enter a numeric location Location: 1 3!QI 8. Copylight © 2007 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.. Right-click and select Copy Special > Rotate.

Cop C’ Rotate. 7. Interrupt Point or grid intersection Er C U 1-42 TEKLA STRUCTURES 130 BASiC TRAINING Basic Modeling I Copyright © 2007 TeIia Corration .. ‘t’cc.. Copy spedal Move Move speo& Deete —--------- V With three po’nLc 3. Right click and select Interrupt to end the command. The origin for XC) and YD values will appear in the dialog box. 8. Origi XC ‘i’D Arie Copy 14-9 14-9 Number ol copies LI C. 4. - In the 3D view pick the center point of the silo as the point to define the rotation 5.ouuo - I Cancel Around z L 6. Click Copy and then OK. acw otati Angle Tso. OK j[ Copy JL Clear Complete the other fields in the dialog... This opens the Copy special rotate dialog box. a -J -j S.

Interrupt Propertes. User-defined atUibutes.. Copy translate the beam to the other silo I. Select the beams shown highlighted in the picture below (press the “Ctrl” key to add parts to the selection). InqLnre I. Right-click asid select Copy from the pop-up menu.0 BASIC T4INING Basic Modeling I 1-43 . 2. Copy special Vove Move specie Delete Copyght © 2007 Tekle Corporaton TUQA STRUCTURES 3.This portion of the model should look like this...

itelrupt Zrooetes Move Fit vork area Redra’.\! (6 1-44 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. The model should now look as shown on the following page. 6. .\Find0. Right click in the view now and select Redraw WindoW.3. r A 1— 4. Select a base point or “pick-up” point. Now click in the 3D view to select the view. Right click and select Interrupt to end the command. Select a new point or a “put-down’ point.0 BASIC TRAINiNG Basic Modeling I Copynght © 2007 Tekla Corporalion . C 5. A red box will appear around the edge of the view.

Ccpyright © 2007 Tekla Corration TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.‘S A 1. 1• 2 3 4 12 Create braces I.9 Create Bracing Next we will input the vertical bracing members using the Create beam tool. Double-click on the Create beam icon. Open the Elevation on Grid A view if it is not already visible.0 BASC TR4INING Basic Modeling I I -45 .

A5OIJ-SR. Click OK.2. 5.0 BASIC TiNING Basic Modeling I Copyright 2007 Torts Corporation U U . Complete the Beam properties dialog box as shown below. 14$ TEICA SThUCTRES 13. VerticaL hss brace Start releases Attributes End releases Position Anäysis [save VerticaLhss_brac Design Jj Deforniing Loading _j_ Ccwrçosite Start number: Numbering series PreFix: hs 1 Assembly Attributes Name: Profile: Material: D VERTICAL HSS BRACE HSS4X4X1/4 . select Vertical_has_brace and click Load 0 ci jJ IVerticaLhn_brace Start releasesf End releases Attributes Position] Analysis Nunibering series Prefüc JIHe asJ Design Loading VerticaLhss_brac Delorrning Composite iL Start nwnter: 3. lii the Grid line A view create the first brace by first picking the gridline intersection A-2 and then the midpoint of column A-3 as shown on the next page.8 0 U 2] flush: 4 2] Class: 2] User-defined attributes Apply ( Modify [ Set wir j[ Cancel 4. From the drop down menu at the top of the dialog box.

Right click and select Interrupt to end the command. we will use handles to move the part end. Copyright © 2007 Tekla Corporalion TEKLA SWUCTURES 13.Make sure you pick the mid point of the column and not the midpoint between the 12-7%” level and the 24-0” level 24’ -0” 12’-7’ ‘112 0” 2 Create the second brace Create the next brace by picking the top position of column A-2 and then midpoint of column 43 as shown below. We will now adjust this bracing member so that the lower end of the brace is offset 6 inches from the grid level.0 BASIC TRArNINIG Basic ModGIing I 1-47 . To do this. 2 24’-0” 12 ‘-7” 112 2.

Right-click and select Move Special > Translate.0 BASIC TINING Basic Modeling I Copytghl © 27 Tekla Corporation U U . 2. V Holding down the Alt key while dragging a box across the handle allows for easier selection of that handle or allows selection of multiple handles at that location U 3.. 1-48 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. Pick the yellow handle (Tekla Structures highlights the handle). Select the first brace to display the handles.. ‘I. to move the handle 6 inches upwards.Help: Modeling> Parts> Part location Use handle to move brace end 1.

. then OK.. Right click and select Interrupt to end the command. Repeat the procedure to move the second brace’s top handle 24 inches downwards. - 5.. A CopyTight © 2007 TekIa Corporalion Remember that this handle may be yellow or magenta in color depending upon whether it is the Start Point (yellow) or the End Point (magenta) of the item. 8. With three r poIrJ 4. Complete the dZ field and click Move. TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. This opens the Move translate dialog box shown here.Interrupt Propertes Thqu’e Lop-i: Copy special Move Move special Delete Exact lines Hide hnes j Translate.0 BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling I 1-49 . Rotate. 6.. Pick the handle (Tekia Structures then highlights the handle). 7.

. Select both braces as shown here by clicking each one individually while holding down the CTRL key > 2. Dele Rotate.. Mirror..ASTRtDi1RES3. 4 Center oF gravity Clash check Exact lines Hi Ines Hide Show assembly Ft by pads Create view Compare Drawing Zoom I. With three points C I. Rotate. 10.. Right click and select Interrupt to end the command. Right-click and select Copy Special Mirror. ‘c”...r: ve 0” translate I. { Li?_/ F J [Cancel I Complete the dZ field and Click Move.... Move Move speca. a.’ith tne point Move Move special Delete Translate.. I Clear L2_f L9v 9.. P Update window Next window Add to Assembly Remove From assembly ‘4 1-50 TEeK’.2D” Pick. Copy mirror braces 1. then OK. Mirror.. Copy spedal P ransJat..D8ASlCIfl+3 Basic Modeling I CopyTiglil © 2007 Teda Corporaton .

6. pick two points on grid 3 to define the mirror Line. Click Copy and then OK. Copyiight @ 2007 Tekla Corporation 1EKL STRUCTURES 13. ‘. VO and Angle fields automatically change based on these 2 points. Right click and select Interrupt to end the command. Point or grid intersection End Help: Modeling> Settings and toots> Settings and tools reference> Edit>Cop >Mirror.0 BASiC TINING Basic Modeling I 1-51 . Try to imagine what the image would look like when reflected in a mirror that is placed on the line drawn between the two points you clicked in the model..mirror dialog box. The XO.. In the view.000Q zr Copy ir Ce 5. 4.. ll Copy mirror 3’4” J” xo Yo Angle 9O. The points that you click to define the mirror represent the seline of the mirror or the ‘line of symmetry’ in plan. This opens the Copy .3.

Double-click on the Create beam icon. I) 3 4 5 6 1 B 2 7 B / / .0 BASIC TINING Basic Modelin I 9 Copght © 2007 Tekla rratior U C) . 2.10 Add Infill Beams Next we will input some infill beams using the Create beam tooL. Load the Beam properties 1-52 TEK STRUCTURES 13. ( AL / 4 5 7 Create stair landing beam 1. Open the Plan on 12-7W view ifit is not already visible.1.

. [Select. ‘I... Click the Select. 4. Select W18X40 from the catalog Copyright © 2007 Tekta Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling I 1-53 .... El Ri Profile: Ri Material.. button to launch the section catalog. Ri Finish: Class: I A932 3 I [Seiect..Beam V Beam D elorming Composite Start releases End r&eases Design. jw._J Attitutes Position Analysis Loadir - Numbering series Pref iii: EPart BAssentj AttriEjtes Name: B BEAM Start number. ii E User-defined attributes.ir 3. j[ canc&J All available sections are listed here with parameters that are correct to the very latest editions of industry organization manuals Simply locate and select the section you would like to use.

h b t ri r2 Is Vakie in/a 6’’ 3/8 1/2 11/16 0” 0. I (a$ 1-54 TEICASTRuC11jRES 13.* U . Enteranurneric location 6.) [ @ HP \‘NJF . 7.0 BASiC TRAINING Basic Modeling I CopynghIQ20O7TeeiaCorporaon .. . Type 7-0” to make the new beam start at that distance from the CTRL point in the direction you tracked the mouse...-- IcdI Click OK Hold down the CURL key and click the mouse at the intersection of grid line A5 Then highlight a snap point (shown using the near’ snap above) to determine the direction of the tracking.1€ Select profile Prctk nfl W<4O Filler: — 0&w Anak: Us arjre: Profe r. I (.. W T t5 W4 +.00 Lrt n in in in in in ii Pø I 5. L. Remember — Do not click.. 5l W5 WG * + Edter I Profile type Profile subtype: picture :i: i proirles I Jprofrles Hot rolled S9 W8 • 5W12 5 ii5Wl4 t ‘0 J35 9 9 9 9 fl Show all piofiles 111K Wi <41 Wi <45 wi <46 5 WiRt<55 9w1’<00 Show details Property l-ieghr Width Web thickness Flenge thickness Rounding radius 1 Rounding radius 2 Flange slope ratio S. 8.

Notice that a tiny cross appears halfway between both points. of Points in the points tool is set to 1. oF points o. 6 2.11 Add Horizontal Bracing Divided Line Points First. If this was set to 2 then it would add two points equally spaced between the points you click effectively dividing the length into 3 equal spaces. Points Tools allow us to quickly and easily establish points in the model without having to measure and calculate distances.ts 6 B ‘7’ 2 3. line No. Check that the No. ‘I./ / A 9. This will place one point halfway between the two points you click in the model. Use the perpendicular snap to connect the beam to the beam on grid line 6 We will now add some horizontal bracing sections too. 4. 1. Double click the icon shown below.0 BASIC TrNING Basic Modeling I 1-55 . Click OK Click the points as shown using the Endpoint snap. I Copyiight © 2007 Tekla Corporalion TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. we will use the Divided Line Points tool to establish the midpoint between two points we select.

Tip: Add the beams from left to right and use the perpendicular snap to ensure they are horizontal in the model. J B A 7 6. Use the Create Beam tool again and select and load the properties for a Horizontal Brace C 1-56 TEK STRUCTURES 1 3.S. 7. B 5 6. 4.0 BASIC TlNlNG Basic Modeling I Copydghi © 2007 Tekla Corralion . — Finally add the horizontal bracing . Now add two W16X50 beams as shown below.

9. E Material: Firish: ElCiass: [ Select. OK IrApply jf Modify j[ Set j[ 7/F iLcancel 8. Change the section profile to match the one shown above.j 4 [_User-deFined attributes.. Copyrighi © 2007 Tekla Cerporation TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TlNING Basic Modeling I 1-57 ...Hox&brace [ave asj HorizonlaLbrace 0 &cirrriing Composite Start releases Attributes Numbering series End releases Design Position AnalysisJ_Loadinj - It PreFix: Part Assembly Attribes t 0 Start number: E Name: Profile: HORIZONTAL BRACE WTBX2O A992 —__________ j Ii Seleci.. Click OK and add the beams going from left to right as shown below..

HighIiu both beams by holding down the CTRL key while clicking the members.4.. With three points Copy Copy seoa! Move MoespedaI Delete Center of gravity 5j 13. 6 7 4 Move Bracing 6: 7: 10. 12. Select Move Special beams down) - Clash check Exact lines Hide lines Translate and enter -9” (the negative value moves the bracing IL) 1-58 TEKLA STRUCTuRES 130 BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling I Copyñgl 2007 TelcIa Corporanon . 11.. C) 7 4 B: 5 6 NJ / A Interrupt I 1 Rotete. Mirror. B 5.. Now move these beams down to within the depth of the floor beams.. Release the CTRL key and right click the mouse.

f Move Clear j [ / r I Lcanc& 14. Finally check that the braces are in the correct position in the 3D view..0 BASIC TINING Basic Modeling I 1-59 . Double Click on the highlighted beam to open the properties dialog Copyright © 2007 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES 13..E I•’ Pick. Move beam using offset 1.

0000 V.0 2. Go to the Position tab Beam properties [E] cii Position On plane: standard t ave as Design j{ Loading -I orizontaL bra Delorming Composite Stan releases End releases Position Attributes Anajysis Middle Top Behind JL f C. V E Rotation: EN depth: End oftset v 0.0 BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling I Copynght © 2007 TeRla CorporaUon . Start: Dx 0 • End: s’ 0 D2 E 0” 0” I EU’ >CYplane V Curved beam Efladius: 0 Nurther ci segments: 1 [ OK][ AppJy Get H r/r fl Cancel 1-60 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.

In a real contract we could now run the Advanced Sill by going to File> Reports> Advanced Bill. The model should appear as in the picture below.3.0 BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling I 1-51 . A Id V At this point we have added all the marbers into the model. Adjust the dialog box as shown and click Modi’. We will deal with Reports and Numbering in much more depth later in this manual. Sometimes their may be speed advantages to be gained by modeling one way rather than another. Now we have modeled all the steel members in BasicModell.. Copynghl © 2007 Tekia Corporation TLKLA STRUCTURES 13. It really makes very little difference whether you locate beams using offsets or by simply moving them into position. then clicking Create from All. Notice that the beam has now moved down 3 while the start and end points have remained in their original position.

C C 1-62 TEK STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TIN[N0 Basic Modeling I Copght@ 2007 Tek[a rraIion .

0 Basic Training 29 October 2007 Copyright © 2007 Tekla Corporation .TEKLA System Components Tekia Structures 13.

c

2.ii

TEXLASTRUCTURES 13.0 BASiC TINING

Cpyrght€2007Toldacorporaaoo

Syslem Components

Contents

2

Creating System Components
2.1 2.2 2.3 About System Components Check clashing of steel structures Column Base Plates Beam to Beam Web Shear plates Checking Connections Beam to Column Web Clip angle Two-sided Chp angles Vertical Bracing Connections Tube Gusset Modifying Connections Beam to Column Flange End plate Bracing Connections Wrap Plate Re-Check Entire Model Clashing

.1
1 2 3 7 7 9 10 10 11 13 13 15 18 18 19 19 25

2.4

2.5

2.6 2.7 2.8

Copyright® 2007 Tekle Corporarirn

TEKLASTRUCTURFS 13,0 DASIC TRAJNrNG System Components

2-ui

C

U
2iv
TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING System Components CopeigNO2OO7TeIdaC&pocdn
-/

4/

!W;
-

!,

:r

Creating System Components

In this lesson

This lesson introduces the basics of creating system connections in Tekla Structures. You will learn how to: Create connections Work with connection properties Save the properties for later use

2.1

About System Components
You can model connections quickly with the Tekla Structures system components. The greatest benefits of using system components are: • • • The connection properties can be saved with a particular name so that they can be used later. These properties can then be used for all projects. When you modi& an object’s profile in the model, all of the connections to the object are automatically modified at the same time. If you highlight an object and select options suth as edit, copy, or mirror, all connections into the object are automatically included. The connections that are copied or mirrored are exactly the same as the originals. The same applies to plates and bolts. With AutoDefaults you can create rules defining when to use different connection properties. (Covered in the advanced course)

44

All available system components are located in the component catalog, which can be opened using Ctrl4-F or by clicking the binocular icon on the component toolbar. When applying a connection that you are unfamiliar with, accept the default properties and create the connection. Then look to see what needs to be modified. This is usually quicker than trying to set the values for the connection before seeing what the connection actually creates. Help: Detailing Help: Detailing
> >

Getting started> Using components> Creating components Getting started
>

Basics> Component concepts

Help: Detailing> Getting started> Basics> Picking order Help: Detailing> Getting started
>

Basics> Up direction

Copyright © 2007 TekTa Corpoiation

TEKLA STRUCTURES 110 BASIC TRAINING System Components

2-1

Check clashing of steel structures
In Chapter 1 we created a model of a small industrial structure. To complete the model we will need to connect the parts. Before creating the connections all of the members in the model usually collide with other members. By using the Clash check command we can check which parts in the model collide. We will run a clash cheek now, and again after the connections have been applied.
Help: Modeling> Settings and tools> Querying objects> Clash check Check clashing

C

r

1. 2.

Select all of the parts of the model by dragging an area select around the whole model. Right-click and select C’ash check.

Tekla Structures highlights the colliding parts in orange and displays the clash check log in the List dialog box. You can see that all of the parts in the model collide.

C
Select any clashing parts from the list and Tekia Structures highlights them in the model.
1

LIst

In nIl
S..

-

2-2

TEKL.A STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING System camponents

Copyrighl 02007 Tekls corporation

1’ U

2.2

Column Base Plates
The first system connections that we wil] add are the column base plates. First we will create a base plate using the default values. We will then modi& the properties of the base plate and finally create the rest of the base plates with the new properties.

Create base plate to one column
‘I’

1. 2. 3.

Open the component catalog by clicking on the binu1ar icon or by typing Ctrl+F. To see pictures of the connection, make sure the Thumbnails icon is active, see below. Type base into the upper field and click on the Search button. In the Component catalog, double-click on the U.S. Base plate (1047) icon.
Component catalog
‘.

5... nlO* (1054]

l1 5(51 (53415

5.,, 515(1110531

Lifhsi
43. ,ü., 0334.. CIlis 03,, 05(t. LP,& 0’. 41111 5434344 U5345.
st.-430.

SElL-CU’ 1140

,34l 5 p.’dl@

‘4

5(11

The following dialog on the next page appears:

Copyright @2007 TekJa corporation

TEKLA STRuCTURES 13.0 BASIc TRAINING Systen Components

2-3

Tekla Structures U.S. Base plate (1047)
Load ,nda ,isndapd

C’

0

Pchja

Peal,

Parnslers

General Slillenaro

Anchop pod,

Sepia pJ.iee M4oi,

—C

Th

RI RIEJ

4. 5. 6.

Click OK to accept the default values. Pick any column. When prompted, pick the bottom endpoint of the column as the position and the base plate will be created.

0 L.

7.

Use the shortcut CtrI+2 to make the parts displayed in shaded wire frame.

You can see that the anchor bolts were created as Anchor J-rods.

t
2-4
TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRALNING Copyright® 2001 ToNe Corporation

System Components

.

7-

-

77-

Edit Anchor Rods

We will change the Anchor J-rods in the base plate to Plate washer Anchors by modiing the connection properties.

I. 2. 3.

Double-click on the green connection symbol, and the Base plate dialog box will reopen. Select the Anchor rods tab page in the dialog box. Edit the values in the fields sho highlighted in the figure on the next page.

Copyright @2001 Tekla Corporatron

TEKLA STRUCTuRES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING System components

2-5

Press the Enter key to start the base plate command again.S. pI$os Anch rod proSe R003/4 Nor posSe Wa*e p. 5. Create base plates to rest of the columns _ I_I Click Modify and the I-bolts become Plate washer anchors.s Malarial too. Create the rest of the base plates by picking each column and then the position for the base plate.Tekla Structures U.0.4 121 Oea(e asseaas loss al aFos 9o rr 4. Base plate (1047) n.-----i m.0 BASIC TRAINiNG System Components Copyright © 2007 TekIa Corporallon .s No — ate a’aca: El 1)2 Ware. we will skip this step till later t 2-6 TEKLA StRUcTURES 13. above the footing pad.ob Phee waslreo Cosipsale lE1 3/4_HEAW_MEILNUT RI RI RI RI 3/4 RI 121 WASHER Q Q lp :a V RI Psc And anon Yes —2i — 121 No RIN0 No ‘/ / \N. 6. Notice that we have put L /2’ of grout in the model.. For taining purposes however. do one of the following: • • Click Edit-> Repeat last command Press Enter V 2. Click Apply. nde Gauss shclqess Po_No 6.-i Nanre Class Corrasarrl iiJJ ØL1 General b Solsaneru Ardror rods h Pos_No i Arralys. I. To repeat the last command. At this point in a real contract you would be able to run the Anchor Bolt Drawing and send it out to for approval or over to the site so they can start pouring the bases.udr[yeCiVreclontwe Pttuse Pans Pacacoelera 0 ---_. OK to accept the properties for use later. V ElNo ENo Nc — v’ RI Default 121 a LJLJ Ce 1 Delarjll .

2. The shear plate will be welded to the primary beam web and bolted to the secondary beam web. and double-click on its icon. L ii’ Component calalog 146 Search result [Search] Store A Shea. Create one shear plate connection 1.3 Beam to Beam Web Shear plates We will use the Shear plate simple (146) connection to make the beam to beam web connections. plate simple I TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. Open the component dialog (Ctrl+F or binocular icon). We will use the connection when the secondary beam is perpendicular to the main member or at a skewed angle to the main member. find the Shear plate simple (146) connection.0 BASIC TAINING System Components Copyright © 2007 Tekia Corporal’sr 2-7 .

tim eeiobo 0a4. I C LZ LD I a 2.ncu L EoSedo oba fla liens ith Bob Dov. Pick the beam perpendicular to the main part to be the secondary part and the connection will be created. 0 2-8 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. Pick the beam on gridline 1 as the main part of the connection. 3.0 BASIC TRAINING Copytghtl 21307 T&da CelTraIion System Components ..a The following dialog appears: Tekia Structures Shear plate simple (146) s— e.

2 times the bolt diameter) Help: Modeling> Settings and tools > Querying objects > Measure I. Right-click and select Create view> Component basic views. create shear plate connections to all the other beam to beam conditions. you can create views from different sides of a selected connection. Click Tools> Measure> Boft measure. copyright @2001 Tokla Corporotion TCKLA STRuCTuRES 13. Edge distance rules are set up under the Tools> Options> Components dialog box. Create the rest of the shear plates With the connection’s applied properties. 2. Tekla will automatically change the color of the component cone from green to yellow if an edge distance issue is detected. 3. ‘I. Select the connection symbol. Ornate connection basic views To create component basic views: t.Checking Connections To make it easier to check the connection you created. Check bolt dimensions We will now check the bolt location distances and bolt edge distances between bolts and the shear plate. Pick the shear plate and the temporary dimensions are sho in the view. and four basic views (front. 3.0 BASIC TRAINING System Components 2-9 . top end and perspective) appear. I Now we will accept the created connection with the default properties. 2. (The default edge distance is 1. Keep the Component front view open and close the other component basic views. Notice how Tekla automatically detects the depth of the supported beam and applies the correct number of bolts to the connection automatically. In the view the work area is closely fitted around the connection. Pick the bolt group.

find the Clip angle (141) connection. Create clip angles 1. In the component catalog. We will then make the wall brace 10 column connections with Tube gusset (20). For the double sided beam to column web connections we will use the Two sided Clip angle (143) connection.TighI © 2007 Tate CorpOlalion . We will modi the properties later with Auto Defaults. Liar*3Ie 1141] 2-10 TFKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING System Components Cop. That connection uses only one bolt group to go through all three parts. This connection uses a gusset plate to connect the beani to the column. Connection plates welded to the end of the braces will be bolted to the gusset plate. I Clip angle We will now use the Clip angIe (141) connection to make all single beam to column web connections using the default connection properties.r 2.4 Beam to Column Web We will use the Clip angle (141) connection to make the beam to column web connections.

The column is the main part in the connection. Pick a beam on one side. and then the beam on the other side as the secondary parts. and the beam as the secondary part. 3. Find the Two sided clip angle (143) connection.2.0 BASIC TRAINING System Components 2-li . Two-sided Clip angles Create the two sided clip angle connection to all double sided beam to column web conditions to connect beams to both sides of the column web: Create two-sided clip angles 1. Click the middle mouse button to complete the connection. pick the column as the main part. Make an end plate connection at every beam to column web condition where there is only one secondary beam coming to the column web. Help: Detailing> Getting started > A Basics > Picking order Copyright © 2007 Tekla Corporahon TLKLA sThuCTuREs 13. When prompted. To sided clip anq e(143l 2. so when prompted. 4. When there are multiple secondaries you need to click the middle mouse button to complete the selection. pick the column as the main part.

Click Modify when complete and notice that the angles on one side drop down to allow for safe erection practices.0 5.nure use by typing a name in the Save As. Click Apply then save the connection settings for fi.o Bo8oI. button. Save Lcad j staad v IL JII5a0r I CopNighI 10 2007 Tekla Corpotation t 2-12 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. Nolcn Doe. I’ -- 4. Then set the Safety Connections Property on the Parts tab as shown below Pats P.. 7.cdtn4 Solely co’ylons \‘etlItaIcLl/c4Iset Hoizonlal cul 2 6.‘ 9 RH -- L5 EEl!? Sde2taon. l4atsA 2 2F 2 - JA FS I IQ 2 PtohIeZNS :zz_ ZiG ‘.A A I 1 30 2° J Er!III .glebo. AH 0 F 2 Ri [Z l2L 2[ - ProfiIo2FS 2LZIZ:::E:Z Rl..0 BASIC TRAINING System components . Bo:SDos Osstwe BeanJ 4’*so b PoN. Double click on the connection cone to open the Two Sided Clip Angle properties dialog box.jI .ofiIeNS PzoI’Ie Fs&nth Gene. filed and click the Save As.

Apply the Two sided clip angIe (143) to all two sided beam to column webs framing conditions. 4. 5. Create tube gusset to intersection of braces I. Tube gusset Lt ç20) 2. V We could also have created a single gusset plate going through the column by creating one connection with the 4 braces. Find the Tube gusset (20) connection.0 BASIC TRAINING System Components 2-1 3 . one by one. as secondaries. Click the middle mouse button to create the connection. Repeat for the other side of the same column. Pick the column on grid intersection A-3 as the main part Pick two adioining braces. ‘I.8. HJIa 1 Copyright © 2001 Tekla corporation TEKLA STRUCTURtS 13.5 Vertical Bracing Connections Tube Gusset We will connect all the wall braces to columns using Tube gusset (20) connections and then modiv their properties all at once. 2. 3. While still in the active command. Now we can see that the connection created has two gusset plates each one with two braces.

2. 4. We will now increase the clearance. 3. This allows you to snap to all edges of parts rather than just the work points on parts. Select the Create X measure icon and check the clearance to the corner of the plate.0 BASIC TRAINING System Components Copylight © 2007 TelO Corporation . connections to the other ends of the braces by doing r Click the middle mouse button to create the connection. Pick the column. Pick the brace. 4 n 3.Create the rest of the tube gussets Whiie still in the command. Open the Component front views plates to the column web. - - Check one tube gusset connection I. 2. Select the Snap to Geometry Lines (Points select switch. 2-14 TERLA STRUCTURES 13. . Create Component basic views of the tube gusset connection on the center brace. create the the following: 1. / - of the X you can make sure there is clearance from the gusset To see the column web in the connection front view you can change the view type in the view properties dialog to rerdered.

ignore olhep types C. We will also change the number of bolt rows. 2.0 DASIc TRAINiNG 2-15 System components . Add clearance between the gusset plate and the column 1. Double-click on the connection symbol. edit the number of horizontal and vertical bolt rows as shown in the figures below. On the Braceboitsi and Bracebolts2 tab pages. copyright © 2007 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. non cowi Biatebok Brace Sots 2 Onoce bc 3 ] EJ ZJ Er 1)2) I j V r&i Edit the number of bolt rows m I [W/l [can 3.stssot (20) Soya I rJ!_I fldOSd 0 5 LSaveao I Herp.fr9es 6us& Discs cmii Rctn. On the Picture tab. type the value in the field defining the clearance between the gusset plate and the column. t 1okL Structures tutw.o Oenec Cu.Modifying Connections We wilt modify the connection by adding a clearance between the gusset plates and the column.05.

Pick the starting and end pothts as showor 2-16 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. Bracebolts 1 4. 0’ To check the clearance: n 1. Hracebolts2 tab the second pick and Bracebolts3 picks 3-9. Click Modify and then Apply.— notate Ssv bbIs frara! “c 2) Ei4 EN El p. Check the changes Check that the number of bolt rows was changed and that the clearance is correct. Click the Create X measure icon. Bracebolts 2 The Braceboltsi tab affects the first picked brace.0 BAsIC TRAINING System Components CopThI © 2007 TeNs CapotaD .

Select all the connections in the model by using the Select component select switch shown below and dragging a window around the whole model.0 BASIC TrlNING System Components 2-17 . Iiikli Sliocturos 1uIa gueset (20) P5< zIS8VeaSl Wall bracings I I Save I Hoa4 I roandad I_!!_J ignore other types copyright @2007 Tekla Corporation TERLA STRUCTURES 13. - I. Modify all the tube gusset connections at once We can easily modify only connections of the same type shown in the connection dialog by selecting Ignore other types in the connection dialog box. Click the Save as button. Save the properties 4. Now we will also modify the other tube gusset connections with the new properties we applied.3. i ri ri We will now save the edited properties for later use. r. You can also get AutoDefaults to automatically use the saved properties in desired cases by setting up AutoDefaults rules. Check that Ignore other types is selected in the connection dialog box. 5. Repeat for the other dimensions you want to check. Help: Detailing>Getting Started>Using Components>Modifying components TekI Structures lube gusset (20) Save J Load J standard [ignore ether types I_________ 2. 4. Type Wall bracings in the Save as field in the dialog box. Click Modify. Pick a point to locate the dimension. Select switches it 3. / — By saving the properties with a descriptive name you can easily use them later.

E re 144) 2. Find the End plate (144) connection. 2-18 TEKLA STRUCTURES 130 BASiC TMINING System Components Copyright® 2007 ToWs Corporation 4’ U . End plate Create end plates 1. Then we will edit one of the connection’s properties. Create connections at all the beam to column flange framing conditions.1 2.6 Beam to Column Flange We will now create End plate (144) connections for all the beam to column flange conditions by using the default properties.

. Wroparounni sienoere tps.0 BASIC TRAINrNG System Components 2-19 .oI cr0 (60) i Sec. I ij9ad I 23 [y. ickla sir i.2.r tint.. .ce bolts 1 Brace bolts 2 4nIe bnIts Ocrign LZZJ 23 LEE] -j ‘if 1 e [lEE! LEE! [TQK r j L.i I lw/ri rc& I Copyright 0 2007 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.] 0 tinner conn 1 Save ari niandard ignore olhie’ iypee Picture Gusnet Brace corn Gnnenaj Oussstconn2flr.7 Bracing Connections Wrap Plate Create wrap plate connection 1... Wraparound gusset cross (SOT 2. Double click the connection to open up the parameters. Find the Wraparound Gusset Cross (60) connection. Notice how the numbers are added to help us select the members in the correct order.

‘—a . We can see that the wrap plate looks small so we will shorten our bracing member in order to give the wrap plate a better shape. hi .2 — as. Do the same on the Gusset Conn 2 tab 2-20 TEKUA STRUCTURES 13. Adjust Wrap Plato size We can then find and select on]y the options we want to alter rather than searching through the entire component parameters.0 BASIC TRAINING system components copTghs 2007 Tekla CorporatlDn . .H* 9’ 5HHbHI s. n 4. Ib- A —9 JILj E1 El El eJ 0 5 ti 0.111. Open the system component and go to the Gusset Conn I tab. Click OK and add the connection to the bracing where it meets id B5 to see what it looks like.3.: 1Ndmd .. 6..ba. 0 - H- 7. Set the bolts as shown Tekla Structures Wraparound gusset cr0 (60) — — — 5..

.”.d.tII. — — .. G... Only three picks needed per connection.tII2 8..s..s.g 5 ¾iflp.bd..- G. — SI.. IJ L Øsss. 04 21 ter Sn - II 5I 8.....i_ — 17 1 •..I.. since the column is not present. :I... : 00 LD Ei 00 Click Modify 10... Copnight© 2007 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES 13-0 BASIC TRAINING System Components 2—21 . 21°.. fla.I O..I O. j.s.. Tekla Structures Wraparound gusset cr0 (60) 5- s. fl I_______ : 9. Tekia Structures Wraparound gusset crc (60) - s” -a I*—u 5— 2r..51I1...I O. Finally shorten the brace to adequately clear the column corner by adjusting the setback on the Brace Bolts I tab. Now add the connection to the other ends of the WT bracings. — 0.Z tz:ar 1.

11.0 BASIC TRAINING System Components Copyright © 2007 Tekla Coiporation F . Upon inspection you will 2-22 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. Make sure the Select Objects In Components symbol is pressed down Select all the objects at the wrap plate connection by dragging a box around them 3. 2. select a line containing the ID numbers of colliding parts from the list. The bolts from the wrap plate to the beam along grid line 6 are highlighting because they are flagging a potential clearance or access issue. 4. The end result should look like the image on the previous page. Check clashing Now we will examine the connecti a little more close]y to check it is abso]utelv correct. 1. Notice that the bolts and beams are highlighted. lekla Structures highlights the parts in the model. Right click and select Clash Check To quickly locate and view colliding parts in the model.

You will need to do this twice to remove both component symbols. You will notice in the graphic below that the bolts in this location have 2 nuts.. Jete 2th’iincatog.. They will not change when you modib the system component so it can prevent you from accidentally changing settings.— -- I _l.1 LIXtewfloDw iexwni. Choose Explode Component 3. Select the component symbol and right click the mouse..w - 2. 4. A Exploding connections has some benefits and some drawbacks..-*:: Explode connection We will now explode and modii the system component to reso]ve this problem.. -‘ . * . This also means that if you have a number of exploded system components you would need to change each and every one individually rather than editing the system component and having it automatically modi& all the similar connections in the model. Hide Compi[ content -_-*. .notice that this is probably acceptable enough to allow access in the field so you can igiore this clash._E. Select and delete one set of bolts TEKLASTRUCTURtS 13. This effectively freezes the objects in that connection.0 BASIC TAlNrNG System components copyrght @2007 Tekla corporation 2•23 ._—__v__. :. The bolts from the wrap plate to the other beam are clashing because we added a system component to each side of the connection and each system component added its own set of bolts in that location.. When you explode a connection you remove the link from that connection to the system component that defined it.

. 2-24 TEKLA STRUCTURES 130 BASJC TRAINING System Components . Click the middle mouse button to end the command and the bolts should now go all the way through each mcmi her. Select the bolts then right click Choose Bolt Paris 7. e :jfl P Exats [dehnes He Rtb?pfl Create’.r• C.. then one angle. Edit bolt parts You will now notice that the bolts remaining dont go through all the members. Make sure you select the angles and not the wrap plate.ew rest 5. then the other as shown below zrzzj z-zzzt 3— . To correct this we must use the Edit Bolt Parts Command.wwni.. i 0 Ilde Ii hide Fit by pat 8. 10. Copyfight © 2007 Tekle Coirstion 9. ftcta nate ci — . 5. Copy copy Fa . Iriierftot ftwetes. Choose the beam first.

2. For instance you can restrict the clash check to only look for clashes between members or main members and secondary parts or main members secondary parts and bolts too. Right-click and select Clash check. making the clash easier to find. ‘. 2. simply redraw the window.8 Re-Check Entire Model Clashing 1. copyright © 2007 Tokla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. Select all of the parts by dragging an area select around the whole model. You can locate specific clashes in the model by selecting lines in the clash report. Tekla will highlight the items in the model that are causing that particular clash.0 BASIC TRAINING System components 2-25 . Different settings on the Select Filters toolbar will allow you to locate different types of clashes. Note that one member may cause and report several different clashes with other members and these will all show up on the report. To return to normal.. You can also zone in on the clashing part by holding down the ‘F’ key when click a line on the report This will temporarily hide everything else other than the specific clash you clicked in the report..

0 0 0 2-26 TEKLASTRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAiNING CopyTht@2OO7 TeldaCapona&o System Components .

2007 Copyright © 2007 Tekla Corporation .eSe TEKLA Basic Modeling 2 Tekia Structures 13.0 Basic Training October 29.

3-il TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 9.0 BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2 Copqight@2OO7TeIda Cccaiion .

5 3.6 3.6 Cbpysight© 2007 Tekla Corporation TEKLASTRUCTURES 13.3 Start a new model Open and Save an Existing Model Create new model Create grid Create plane views along gridhnes Create Concrete Members Pad footings Concrete columns Copy the members Pre-cast ledger beams Pre-cast Slabs Create Steel Framing Steel columns Steel rafter Work points for roof joists Copy the portal frame and the points Set Sloping Work Plane for Joists True plan view Create roofjoists Vertical Eaves Bracing Crane Beam Support Stubs Combine Models 1 and 2 Change the phase of BasicModel2 members in preparation Copy from model Check that all part properties are consistent Define Your Own Select Filters Recreate the Modell grid Setting Up Job Specific Information Project properties Check preferences I 2 2 3 3 6 7 7 9 11 12 16 20 21 24 25 26 27 29 29 31 33 34 34 35 31 39 41 43 43 44 3.2 3.0 BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2 3-ui .1 3.Contents 3 Basic Modeling 2 3.4 3.7 3.

9 3-iv TEXLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASLC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2 Copyright @2007 Tekla Corporation .

0 BASiC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2 3-1 . We will create a new model and recap the basic fUnctions introduced in lesson I. you will learn some more about the basic fUnctions. skewed) Use phases Combine separate models copyrighI @2007 TekIa Corporation 1EXLA STRUcTuRLS 13. We will revise how to • • • • Open and save or backup models Input Grids Create Beams and columns Copy and move items You will learn how to: • • • • • Adjust atn-ibutes of members Input construction points Work in true planes (sloped. After that.m 3 Basic Modeling 2 In this lesson In this lesson we will cover some preliminary tasks that you need to do before starting to model in a real project.

. 3-2 Save as.. 0 Bo.:..N Cr1.1 come: Boom Modd 2. Basic Model 2 Concrete._I be.. 4. Opan Save Chl-.edeee ce/m/20371011sr voice. A. Users attending a training class can open the BasicModel-Concrete provided or alternatively can opt to build the model shown below step by step by following the manual as normal.3 r 3. and click OK.. OLS - Enter “Basic Model 2 —flrstna.e Mojeb Becclcddl 8s*vcdd2-Cc....e. Click the Open icon. J Id New.ne lasiname” Copyright® 2007 Tolda corpocton I) U TERLA STRUCTURES 13. Navigate to the TeklaStructuresModels\Training\Steel folder..3..nes4udnT. O[ I - .2 Open and Save an Existing Model Start base model 1.. SIte D.0 BASIC TRAINENG Basic Modeling 2 .1 Start a new model There are two options available for the beginning part of this lesson. ci 1. 2.c. D_.[Oracle [ 3.0 I LW 5. Edit View Points Parts Lo.a FIROJ DESI3FR Decocorn PRCJ DES[APTI I 14ã 0 &‘1sclaSl.. .ergS4nI MC&I ..-c. From the File pull-down menu select Save as.cci I Select the existing model.2 To build the model jump to section 3. 3 I Mod..ig. • • To open the model continue below to section 3.

St.:i.oaq el Telda Skoc. we will take into account the positioning of Basic Model I and define the origin of Basic Model 2 grid to different in the global coordinates.. The grid is created according to the work plane. 7. 2.. So before creating the grid we will temporarily position the work plane to new global coordinates. which is the current local coordinate system of the model.Create Steel Framing 3. 3.ic Model 2 OK ii 6.cldodel I Di.ed O5. Pick the New icon. PROJ D[SIGNSR PROJ DES[RIPH Ua.t Sov. Ve.3 Start a new model Create new model I. of the model. 4. A ‘I. . Click the OK button and the model will be created. D. -] Create grid We will now create a grid for the model.oJure.’l2lO1laa.os See. On the meno. select View> Work plane Type SO. the current local coordinate system. V Set Work plane to a new position You can create a skew grid by first setting the work plane to the desired skew position. > With one point. In order to combine Basic Model 1 and Basic Model 2 later.5. Ba. Location: $045’? Copy. Name the model ‘Basic Model 2 —Jirstname lastname”.0 BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2 3-3 . D’J eJ.g\SteeI pso.ight @200? Telda Corporalion TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. click Enter or OK. 5. The red coordinate arrow symbol indicates the work plane. Now jump forward to section 3.45’-7. j Moder op 1 3 Model.Modeb1 rw. Press the letter A.. Click the OK button and the model will he created. Most of the commands dependent on the coordinate system use work plane coordinates.

Double-click on the Create grid line icon. This command keeps the work plane parallel to the current work plane.0 BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2 CopTighI © 2007 TeRLa Corporaton . 2.The work plane is positioned in global O45’-7. 3. L 3-4 TEKLAS1RUCTURES 13. Create the grid 1.O p ft / — You can use the command Work plane > With one point to set the work plane exactly to the desired position. in the Grid properties dialog box. Edit the grid. but moves it to a new position using a single picked point. according to the figure below (coordinates and text). Delete the default grid (if one exists).

5. Create 0’ J Moy j [ Set 11W/Fl Dose 4. Click anywhere in the view.(IE Coordinates .80” 6fP 60 — Ei Ez Lie extensions Left/Below Jx G0 6.0 BASIC TRAFNING Basic Modeling 2 3..0 •6O EXO ‘‘c zo 0 IP QH Ev Ez Z Magnetism El Magnetic id ane Depth oF magnetic plane Other settings [iier-defined attributes. standard v [ve asj standard O!22•11!!236!I2zii 0 23-6 501 O 5sLabels Ex 1234567 CDEF 0236 059-868-3 Orin Right/Above . Fit work area 1.5 . Click Create. The view should now look like the one below.. Right-click and select Fit work area. Cop5Tigbt @200? lekla Corporaliss TEKLASTRUCTURES 13. Enter BASIC MODEL 2 in the save as field and click the Save as button to save the grid values. 2.

C F: -3 Th C Create plane views along gridlines We will now create Elevation and Plan views along the gridlines. 3.0 BASIC TRAINING Rasic Modeling 2 Copyright @2007 Tetla corporation . set the view properties the way you want and click OK. 2. Create grid views 1. 3-6 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. Click Create in the Creation of views along grid lines dilalog box. button on each view plane to open the View properties dialog box. Select the grid. Right-click and select Create view> Grid views from the pop-up menu. Click the Show... 4.

2. With a slab generation mao. S’-1OW-1O tooting Double-click on the Create pad tooting icon. Load the saved PadFooting properties. 3.xi Pad footings We will now create foundations on gridline 1. Enter the pad footing information in the dialog box for an 8’10*8 10 footing as shown.3. We will then create beams on w-idlines I and 3 and mirror them to the other side of the structure.4 Create Concrete Members First we will create pad footings and columns on gridline I and then copy them to the other gridlines. we will then create slabs on top of some beams €:yFr: i [2. I Gupyght @2001 1ea Corration TEKLASTRLJCTURES 130 BASJC TRAINING Basic ModelIng 2 3J .

Pick grid intersections C-I and F-I.Pad footing properties Save PadFDoang Posnf Cast urit PAD_FOOTING v [save 1 PadFootk. 2. The footings should now look like those shown below: C E D 3---.g Atbibutes Name [EIProtie Material 1”9OS” 5301] Select. Enter the pad footing information in the dialog box for a 6lOv61 0 footing as shown in the drawing.. E Finish Class S [:1 Lin attributes. 5. 6’-1O6’-1C tooting Click Apply. Click Apply. ‘5 3-8 TEKLASTRUC1URES 135 BASIC TINING Basic Modeling 2 Copflitl ( 2X7 TeldaCspv.aqion . While still in the command: 3. 4. Pick grid intersections D-l and F-I. OK Apply J Modify ii Get j[E/r]I CanJ 1.

On the Position tab set the bottom atO and the top at 236 (I ( Concrete column properties Column Start releases Allnibutes Position Vertical Rotation Ho. Enter the information in the Concrete column properties dialog box for a 30*20 (36”X24”) column. Cokn Erreleasz_J_ Design I Position Cast unit 0” 0. Load the COLUMN properties from the drop down list.Concrete columns Now we will create the columns on gridline I. and click Apply.t V. Double-click on the Create Concrete column icon. 36’x24” columns 1.iont • Levels Top: Bottom Middle Fr. 2.g Analysis Midde v W 23-6 0” i OK ii App’ j[ ModifyJ[ setJjw/rl[ Cancel 4. Cpyrrght © 2007 TokEn Corporation TEKLA S1RUCTURCS 13. 3.0000 D*{m.0 BASIC TRAINING Basic ModelIng 2 3-9 .

Pick the intersections of grids C-I and then F-1.JL J Delorming Anelysit ØNarne Profile 38e24 5000 . LrJ EE Start releases AttribUtes ‘t End releases Position COLUMN .J I - •.W Concrete column properties I5 Cokznn Design Cast urut ‘4. Class 13 User-defined attributes. Adjust the top level of these columns to be set at 21-0 3-10 TCXLA STRUCTURES 13. HOK Apply ft Mody ILet JIw/r1Lcanu 5.. Complete the dialog for 2iO*20 (24”X24”) columns and create them on grid intersections D-1 and E-l.While stilt in the command: Vt 24’x24’ columns 6. 7.0 BASIC TRlNlNG Bnlt Modeling 2 CopyTight @ 2007 Ttkla Corporation . E Material EFinish Select.

0 BASIC TRAINFNG Basic Modeling 2 Copyright @2007 Tekla Corporabon 3-11 .. Select the footings and columns on gridlines C and F. Right-click and select Copy special > Translate on the pop-up menu.9000 0 Middle v Levels .. TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. 2.0 11 JL Modily ]LIJEJ[ Cancel Add these columns to grids Dl and El D 2. Use the CTRL key to select multiple items. Copy the members on gridlines C and F I.Cokarnn Start releases Attributes Position -. Copy the members We will now copy the footings and columns to other gridlines.(ETop Botlorn: 21. 1 {ac Cc4nn End releases Posilron Middle Front v jj Desi Cast un Del orn*ig j__ Analysis Øverlical Rotation Hoijzonlal 0 0. .

Create beams on gridlines I and 3 I. With only the Snap to points and grid intersections snap active.0 BASiC TRAINING Besic Modeling 2 Copyright @ 2007 Teida Corporatirn . 3-12 TEKLASTRUCTURES 13. 9. Double-click on the Create concrete beam icon. and 7. of copies 6 dY” Pick.3. Click Copy. Type in the number of copies (6). 5. (The colors may be different) Pre-cast ledger beams We will now create the beams along gridlines I and 3 at level 23-6”. Pick two adjacent points along grid line C to define the translation vector (]Y-S’ in the x-direction). The end result should look like the graphic shown below. 4. 7. < •1 96” Numbe. Right-click and select Copy on the pop-up menu. S. LE1 [] tea’ cc 1 D C I Copy the members on gridlines 0 and E 6. Select the footings and columns on gridlines D and E. 5. pick a grid intersection along grid line one to define the copy origin Then select the corresponding intersections along grid lines 3.

. I 6 UserdeId attri&jtes.iG Pioçe.r!qo lii Symbol h Vaue 24” r’ 32” B ii 5 L-20 ii PCL p RD< pieties + -( RDO< protiles A 15 Deck Sleb profiles 15 Others 2Show elipofles OK Sl•ii del fl Apply Copyrighf @2001 Tekla Corporalien TEKLA STRtJCTURFS 13M BASIC TRAINING 3-13 Basic Modeling 2 .ths Pife type Profile lype.e. G. Profile wbtype us altctqAe j RCL p’ol’leo ri’ibt ] i C + -O * El -• 5 TirtetPro(es + O D. LOK jj Apply i[ ModiJL j[w/r}I Cancel t Select profile Piojdenane Filter CL24’r’r’w Filter T profiles C piotilex Circular hoflow seclions 9ec. Clicking the button next to the profile will open the profile catalog in order to enter the values required Concrete beam properties ItBearn Start releases Attributes End releases [_?osition B EAM RCDL24’9D”-3J”8’ 5W0 [save asj ItBeam Deforming Analysis Loading Design Cast unit E Name Shape Makexid Finish Class ri! i[Seect.aholowkaDimre Oscija..1 RCDLprotiles 4..2. secbis .$ ACOX pieties J RCL protles S Is I V PLCt’jxe I. • 31 Welded box proliles P 1 Pararnetiic pieties P.. Set the BEAM properties as shown.Oe Tees iRCI Plate proliles *. Web Peckness FL.al Ma.

0 BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2 . type a name in the box next to the Save As button. Enter the information for the beams on gridline 3 in the Concrete beam properties dialog box. 4 + 5 t2 :5r IT-lB 55 1120 15 11-24 flCDX protrles RCL profiles 90< piotiles fl0-C<profas Dect&Slthpiofes DLhas :41 Properly Web thickness Height Width flange thickness Sy.9CD ofies Generof Use attib4es Fer - 1 PrcUe le Pro(etsce: Prolile stttype: Picture 4-2 ii flOLprofes rhb1 t. s h b S velue 24’ ‘ 34” B” Ur in in in in 4 t: 4 J 5 * — 4 oj( E& it CopwNC ZN? Tekla Corporation I’ 3-14 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. t: + + — p—it t. 9.JIt2 • j i 1. Still having the cursor snapping to the picked point at the top of the column on grid C. 6.. Still having the z coordinate locked. If you wish to save these properties.3. type z to lock the z coordinate and then pick the top point of the column at D and 23 ‘-6. Coordinate Enter the information in the Concrete beam properties dialog box for gridline 1 beams. t Modity profile catalog Picnic name RCDL1 1 3/1 623”5/8 1911 /1657/8 Fer I piolilec t_ pIOIIIOS I profiles C profiles Circular hollow sections Rectangular hollow sections Circular sections Tnte °roRas P eta I ceslfl C) Plaepiofes Weldsi box prcR. End the command by clicking the left mouse button. Click Apply. and then click Save As In the 3D view pick the reference point of the column at C and 23’-6 (Snap to end points should be active). r 5. 4. Ortho-Locks 7. 8. Open the profile catalog once again and change the profile as shown 10. create the other two beams on gridline I in the same way.es Pa&seuicrgcfa .

Y or Z direction. Remember to highlight the snap first. Origin X0 YD 68 — — Copy Nrher of conies 1 Angle 0. then press the coordinate key to be locked before clicking the first point. Twe z to unlock the z coordinate bottom of the screen ‘‘I — the Z should disappear from the status bar along the V Coordinates can be locked in the X.0000 Aicund z OK J[ cojJflëie [ Catel Copyright © 2007 Tekla corporabDa TEKLA STRuCTuREs 13. Select the beamsjust citated on gridlines 1 and 3.0000 J otetion Angle 180. C Copy the beams to gridlines 5 and 7 14. Copy special > Rotate the beams to the other end of the structure indicating the midpoint of gridline 4 as the center of rotation (Snap to midpoints should be active). The model should now look as shown below. 15. 13. Create the gridline 3 beams. This is similar to the ‘Orthd snap in other CAD programs.11. ClickApply U.0 BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2 3-15 .

To select mUiple views. 4. r F. Complete the dialog box as shown on the next page. hold down ctrl -key wFüle selecting.-6” ZLEVATION ON 0t10 flEVATION ON OID !L!VAI I ON C-N IO flEVATIDT-1 ON tIO ZLZVATION C-N 0t17 ILI’AIION ON 0L10 ELSVAIION ON 0. Create the precast slabs 1.The model should now ]ook as shown below.-i [ V Pelete J F [ 2. Open the PLAN at ELEV 236 View Select and move views between the hsts to control stiy. QK I Find the Modeling of Floor Bay macro (66) in the Component catalog. 1. 3d -l 23.0 BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2 CopyTi9hl €‘ 2007 Tekla corporaton . Double-click on the component to open the component dialog box. 3. Pre-cast Slabs We will now create precast slabs on top of the framework by using the Modeling of Floor Bay macro (66).ID ELEVAT I ON ON Dam ZLZVAT ION 0+1 EIEVTID-N ON 0t10 ELAN AT EL Ci’ PWZ AT EL 4 S 7 C D £ 4. Narrtd views: :L!V&TICN oti Visible vlews: &IO 1 2 3 4. 0 3-16 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.

CJ I Curcel I 6. type the word Concrete as this will affect how your items are numbered in the model...€ Modeling of floor lv r’ Ed.seWdF ac&a S Er___ .th&S. Prdfec /1 r b h lyoe Thrcrnfee.0 BASIC TNLNG Basic Modeling 2 3-17 .rmi> H It- -til I Prcqeclni ype I 5 Delatdt !!‘- I Z1 [.acrere. In the Pos_No upper box.zz EDdaut ELD&ath Ia S S a 5: 5De S ----CLJ CE’ C 5Se.lokia Structure. Copyright @2007 Takla Corporalron TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. € Tokia gir.j Pa.bo.r. Modclin ol floor bay C”) - L!1 IZiJ Paiartrerr P:olrlar <ErlemalDe.Z1 L. Click the button next to the Profile tab and navigate to the Parameuic TT slab profile then enter the information as shown on the next page. Twa Por$ C 21C1_ 9cP1 Mer’al 55000 o Ia Name P.atflrw) 5? Li. Slab SI : clan d dab Irdem Lie’ Aduoirre. LFZJ P7Tfl [Crct I Click the Profile tab and complete the box as shown.ae 5De IaDaur 2JDeIat ED&L* a S S S S a 21 S o 21 i -I riwi LQ’j LEI.IN._ 5.

ctlons Prolile eublype Pdtse @ @ Double Tees IRCI *3 ODT r5 loDr ± 3 1293 ‘DthaCTeernsNes & icr TEK-T’ Prepay Tal radIi SyIthol V.9 fl 1. 9. Pick positions 5 and 6.e JeallsAe5 Usc-defred. c ate Jelance beweai t S.dlh ot Ihe plale sI.ss Foldel. 23-6 2’ 3! C . 8. click the middle mouse butt. 40 in . pick positions 1 and 2. -a I Praleixcties WS&dswoJdes Paratrelnc profies RCDL profiles I rnress m rim i DefF.e fazro & e-e to \a/. ] ejJ In the PLAN ±23 ‘-6 view.cJ.t Select profile P.. click the Middle Mouse Button Pick positions 3 and 4 as shown.NN_64\ C) 3-18 TENLA STRUCTURES 13. click the middle mouse button. 2r 977/16 7. Stcpe lactor d the p- n in b3 rIp V DOD Shoyq all profiles E Show details L. psias&c Corrc T T ht-s-l-b21-oIrl-63l-rlplll U t’ Pr&k type.e name: 5ene sr4..io. - — View 2 PLAF4 Al a.OK 7..e Uret &TT N b b2 S.0 BASIC TRAINING CopyngIrl a 2007 TekIs Corporstisri Bnic Modeling 2 . A ) • 0 I] f L T C sections • CircularProfiles Timber L proliles T profiles C profiles Circular hollow sections Pactarigidar hollow s.

2 3 Søt’=•I F D !t C 12. Select the macro symbol and copy it to the span between rids F and F. II. Now repeat the process to fill in the slabs in the center bay. The slabs are created in view below. Change the parametric profile as showr to account for the difference in bay width. 1 F •1 Fp’. 13.0 BASIC TINING 3-19 Basic Medeling 2 .10. Copight C 20W Tekia Corporawn TEXLASIRUC1URES 13.sfl’.

ocnje’RC1 ± .-b WdF&iherAeslor.It2dpiE’ 0 • I b : - hIJ1 1. 3-20 TERLA STRUCTURES 130 BASIC TRAiNING Basic Modeling 2 Cepysight @2007 Tekla Corporation .5 EJ Show alp poSes 14. paarrel’c Ccnc.t Soled profile 1< • Denote &*s Use.&T • O CANAM . ±. Profles il ‘0 Double Tees RCI t: °0 Rectenqular IRCI Plate p.e rT4 117 a44’-r4ao’r8 LiJ Cgciiaho(owsecta.4a’. Sicqeiacior. 3. / — V The Modeling of Floor Bay (66) component can be used for steel decking or mesh flooring too. ‘5 t-otowcoeslths 95 Caos4e&abo @ ‘5 Da.ct8es Relde ype: Ps&eesaype PoIse Usadefr.e.. we will create two columns on gridline I and then a sloping beam or rafter between them. Finally copy the slabs to the other bays.&. After that we will create the construction points needed to create roofjoists.Tt hb&+b2fsf.çe PyoUer.neTe. We will copytranslate the completed portal frame and points. Vn 24” 1173/4 4” 2’ 48 033 8’ 302 Lie 55 1 I C . j Q Rectana hollow sections Cipsular sections Tiobe.&Jes ReNt t. Simply change the section name to be used in the component to quickly and easily add flooring of any type to a model. 1 I t4 ‘ • Parameltic protles RCDL plofilee RCDX poSes RCLceNtes RO< oNes Pacedy Tesetel TOLdtMdh T:-ickrtso & tie lo Dezcte oeteaeeos its S:y. It iil restricted to concrete slabs. &t.5 Create Steel Framing First..4thepe Ehow depots S s b2 sIr b3 etc ‘eCow A6VJLCF. .

RI Har. Dtbnw Slail e{eiel MF. 4 and 6. Complete the Column properties for the column at grid F-I.. combining them with the upper steel columns so that they are turned into filllength steel columns. The columns on grid line C should have a bottom elevation of 23-6 and a top elevation of 66’-3and a 900 rotation C I uri’n yioperliiis :4 Colunn juopeities i4j tAs drth.Then to emulate a change in the contract.” ldde V AJ’I*III 2flsv&i jtJvei1& fiicAdn ti ePa ‘N E RH Bact — V O(O3 —___________ C A?Iit. 7 2 m[Wj[iji i/r LIIEJ[Jr jJ 17LrJ[ Coce j 4. we will model roofjoists..rmg SlyI vi:r: Co&si Endi&e. The columns on grid line F should have a bottom elevation of 23-6 and a top elevation of 59-8 as shown on the next page.±i Cck Eie:gn Delc. 6. Click Apply Pick grid intersection C-I to create the column. 5.te AII(t.iit&w rt’ Po:hon Ft4 M*:I: Po:t.1i1411 E” ! 1ST .’.‘.d 2lToc PBo. Load the COLUMN pronerties.bie )l. Steel columns We first create two W3OXI 08 columns on gridline 1 at CI and Fl Create columns 1. II e. Finally.. Complete the Column properties (profile and levels) for the column at rid intersection C-i using prefix and start numbers previously saved.& 492 ‘ r Lvi Fn 2CC.. €i 2007 Teja corcoalb ThIG. Ii Ide v 0 ENaie Cli. 2. we will create vertical eaves bracing on gridlines C and F.n. Utilizing a sloping work plane and view planes. Double-click on the Create column icon.A sTRUcTIREs 13. I 3.0 BASIC TRN1NS 3-21 Basic Modeling 2 . v Dei. we will replace the concrete columns on gridlines 2.iAes £(tfl.e: b.

r 3-22 Basic Modeling 2 2.Column properties EEi Ii. then the point in the column corner. Click Apply. Pick the nñd intersection F-I to create the second column. Use the Measure tool to measure the distance from the edge of the column to the edge of the slab.iE End releases Attributes Posilior V Save asJ standard Deforning Start releases Position C” Deoign Analysis JL — El Vertical El Aotatà El Horizontal: Levels Middle Back V t C. middle positioning causes a gap in the outer face. Click on the Create y measure icon. (7 TEKLA STRUCTURES 130 BASiC TRAINING Copyright 0 2007 lekla Corporation . Measure the gap I. In the GRJD I view pick the point in the slab corner. 8. Since the profile depth of the concrete and steel columns are different.OO — — Middle v 3 El Top: El Bottom: -b’! 23’6 10K 11 Moy II II Cancel] 7.

Open the Column properties dialog box. standard v. Pick a position to place the dimension. Adjust the column edge to the slab (and concrete column) by using the vertical position offset in the Column properties dialog. [save as] standard Design Analysis I End releases Atthbutes Pcsitn v V L Delorming Start ieleases frn 1 iddle Back Midde -31 /16 02000 Q’ E Ho.izoral: 3. Measures are visible in the rendered view window until you update or redraw the window. 1. V Modify the column on gridline F using a vertical offset too. 4.0 BASIC TLINLNG Basic Modeling 2 3-23 . The offset on the column at Ft may be a positive figure Copyright © 2007 lekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. C ii A Adjust the vertical position The measure tools measure distances between two points in the view plane. Modify the column on gridline C using a vertical offset of -31/16” ii:i Position Vertical: Rotation. Check that both column flanges line up with the outer faces of the concrete. 2.3.

“... n a ax .. .. — -J1 I. Double-click on the Create beam icon. Enter W30X99 for the rafter profile and click Apply. Load the RAFTER properties.. Copyright €5 2007 Tekla Corporalson 3-24 TEKLA STRUCTURES 130 BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2 .a Offsets for all members follow the rules outlined in the graphic below. Create rafter 1.4. 3. 2. 0 PLATE CHW*IEL 1• aDg 0 RWATIIJ —— . F’ Lfl pLmlTm IN ‘tME 2> PUSITTh lb DEPTH Steel rafter Now we will create a W30X99 rafter between the two columns that we just created.

Type -2-0”.0 BAlC TRAINrNG Basic Modeling 2 Copyiight © 2001 Telda corporat’Dn 3—25 . C - 66’—3’’ e.4. Tn the GRID I view pick grid C and 66-3” and then F and 59’-8”. ‘_ You may need to expand the 3D view at this point if your rafters are not visible. Double-click on the Create extension point icon. (We use a negative value to make the extension point work back towards the first point clicked) TEKLRSTRucTIJREs 13. — F 59IIe 5. click OK. we will layout points for modeling the roof joists We can now use the grid intersections C and 66’-3” and F and 59’-8” to create the work points for the first and last roofjoists. To do this double click in open space in the 3D view then change the dialog as shown below. First and last joist work points 1. View depth: Up: jDown: 1000 a-a Work points for roof joists After inputting the two columns and the rafter. 2.

Copy the mem hers I. Select the columns. the value you enter defines the distance from the first selected point. Pick grid intersection C and 66’-3”. (• Divided line IloinIs No. the rafter and the points. negative means back towards the first point clicked Using the Create divided line points command. picking the points in the reverse order. Type Ii and click OK Select the two work points created previously.3. and then F and 59-8”. 2”1/lB 0) V Divide the working points in 12 segments .0 BASIC TINLNG Basic Modeling 2 Copynhl © 2007 Tekla Corration . Copy the portal frame and the points We will now copy the columns. I 3-26 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. the rafter and the points to idlines 2-7. Double-click to open the Divided line points dialog box. 5. The points that arc clicked by you in the model define the direction vector. divide the space between the two work points that you just created into twelve equal spaces (11 points). 7. of points 11 Apply Cancel 5< [ OK 6. a — Create extension point adds or subtracts a point along a line that you specie by clicking Iwo points in the model. Repeat. A positive value means the extension point to be added will further away from the first point clicked. A positive or negative value defines the direction along the defined vector. 4.

II 2. 8. Set Sloping Work Plane for Joists The next step is to model the joists on the sloped roof. Right-click and select Copy special> Translate. 5. 7. 21 F.I Pick two points to show the translation vector (19’-8” in x direction).0 BASIC TRAINING Basic Madeling 2 14 Copytghl @ 2007 TekIa Corporation 3-27 . Pick the Set Work by 3 points icon. 4. Click Copy. Help: Modeling> Getting Started> Basics work plane Set work plane to the roof slope > Defining the work area and shift(ng the To set the work plane to the roof slope: 6. I. Pick the top of the Cl column as the origin. TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. Pick the top of another grid C column to define the positive x direction. To place the parts in the correct plane we will first change the work plane (wtich currently is the local coordinate system of the model) to the roof slope. 3. Type the number of copies (6).

The work plane is now positioned to the top plane of the rafter. back. bottom) on the center line of the part. C. but moves it to a new position using a single picked point. top. Pick the top of the Fl column to define the positive y direction. e A / — The Set work plane to part plane command sets the work plane parallel to the part plane (front. 66’-S” a Joist Orientation without adjusted UCS c 66’-3 Joist orientation with adjusted Ucs 3-28 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13 0 BASLC TR4INNG Basic Modeling 2 Cupynghl @ 2007 Tekla Corporation . This command keeps the work plane parallel to the current work plane. You can use the command Work plane > With one point to set the work plane exactly to the desired position.9.

H Rotation around Z: E Rotion oirdX: -300000 20. Load the Joist properties. set J[ Appy ir Modify . vi [object group. however.. Create true VIGW plan I 2. 2. Notice that because you are now looking directly at the sloping roof..[W/FJflcanc 3.0000 § Rendered standard v Fpresentation j 121 Color and transparency in all vievn: Visibility View depth: Up: EDown: EVisibility ci object types: 3Cr E Visible object group: OK [ Display. click OK.. Load the Plan View pre-defined settings and complete the properties as shown below. etc.. The new view is created. always comply with the work plane coordinate system no matter in which view you perform the commands. TEKLA STRUCTuRES 13. Pick Properties > View. Create purlins I. Select a 12K5 profile for the joists.. Double-click on the Create beam icon.0 BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2 Copydght@200? Tokla corporation 3-29 . 3. / — Working in a true plan view makes it easier to model sloped objects since the grids are also shown in the true plan and points outside the view plane are presented as red crosses with circles. Select View> Create view> To workplane. t View properties ISavasl Vew EName: tRUE PLAN ON ROOF E Angle: 12] Projection: Repiesentation Eviewtype: D Plane Orthogonal . your columns may look a little odd because they are effectively skewed in this view. We can also use the true plan view in drawings. standard -. The pan positioning.True plan view We will now make a true plan view of the roof by creating a view perpendicular to the work plane.. copying. The grid is also shown in the true plan view plane. Create roof joists We will now create the roofjoists by using the Create beam tool.

. Change the Position I At depth to: Behind \‘9th Position On plane: Miadle lop Behind U” 21 112 offset and Apply. (12 copies along the slope and 5 copies of those along the building) 3-30 ICKLA STRUCTURES 130 BASIC TRAINING Beeic Modeling 2 Copynghi €12007 Telda CmpoIion . 2 Rotation: EAt depth: y: V 0. &9s Pick the joist work point near grid intersection F-I at the command Pick first position. 59 -a E 7. 6. Create the rest of the joists by using the Copy special > Translate command. Check the elevation view on grid Ito ensure that the roofjoist is orientated and positioned correctly. At the command: Pick second point.0000 -21/2 5. r I . pick the work point near grid intersection F-2. F p 8.4.

Load the. Select View> Work plane> Work plane. 2.250 (EDI Compliant) as the profile. Select Plane: XY and set the depth coordinate toO and click Change.Vértieal_HSS_Brace properties.EI - -— Set the work plane back to global origin Now we must switch the work plane back to the global origin to carry on modeling outside of the roof plane.. 4.0 BAsic TRAINING Basic Modeling 2 &zDnw copight @2007 Tekta corporabon 3-31 .. Plane: Depth coordinate: 0” H Caic& I Changej The work plane is now set back to the global origin. I. 2. 3. Open the PLAN AT ELEV 663 view Double-cHck on the Create beam icon. Enter HSSSX4X. TEKL4srnucTuRrs 13. z Vertica’ Eaves Bracing Working in along grid line C we will create vertical bracing using the Create beam tool. Create brace I.

.0 BASt TRAINING Basic ModeRng 2 Copyright © 2007 Tekla Corporation . Create one brace using the column top positions at C-I and C-2. 2’ C ± 7.5. 6. Remember we offset the columns out to the face of the concrete. Click Apply.. 1transLate 4 1Move . Open the Plan at 598 level and place a brace along the column top positions at F-I and F-2 1 F 2’ F 8. love Clear [W/FIEel 4’ 3-32 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.31/16 Pick. Move each brace down and out towards the center of the column.

33 . F. 5.0 BASIC TRAiNING Basic Modeling 2 3.. With the keyboard type 3 ‘-0 for the numeric location and press Enter. Use the Copy special> mirror command to copy the girders from gridline C to gridline Cowitt @ 2007 T€ cowaiI IErtLA STRuCTURES 13.Copy the brace along grids C and F 1. 2. Enler WI 8X40 for the profile size.. ‘I. Load the BEAM properties. Crane Beam Support Stubs Next we will add crane girders to the framing. In the GRID 1 view. Copy the girder that you created to the other columns on gridline C. Remember relative and absolute snaps can also help you to locate items or points in your model. to copy the brace five times at 19’8” intervals along idline C. pick the grid intersection C and 50’-W. 2. Select the brace and use Copy special> Translate. Move the cursor to map (do not pick!) in the y direction (activate the Snap to nearest option). V Practice the use of Polar Tracking in order to hilly maximize your model ing speed. 3. Double-click on the Create beam icon. 4. Create Stubs 1. Cl Copy girders I. 6.

3. Click Properties > Phase number. Select Phase I. Click File> Save as. 3. Help: Modeling> Settings and tools > Settings > Phases Change the phase of BasicModel2 members in preparation Check objects by phases I. To copy the objects from another model we will use the command. 2... 3. You will find many useful connections in the component catalog for connecting the raflers. to open the Phase manager dialog box.a Take some time now to complete the connections on this model using whatever you deem appropriate. Copy from model.0 BASIC TRMNING Copyright® 2007 Tekla Corporation Lb U Basic Modeling 2 . Save the model with a new name I. By default only Phase I appears in the dialog box. To be able to manage the objects from the two models after we have combined them we will first transfer the model 2 parts to a different phase. This command copies objects from specified phase(s) from another model. The model has now been saved with the new name. In the field at the bottom of the dialog box and type BasicModelcombined.6 Combine Models I and 2 Next we will combine BasicModell and BasicModelCombined by copying the objects in phase I from BasicModel 1. crane beams and eaves braces to the columns and there are several joist to beam set ups too. Don’t forget to add the column base plates too.34 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.. Perform a clash check on your model as you work and once again on the entire structure after you are complete. 2..-firstname lastnaine Press the OK button.

Now all of the parts in the model have changed to Phase number 2.. flier Number C. indicating that they belong to Phase I. Remove pad footings 11.3. Select BasioModell as the model to copy from in the Model directories list. Number Name Phase 1 Name Comment Plant flnter I iF Phase Set current Add Delete Select Objects by phase Objects OK - Add a new phase ModeI2 All the parts in the model become highlighted. Click Modify phase. 7. Click Objects by phases. 2. Click on the Add button to add a new phase. 10. EKLAS’RL’CTuqES 90 BASIC AINrNS Bsie Modeling 2 Cocvrigrt @ 2c0? Telda Oa. Edit the name of the new phase to Model 2. Also edit the name of the Phase Ito Model I. 1. 8. Afier combining the models the footings on gridline C will no longer be needed and you can delete them. 5. In BasicModel 1 the column footings on gridline B were dimensioned both for steel columns on gridline B and concrete columns on gridline C. Make sure ‘Model 2’ is highlighted See that all of the parts are still highlighted in the Model 2 phase. 4. Click Edit> Copy special> From model. Delete the pad footings on gridline C. 9. Phase manager Filter Nirkec Nai C . Copy from model Copy from model Since we did not edit the phases in BasicModell they all belong to phase number 1..at’ 3. Number 1 Name Modell Comr 6.35 ..

3-36 TEKLA STRUCTURES 130 BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2 Cpyrigbl 2007 Tekla Corporat’or . The model 1 parts are now in the combined model. Enter I as the phase number from which to copy the objects.3. 4. C:\TeklaStructuresModels\Training\Steeft. Model directories Basic Model 2Basic Model 2-Concrete BasicModelcombined BasicModelconbined Filter 1 & Easc Model] Selection C:\TekieStructuresModels\Training\Steel\Basic Model 1 1 Cancel IPhase numbeis I fP 1 1 Only click the copy button once Subsequent clicking will re-import Basic Model I on top of itself and in a real contract you may possibly create a potentially serious mat&al over purchasing problem. Copy I roai model Filter C:\TeklaSlructuresModels\T raining\Steel Directories C:\TeklaStructuresModels\Training\SteelS. Click Copy.

Items named as JOIST can be easily omitted from the fabrication drawing production system as these will not be necessary. Part properties can also control how numbering prefixes can be handled. numbering series. I. This is important because it will simpli’ how our automatic drawing output can be handled.A With the Copy special> From model command you are not able to import drawings with the model. So to avoid columns and beams all receiving the same prefix we must be disciplined about defining part properties. 4. name. The pro-am uses this field to help produce better drawings. The sloping beams were named as RAFTER and the eaves braces were named as VERTICAL HSS BRACE copyngbt © 2t07 Tekia corrahc9 TEKLA STRucTlJEs 13. Items that are named as Columns for example will have drawings produced with more column oriented dimensioning rules.3 OASMO TRtItG Ba5it Modelinu 2 3-37 . 3. Use Select Filters To check and modi& this we must leam the use of Select Filters. Check that all part properties are consistent The Model t parts were created without paying attention to part properties and they may not be consistent with the Model 2 parts (color. and material). Notice that only items that were named BEAM are highlighted. Now drag a box over the entire model Everything that should be defined as a BEAM in the Name field of the part properties dialog box should now be highlighted. we didn’t really pay attention to the Name field in the Part Properties dialog box. Select the Beam Filter on toolbar ear hire’ 2. For instance: When we created Basic Model I.

Select.‘I.iiiEet B BEAM W24X82 Select.ed td&tes C ][ [ppty tviodJ[ fiet .0 BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2 Copynght @ 2007 Tekta Corporation .g Load’ J Cmceite Start rjn’tjef: Nsnbering series PreF&: w EAssembl9 il._1 Name: : Protile: I E Material: Finish :4992 IE:cat 3 User-cef&.‘rj[ Cancel Now complete the remainder in a similar manner • Columns • • • • • Horizontal bracing Vertical bracing Silos Concrete beams Concrete columns • Slabs • • Pad Footings Joists ‘3 3-38 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. By following the procedure above check and change the properties for: • Beams iiij Stan Att:tites standard v [aj standard .&earnl End rele-eses Anys Positn Desia] DSorm. V Check other parts properties Using the predefined attributes that were set up by Tekia ensures that not only will the name field be consistent but the grades and numbering series fields will also be correct....

5000. Select and delete each row In the dialog box except one.7 Define Your Own Select Filters To make the selecting of parts easier in the future we will now define select filters for each part type. select (lIter v j Object group [i] [J Q Li C C C Pa. Click on the Display select filter dialog icon to open the Select filter dialog box.3. Typical default concrete grades in Tekla Structures are 3000. Change the one remaining row to read as showTI below I Object group standard objects with matchng properties can be selected ‘. rceti copyright @2007 TeRra Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES 130 BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2 3-39 . Help: Modeling> Settings and tools> Filter> Select filter Define select filter for all concrete items I. 4000. 6000 artd 7000. To do this we can create a select filter that excludes us from selecting any item that has a concrete material grade assigned.. Then repeat by adding a new row for each grade. For steel I concrete beams and columns we will use the materials as additional filtering criteria to be able to filter them separately.n Past Pat Part Part Part standard standard Objects with matching properties can be selected caiegi Pier’ Kane ProNe Mateid Phase Lot Pret Ccnmn I Md/Oi A:ow [Delelerow Detereal Eo4s Equals Equals Equals Equal: OK N select filter Ic&i 3.aIs Vakie 10) E ) Aa/Oi C Delete at JLJ 4.: Raty Materid Coràai E. As we will be primarily involved in producing Steel drawings we may like to filter out all the concrete items in our model. 2.j [ave as standard I Calegoe Pa. We will use the names of the part as Filtering criteria.

t rri&cJig propertiec c&. Cl IEKL.a selecled e And/C. Cc. Or flAdd row I ‘ . 6. Or Or Or 0.icsete Colunn_Filter ChanneLlilter Concrete IDoubleTee IPrama FilIr 7.‘ v • Category Part Part Part Part Part Properly Material Material Malerial Material Material Condilion Equals Equals Equals Equals Equals Value 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 I j E5elete all I____ 5..A STRUCTURES 130 BASIC TRAINING Copyrrght © 2007 Tekla Corporation Basic Modelirrg 2 .Object group seloct filter v[saveaal Concrete Concrete 0ects i. Enter the name Concrete in the Save as field and click Save as. t. You can now select the new filter on the drop-down list. h. 1 ‘4 A 3-40 You can change the condition field to ‘Does not equal’ if you wanted to selecte everything except the concrete grades but bear in mind that this may not always mean ‘Steel Only’ In this model for example the silos are aluminum so would then be highlighted as a ‘non-concrete’ item. Then drag a box over your entire model to select only the concrete members.

Save and re-open the model in order to force the model to load the new attributes that have been added from BasicModell Open the grid properties dialog box from the Points Select and Load the BASIC_MODELI properties — Grid menu Ccpcip © 20C7 Telda Cocp. / 9 Refresh the model Add new grid properties 1. This is because the grid system is not tied to the phase. 2. We will now re-load the saved settings for the first grid.0 BASIC TRAiNiNG Bacic Modeling 2 3-41 . 3.. — Create your own select filters to use both for modeling and for automating drawing creation with the help of wizards. option select filters can be defined for various items including: • • • • • • Define select filter for plates Slabs Horizontal bracing Vertical bracing Silos Rafters Joists. the grid system will not combine..ra3ow TEIÜ. For more information see Help: What’s New> What’s New in Steel Detailing> Easier and faster modeling> General Modeling > New select and view filter By using the Select from model.A 5TRUCThRES 13./ — Drop down lists in each column provide more grouping options. Recreate the Modell grid Although all the parts in Model I have been imported.

..defined attributes.-u... 5. Modif9 J[ S& Close 4..i .-n” RI Nt [azo a. ‘JEw Show.vI[ieasI Cooc’Jjr:aes W 81 3’S’ [ax BASIC MODEL1 r lay Labels lax 0” 43-2” Ofl27’9/224LO’ 44’. Magretñn [a Magnetic grid plane E [a Depth of magnetic plane Other s&tings [a Create [.1 Jbanc& ] 9.Q” Line extensions Le1UBelos [ax Origin PP/Above jaxo 8. Plan View PHASE 1 ELEVATION PHASE 1 ELEVATION Elevation View Elevalr...fl” 1234597 O’12-7”1/224O’ 44’. Click Create Recreate the arid views for Phase 1 by using the Create View previously. Isaveasi slanderd View plane Number of views View name prefix View properties v V ASE 1 PLAN AT EL.. Save the model 7. — Grid Views learned Add PHASE 1 before the View names in order to differentiate between these views and the existing views. i:r’ 0” lay 8.-C.atisn 3-42 TEKLA STRUCTURES 130 BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2 .] [how. Finally save the model. Creation of views along grid lines [J ) 1? )C OK All Al Al Create standard V. 9. Copyright © 2007 Tekla Corps. Create Grid Views 5.

Press OK. please consult the Help Files or the Tekia Extranet Project properties Project properties are common to all drawings and can be used to fill in typical information in the title blocks. Project properties Project nrxnber TRAINCB2 Name Builder Object Address Designer Stat date End date — BASIC TRAINING <your name) PRUJ:OBJECT q. 2. “_ For more information on Firm and Project Folders.ator TEICA STRUCTURES T3O GAS TRMd’G Basic Modeling 2 3-43 .our address> PROJ:DESIGNER Into 1 Into 2 INFO_i INFO_2 User-deFined attributes . Open the Project properties dialog box by selecting Properties-> Project Properties Note below that default information has been added in the dialog box to show you what fields will apply when used on templates. Descriplion (Shown in Open dialog box) Basic Training Model 2 j( 3. All this information can be entered once then stored in a “Firm or Project Folder” so that the next time you start a new model on a particular project or for a particular client.3.8 Setting Up Job Specific Information Now that we are almost ready to commence making drawings. • • Project properties Preferences Tekla Structures contains a powerful tool to help productivity with regard to setting up information that may be repeated over several contracts. Replace the defaults with project information. Note that you can set up this information at any time but the most logical time to do this is right at the start of the contract. now would be a good time to set up many preferences and job specific properties that you may want to show on the output. AppJ iceI Cccght®237 Toca C&oo. you already have the settings required. Setup project properties I.

Check preferences Before starting the modeling we will check that preferences are set up correctly.0 BASl TRAINING Sasic Modeling 2 copyright © 2007 TekIa corpoabon . 5. If you change settings on the Preferences tab. For Components. check the values are as below..44 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. and click OK.2 Bolt diameter A325N 3/4 V V V A36 [Advanced. Connections you created prior to changing the preferences are not affected.. Check preferences 4. stderd Clash check c:ampnenta eneral V [Save asj stsidard PIQUe Plate: names PL BR. Open Tools > Options. Tekla Snctures only applies the new settings to connections you subsequenily create. [uK j[ Apply ] Cancel 3.. Load x..odelin. Help: System > t:sing Tekia Structures effectively > General> Preferences Check that your preferences are set up correctly before you start modeling. Mcuae settings flwtherirLg Folded pi&e: Orientation marks Units and decimals B ohs Factor oF bolt edge distance: Compare edge distance to: Bolt standard: Bolt si:e: Parts Part material: Pat stait rijrnbers Welded to canary: Welded to secondary Loose pats: AssemNy loose parts: p\1 p\l p\l P\1 1.

0 Basic Training 29 October 2007 Copyright © 2007 Tekia Corporation .TEKLA Interactive Steel Detailing Tekia Structures 13.

4-N TEKLASTRUCTURES 110 BASIC IRAINJNG Interactive Steel Detailing CopyTight® 2007 Tekla Corparaffon .

oaGn :EI&AsRlDThRES 13..1 .Contents 4 Interactive Steel Detailing 4.3 C.1 1 2 3 6 9 9 14 17 18 20 23 23 27 Create Gusset Plate with Stiffeners Interactively Explode gusset plate connection Reshape the gusset plate Add stiffeners Create an Unusual or Unique Connection Create plate and fitting for the beam Create a plate for the column Adjust Contour Plate Create welds Create bolt group Create a Custom Component Define the Custom Component Apply the Custom Component 4.0 BASO TRA!41K3 Interactive Steel Detailing 4-lB .2 4.tø2OC? TeaC.

¶1 9 4_jy TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing COpyT1ght2OO7TOIda Cotwa&ji .

ASTRJCLRES 3C BASIc TRAI’I. Copyright © 2fX7 Teka CGWa&n TEK. modify the ungrouped objects and then add objects to the connection using a system component detail. however.. create the stiffeners separately by using a system component detail. However. We will explode an existing tube gusset connection. In this chapter we will take advantage of the Tekla Structures tube gusset connection by using it as a base for a customized connection.1 Create Gusset P’ate with Stiffeners Interactively In Tekla Sftuctures there is no gusset plate system component available in which you can get the stiffeners included in the connection. welds..NS Iflttnctive &fiOI Detailing 4-1 .v. bolts and cuts) interactively from scratch without using any system components.Y_p. You can. We will explode the system component. you may come across situations where its not possible to make the necessary connections in your model using the system components.tJ 4 Interactive Steel Detailing In this lesson Tekia Stuctures system components cover a great variety of the components used in most projects. We will also create a whole new connection (i.e. We vil) learn how to Adapt a System Component to our specific needs • • • Combine one System Component with another to create a complex connection Create a Custom Component interactively Apply the created component around the model 4. modi’ the gusset plate shape and then create stiffeners in the connection using a system component detail.. all connection objects: parts. Near the bottom end of the column at grid A-2 is a Tube Gusset (20) connection..

Select the component symbol. 3. In situations where the connection parameters do not contain a particular option. Create component basic views 1.0 BASIc TftAINING Interactive Steel Detailing copyright © 2007 Tekla corporation . Modifications when done outside of the connection dialog box without first exploding the connection will result in the changes being overtritten if the connection were to get updated. Adjust size of window as needed. In order to modii3’ connection objects outside the connection. ‘I. 4-2 TEKLASTRIJCTuRES 13.p In the figure on the left we see the connemion before the stiffeners have been added. Right-click and select Create view> Component basic view. Before exploding the connection you should take advantage of the connection to get as close to the desired result as possible since editing connection macros is faster and easier than editing objects outside the connection. V Explode connection I. we must edit the parts outside of the connection. Now all of these objects have lost intelligence and association to the connection dialog box. we need to explode the connection to tmgroup the objects in the connection. Explode gusset plate connection Inside of the system connection we are not able to reshape the gusset plate the way it is shown in the figure above. Right-click and select Explode component All connection objects (even if they are set to not visible” in the view properties) will become visible. In the figure on the right we see how the connection will look after the stiffeners have been added. 2. To explode the connection: Select gusset plate’s connection symbol. 2.

U & standad Reshape the gusset plate We will now reshape the gusset plate as shown in the figure below by editing the polygon plate using the Edit polygon shape command. You can only select the objects by using the select objects select switch. CopflhtC 2007 TaMe Caporaten TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. the objects that were in the connection are no longer connection objects.A After exploding the connection. They will be presented in the model as objects (main parts) both in wire frame and in shaded wire frame.0 BASIC ‘RAINC Intecactivv Steel DetailiM 4-3 .

3. F-lit Ctrl + P to place view into plane view mode. r I 44 TEKLA STRUCTURES 110 BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Delailina Cop>. Pick the top right corner of the gusset plate as the starting point of the line. Ctrl + 2 to lighten up the pieces. This is the quickest way to work when 3D modeling.F- r & v -‘I. The contour plate features special editable corners that can be adjusted easily. then edit it as necessary. 2. not 3d. Add the system component closest to your needs. We want to work in plane view. 4. Click the Create construction line icon.gM 2007 Telda Corraton . while making cuts. The system component added the gusset plate using the ‘Contour Plate’ command that we have not actually learned yet. 1. This exercise highlights how to edit a component that has been added by the system. Create a construction line We will first create a temporary construction line to help to locate the bottom right corner of the gusset plate.

5 . then type O. Make sure the plate is highlighted. ‘EKI. Select Edit> Polygon shape and follow the instructions on the command line. You will see 3 magenta boxes and one yellow. H.0:24 Location: As you type. 7> Press Enter and the construction line is created Jnstead of recreating the polygon plate we will now reshape the existing plate by using the Edit> Polygon shape command Help: Modeling> Detailing> Detailing commands> Edit> Polygon shape Edit polygon shape v 0ut planes 1.O.AS’RUCTUREs ‘It BASFC R4JN:Ns InteractWe Ste Detling copight © 2007 Telda Codporator 4. Type the R key to invoke the relative coordinate snap.-24 to define the end point of the construction line (-2’-O’ in the z direction from the last picked point). Enter j numeric location @0. the Enter a numeric location dialog box is automatical]y displayed.5. 2. 6.

The plate is now reshaped. 7. see the figure below. Take the following measurements in the model: Click the Create X measure icon. 4.0 BASIC TR4ININC Interactive Steel Detailing Copy. 6. Pick the intersection of the gusset plate edge and the construction line (2). We can then measure the column to get the parameters exactly as desired.3. When we open the detail’s dialog box we can see thich options are available to us for creating the stiffeners. r . pick the points and a place for the dimension as shown below: I 4-6 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. Pick the bottom cornerright on the yellow box (5) as the corner to be removed. Add stiffeners We will now add stiffeners Eo our connection using the Multiple Stifferiers (1064) detail. (Make sure you pick the plate edge and not the idline). The construction line is no longer needed and you can delete it.1 I / — A The same result may be accomplished by using the cut command. Pick the gusset p]ale corner (1). 5. Pick the gusset plate top left corner (4). In this case we are interested in setting the stiffener spacing and the edge distance from the edge of the stiffener to the edge of the column. Snap to the perpendicular point on the gusset plate edge and pick point (3). pick the points and a place for the dintension as shown below: n C 2. Measure dimensions I. Click the Create V measure icon.ight @2007 Tekla Corporation .

a li/is Ptrjre Stitencis Paacneie!s Generai Anysis b h Left stiffener Right stiffener 3/8 PosNo Material - EF I l r..6 Create stiffeners using macro 1. \_..:1 L—J Name rj ETh iEFI — V E LZ 3.. Pick the column. Double-click on the component icon. Edit the fields shown highlighted on each of the tab pages below and click Apply (study the assiation with the dimensions taken in the model and note the tolerances).. Picture Stilfeners Parameters GeneraljtAna!ysis Miltiple Stiffeners (1 064) 2. 4. and the stifl’eners are created. Open the component catalog (Ctrl+F) and find the Multiple stiffeners (1064) component.j• EI1/4 I Pick the midpoint of the gusset plate. TERLA 5TRIJcThRE5 3 0 BASC iiNN0 nrght 1 cop @2007 Tekia coroorator intrctive Seei Detiing 44 .

you can just enter a zero thickness for that parts ‘t’ value. Use the knowledge learned here to modi’ the connection to resolve the clash with the beam. We could now explode the stiffener detail but since we have not edited the connection objects except for the detail we can also just leave it.0 BASIC TRAiNING Interactive St. 4-8 TEKLA STRUCTuREs 13. ‘N i y [1 You can see the final result in the figures below.eI Detailing Copynglil n 2007 Tekla Corporalion .V ( •-. This will effectively remove the item from the component and the connection in the model. Now notice that the connections at the top of the vertical bracing are fouling the underside of the beam flange.-. / — If you need to remove a pan from a system component but cannot find an option in any of the drop down fields to do so.

a bolt group and welds interactively in order to create the unusual ooking connection shown below. right-click and select Create view> Component basic views. Copyright® 2007 Tejia Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. a polygon cut. Create connection basic views and delete the connection 1. 2. a fining. As an example we will now create plates. Create plate and fitting for the beam At grid intersection Al at level 44-0 (the top of the roof beams on Basic Model 1).4. Create end plate for the beam We will now use the beam command to create the end plate for the beam.D BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing 4-9 . Delete the existing connection. Select the existing end plate connection.2 Create an Unusual or Unique Connection Sometimes you may need to create all the objects for a connection interactively.

] Select.1/lea ‘1 1/4” 3.....: 1 - p M PLATE PL1 436 — -J. E [ ser-deFined attributes. PIate Start releases End releases Attributes Position Analysis Numbering scres Prefix: Pat EAssembi Attri&tes Isaveasi Dasi9n Loading Plate Debnng Conçosite Start ntsnbe. I 1 2Narne: ProFile: -_ ct. OK ApplyJ[ MAy Set j[ w/rJ[ Cancel 4-10 TEKLASIRUCTURSS 130 BASIC TRAINING interactive Steel Detailing Copyiight @2007 Tekie coqratioe ... Start the beam command (double click beam icon) and Apply the properties for the aid plate shown in the dialog box below. 1 E Material: ri j Finish: Class: —-.

ight€ 20C7 TetiaCotporaor TEKIA STRuCtURES 13. 6. stardard JL 5. Cop.0000 Projection: Fleprenentation View type: 3.0 BASIC tRAiNiNG Interactive Steel Detailing 4-11 . Load I standaid View Name: Angle: V Save an standard [Component Front view) Plane Orthogonal Rotation aroundZ: -30. select Properties. Then use the cursor to snap (do not pick!) at the top rit corner of the column (2) to set the correct direction. Rendered standard Rotation arozidX: Color and transparency in all views: Visibility Vie’cdepth: Ejup: Down — M [Representation] I ilL a 0” I V E Visibility of objeot types: Visible object group: r Display.0000 23. Apply M’ J[et j[i/rj[ Catel Hold down the CtrI key and pick the intersection of the beam lower flange and the column flange (1) to set the “From” location coordinates. and set view depths to O’ This will keep distant items from showing in the view you are working in. It is possible to create plates by using either the beam or the contour plate command. group.. In the Component front view: Right click in the view.‘I. V 4.

A STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing Copgight © 2007 Tekla CrporaIIon . hold down the CtrI key and pick position (2). Then use the cursor to snap to position (I). The cursor picks to the desired start position (which equals ¼” from point I in the direction of point 2). The plate then appears. To pick the end position. )J Type 1/4 for the numeric location (the Enter a numeric location dialog box will open automaticaily) and press Enter.2 r N’il 7. 4-12 TEKL. 8. Type 1/4 for the numeric location and press Enter (which equals 1/4” from point 2 in the direction of point I).

j? Move the plate into position Now move the plate into position by working in the Component Front View. which is defined by picking two points on a line. The Fitting tool will trim the end of the beam on a plane perpendicular to the view plane. Help: Modeling> Detailing> Fine-tuning part shape> Fitting I. 4. CorghtC 2’301 Telda Corpo. Select the left edge then the right edge of the plate. Highlight the plate. Go to your Component Top view. select the Move command Copy Copy special Move Move special Delete 2. This will allow a gap for the co]umn plate across the flange toes Fit the end of a beam We will use the Fitting command to trim the end of the beam at the end plate. 3. right click. I. Pick the points on the end plate corners to set the cut line for the fitting.A STRUCTURES 13.etTl TEIG. Click on the Create fitting icon. Ii 2. Select the beam as the part to be fitted.0 BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel DeiaiIing 4-13 .

0 BASIC TRAiN[NG Interactive Steel Detailing Copyright @ 2007 Tekla Corporation U . r Create a plate for the column We will now use the Create contour pLate command to create a plate for the column. Help: Modeling >Parts > Steel parts commands> Contour plate 4-14 IEKLA STRUCTURES 13.“ 1’ r — C J Tekia Structures displays the fitting in the model using a fining symbol. We will then move the plate to the correct depth. We wi]l use the Component end view for ease of picking points to place the plate.

After you have clicked the left top corner of the end plate. - - I - S fn.BEAM ‘N24X62SEAI.s NtanbeA.Ae. PIe 1 Z%iasesi& •35 r .nen ArdeolN Idle ° ILeiI Moay j Sen Ii wfr I’ Cancel In the Component end view: 3. IJroportio$ - Airribules Ar*s. or Eci.I ‘N 1! XED CD LrI. release the CTRL key Then move the cursor to the outside of the column flange and using the perpendicular snap click the first point of the plate. 2. Start the Create contour plate command. 5.edetlb. 1 Create column plate I. - E [ j Po. Prelire Sparnng Loeóre Desir Snarl numbes 1 Pa4 Ecies* M PtA’T P1211 JZ 1 ØNaa. Move the cursor over the top left corner of the end plate and hold down the CTRL key before clicking. 4.g sent. Copyright (0 2007 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRuCTURES 130 BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing 4-15 . : Apply the properties for the plate as shown below: Co”toui plain.

8. 7. Finally use the perpendicular snap to the outside of the opposite flange to complete the plate. vi 4’ 11. release the CTRL key Then use the perpendicular snap to the edge of the flange to define the third point on the plate A 10. 9. Move the cursor to the opposite flange of the column and use the perpendicular snap to define the next point of the plate. 4-16 ICKLA STRuCTURES 13.0 BASIC TINING Interactive Steel Detailing CQpynght © 2007 Tekla CorpoFation . After you have clicked the right bottom corner of the end plate.- - 6. Now move the mouse over the bottom right coma of the p]ate and hold down the CTRL key before clicking. The plate is created in the view plane of the Component end view. Click the middle mouse button to end point selection.

select the column connection plate. Adjust Contour Plate While the column connection plate is now in the correct position. 3. We wilt now adjust the plate by moving the contour plate chamfer boxes in order to provide this. Select one of the boxes. In the Component top view. 2. Select the contour plate. right-click and select Move Move the plate in the x direction (and only x) so that it is next to the d plate. 2. there i’t enough room down the column flange toes to place a weld.Move the plate 1. Move Contour Plate Chamfers 1. Setect Move special — Translate and move the chamfer ¼” in the Y axis only CDpotihl @2007 Tea Crnporation TEKUSIRuCTURES 110 BASIC TRALN[NG Interactive Steel Detailing 4-17 .

5. dTe rón Oeate view Rir1 tn nlap rkO 4. This will also add the plates to the beam and column assemblies. Double-click on the Create weld icon.A STRUCTURES 13. The vertical edge will look sloped until the bottom chamfer is modified too. 4 4-1 6 TEKL. Edit the Weld properties dialog as shown below and click OK.0 BASIC TRAINiNG Interactive Steel Detailing Copytighl ©2007 Tekia Corporation . Help: Modeling> Detailing> Detailing commands> Weld Weld column plate to the beam 1. Repeat the process for each chamfer (-1/4’ for other end 2 boxes).Mirr Wit. r Create welds Next we will weld the end plate to the beam and the column connoction plate to the column. 2.

0 EASbO TIING Interactive Steet Detailteg 4-19 .. 4.:E Weld pt-opel ties V Angle 0. Pick the beam (or any part of the assembly). Tekla Structures uses the welding order to determine the primary and secondary parts of the assembly. You can check assemblies using the command Inquire Assembly. Right-click and select Inquire > Assembly. 3. C Inquire assembly I. ‘I. 2.0006 vi V a 2 Fsh 2LecQt Pach: COIWTIaS 0” E LenIt 23 Pitch & 0 ia attituies flelosonce text: nt taco 2 Ettectree iFxo&.*nd 2 2 E4 2worksh/sie. This affects the position of the parts in the drawings. a 42 No V 0 Connect part)assomEAs. Select the end plate as the part to be welded (the secondary part for workshop welds). V 0. Select the beam as the part to weld to (the primary part for workshop welds). It is very important to enter the welding order correctly.0000 V 23 AngIe: 23 a Contour. The main part of the assembly will appear red and other parts will appear yellow..: As secondary part V 23 jgr-deIiried attributes. s. V To select the entire assembly: press the Alt key while clicking a part in the assembly. Copytight @2007 Te*a Cortu TEKLA s-RuCT1JRES 13. V.

2. We will use the bolts to bolt the beam’s end plate to the column’s connection plate.P A Weld connection plate to the column If your weld was not automatically placed in the desired position. weld the connection plate to the column. Double-click on the Create bolts icon. fl 4-20 TEKLA STRUCtURES 13. you can manually affect the location by setting the desired position for the weld in the Weld properties dialog box. Define bolt group properties as shown in the picture below and select Apply. By using the applied weld properties. For information on bolt group dimensions see: Help: Modeling> Detailing Create bolts > Bolts > Creating a boll group I. Create bolt group Next we will create a bolt group to connect the beam to the column.0 BASIC TINING Interactive Steel Detailing Copoiighto 2007 Tekla Coon .

- 1/16 lndse ii bot assen& C C C El El Listed 0’’ 2 lotlcrd t.23 Tolerance: i1oIetto. Pick the end plate bottom point as the second point (this will indicate the bolt roup’s x direction).s.tc Slotted hcIr l:.r. 7. 6. 0’ 3 /4 -J El Erara ngth Sot group Os El C 23 Shape: El Dolt dist)<: El Dolt dist Y H cie Array V Parts with slotted holes: DECDD 1. Pick the column connection plate as the part to bolt to. 5. Click the middle mouse button to finish selecting parts. 4. ‘ilot: 6’’ Parallel El L [Useidethed atar5des OK J Mo&y JL IF Get J( cacd 3. Pick the end plate as the part to be bolted. coporight © 2007 TaMe corporatrers TEKLA STRUcTURES 13.Save Attributes Sd: Load standard Position EDnoJae 4 A32 [Save as V El Sot size El Ro:aEn ElAr depth • Ottsel from Sack kiddie V El Eo ctandad V I —j End point: 0’’ El Dolt type: El connect part/assembly: Thread in material: Ech Site As secondary part Yes Start point: Dy -U’ Zr. Pick the end plate top point as the first point (this will be the bolt coup origin).rate.0 BAsic TRAINING 4-21 Interactive Steel Detailing .

—’—- . .P C 0 I-) a) P a) 0 Second Point — The bolt group has now been created and the final connection looks like in the figures below. 4-22 TEKLA STRUCTURES 130 BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing Copyright@ 2007 Tek[e CcepDralion . . - -A b. 0 0 . ¶. r 7.

Obviously we want to avoid having to remake it each time so we can save it as a custom component then apply it to other locations.A STRUCTURES 13. For the purpose of Basic Training we will only deal with the Connection which is defined as two or more members coming together. A Custom Component can be a Connection. or a Part. in this part of the exercise we wi]l: . a Detail. Define the Custom Component Replace an existing connection with our newly created custom component Notice that the connection we made currentiy does not have a green cone (The Component Symbol) Define the Custom Component Open the 3D View in order to show the view similar to the image above. The advanced training course deals with the other types of custom components in much more detail. a Seam. (3o to the Detailing Menu and select Define Custom Component Copyrigrit @2007 Tekia Corporation TEKL.3 Create a Custom Component Now that we have made this one connection we may have to use it in simi]ar scenarios around the model.4.0 BASIC 1INING Interactive Steel DetaIlIng 4•23 . V Create the custom component 1.

’pe: component wizard Pos&nAthaneed ‘ - 1/4 e Coinection Nane: T Rate —— Descuption: Toe Plate - Beam to Column Component identifier: [ENeJ9 Fry) Ca’c& 2. Complete the details as sho’ above.0 BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing Copyright © 2007 TekIa Corporation ./Notes T.[ii Custom Ty. 3. the Next button will not highlight. Click Next T 214 0.. select objects that will loin the custom component. l Custom component wizard - COMPONENT OBJECTS In the model. [ <BaCk J ii 4-24 TERLA STRUCTURES 13. If the Name field is already in use.

Hold dor the CTRL key and select each component that was added in turn.4.necht - 1/4 - M... chck to locate the rnn pait 101 Wit C. Click Next Custom component wizard MAIN PART In the model.0 BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing 4-25 . • • • • • • Beam End Plate The Cut between the Beam End and the Beam End Plate Column Toe Plate Weld from Beam End Plate to Beam Weld from Column Toe Plate to Column Bolts 5. Click Next Copyhgnl @2001 Teat Corpøralion TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. 7. 6. Now select the Column as it will be the main part olthe connection.

Custorn component wizard. C f4 parts in picking aide. select secondary parts in picking order... The Finish Button will now highlight. Click Finish 10. We have now saved the parts of the connection in the Custom section of the Component Catalog and can use it to create simi ar connections elsewhere around the model. select secondary - S..4/4 SECONDARY PTS In the model.. € Custom component wizard - - SECONDARY PARTS n the model. 4-26 TEKLA STRUCTURES 130 BASIC TJNFNG Interactive Steel Detailing Copyright t’ 2007 Tekla Corpoiation . <Back_j I I CancelJ 8. Then select the Beam 4f 4 S. r ( Finish cancel_J 9.. The green Component Symbol will now appear.

‘ \. sloped or skewed scenarios and can add the facility to vary all of the parameters concerned (bolt size. distance to the first hole.0 BASIC tINING Interactive Steel Detailing 4-27 .p. 3.‘I. .am L—. weld sizes etc) All paramelers are user definable.—tirv. — Sketches Search result R. bolt gage. Highlight the component symbol. plate size and thickness. bam rr. V Replace an existing connection I. I We can even make this custom component intelligent’ so that it will detect variances in column or beam sizes.r. . then delete it.l4J ‘i 60 Custom Ba&cs Fav&tes \ll MIii : •S •• abe [searciil te j . Open the Component Catalog Select Custom from the drop down list catalog ‘I 4.c Copyright® 2007 Tekla Corporebon TEKLASTRUCTIJRES 13. This is taught in the Advanced Training Course Apply the Custom Component Now go to the connection at grid A2 on the 44-0” level..

In this case it will only be correct where a W24X55 beam connects to the flange toes ofa Wl6X50 column. You will now be asked to pick the main part then the secondary part.0 BASIC TINING Iiiterac*ive Steel Detailing Copyright © 2007 Tekla Corporaton . secondary part = beam Now you should have exactly the same connection as the one you created at grid Al 7. Thess will correspond exactly with what we just defined when we made the custom component. Main part column.5. A We can copy this connection around the model or apply this connection in the same manner we would apply any system component but until we add parametric intelligence to the component it will only be correct for exactly similar scenarios. Find Toe Plate and highlight its icon by clicking once 1 Tce Plae 6. Adding intelligence to these custom component is covered on the extranet and during our Advanced Training Class 4-28 IEKLA STRUCTURES 13.

O>S 1EKLA Numbering and Reports Tekia Structures 13.0 Basic Training 9 November 2007 Copyright © 2007 Tekla Corporation .

.

2 5.5 2 2 2 4 7 8 9 10 11 Copyright 20137 Teida Corpoiatior TEXLA STRUCTURES 13.Contents Numbering and Reports 5.1 Numbering Basics Defining numbers to be used for parts Running the numbering How marks are assigned in numbering Numbering settings Numberthe Model Check the Numbering and Create Reports Numbering Settings Initial Numbering Before Creating Drawings After Creaking Drawings Change Numbering Series 5.4 5.3 5.0 BASIC TRAINING Numbrling and Reports 5-lu .

5-iv TEKLASTRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TINING Numbering and Reports COPynght@27 Te1Co(xra1Ion .

assembly and cast unit numbers into woups.*2!! Numbering and Reports In this lesson This lesson introduces the principles of numbering the model in Tekla Structures. When you initiate the numbering process. etc. nd COLUMN.1 Numbering Basics Defining numbers to be used for parts Numbering series are used to divide part. See more in Help: Modeling > Parts> Numbering parts> Defining numbers to be used for parts. etc. Tekla Structures assigns marks to parts. Copyright @ 2D07 Tekia Corporabon TEKLA 5rRuCTURES 13. You will learn: • • • • The options available for numbering your model How marks are assigned in numbering How to check part marks To use report templates. and the starting number is I and they have a Cast Unit Position number instead of an Assembly Position number. Concrete members have part prefix “Concrete.) or according to which floor the part is located in (l’s floor.0 BASIC rdNLNG Numbering and Reporis 5-1 . an assembly. You can name the numbering series to which a part. For example. assemblies and cast units. 2 floor. The numbering series name consists of a prefix and a starting number. 5. or a cast unit belongs using the part properties dialog box.). you can allocate separate numbering series to different part types (BEAM. A Running the numbering Part Position and Assembly Position numbers are material specific and apply only to steel by default. BRACING.

The prefix and start number together define what numbers the part will be given. 5-2 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.2 Number the Model Until now. All identical parts within such a group will be given the same number. The Modified option only checks the new and modified parts and is much faster.The numbering function is run by selecting Tools> Numbering > Modified or Tools> Numbering> Full. and define the degree of tolerance in comparing the parts in numbering. you decide whether a profile name affects the part number. PCi PC3. I Numbering settings Numbering is carried out according to the settings in the Numbering setup dialog box. if the prefix is PC and the starting number is I (steel columns in our model). would display a warning stating that the numbering is not up to date.0 BASIC TINLNG Numbering and Report CopyrightO 2007 Tekla Corporatror . etc.g. For example. In the Numbering setup dialog you can define how new or modified parts are handled in numbering. there would be no numbers assigred to the items in the model for the report to display. e. Try to create a drawing at this stage. For instance. the numbering result will be PC. Help: Modeling > Settings and tools Tools>Nnmbering>Modified Help: Modeling > Settings and tools Tools>N umbering>Full > Settings and tools reference> Settings and tools reference> > How marks are assigned in numbering In numbering. Each individual part will have its own Part Position. If trying to create a report. Help: Modeling > Settings and tools> Numbering> Numbering settings 5. Help: Modeling> Parts> Numbering parts > What nffec numbering The Assembly Position is used when that particular part becomes the main part of the assembly. a beam may be made up of a shaft of steel. parts with the same Part prefix and Start number will be compared with each other. the entire assembly gets marked as One Beam Mkd 82’ because the shaft of steel was defined as the ‘Main Part of the Assembly’ If the assembly drawing came out marked as ‘One Plate Mkd P16’ yet it shows the entire assembly then we can tell that the main part of the assembly has been defined incorrectly. we have not looked at the how any items in the model are numbered. Item Shaft of Steel Angle Clips Shear Tab Part Position w28 a44 p9 Assembly Position A12 P16 When we make the assembly drawing. angle clips at each end and perhaps a shear tab somewhere along its length. The Full option will check all parts in the model even if they have not been modified.

[Perrosm ntznberin j 9 I CariceJ You would be prompted to click on perform numbering to number parts at that point. assemblies and cast units when producing drawings and reports. Copyright 0 2007 Tekla Corporatnn TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. You must make sure Tekla Structures numbers the model parts before you create drawings or reports. Select any steel column. Select Inquire> Object. This indicates that the part and assembly have not been numbered yet. or click on the inquire icon. t Inquire object Id: part St-st point 1317) [ft—in] a x a F]I°i1 Type: 2 Assem* phase: 1 Part phase: 1316 A 115—0” y 113—0’ 112—i” y = 0” End point i3ia [ft—in] 0” z = 44—0’ tenser sf gravity [ft—in1 0’ z = Top level [ft—in] Part positian IAszebly position tin length [ft—in] Gross length [ft—in] weigh..t Uhf) Weight:Met) Ubf] Wei. click PerForm numbering. To update them. the position numbers oF modiFied objects need to be updated.13 [OKJ • Tekia Structures uses numbers to identify parts.htrosa) Uhf] : = = 44—0” CO 44-0” 44’—O’ 220l.Belore this operation.l 21€.21 2231.0 BASIC TRAINING Numbering and Reports 5-3 .. fl Also check objects that have not been nthlied IFul ryjn*eiigJ L Settingr. Run full numbering Select Tools Now > Numbering> Full from the pull-down menu. all the parts. assemblies and cast units in our model have up-to-date position numbers. The Part position and Assembly position marks are shown as CO and wO. We wilt use Inquire object to see the current state of the numbering of parts and then we will number the model. Inquire a part 1. ?re The Inquire object dialog box opens. 2.

nOly_arPart_1djo. Select Inquire >Object.ter_as_cravety AtCflIV_Iacd_CO5€_i000 hal k. Select any column.5.0 BASiC TRAINING Numbering end Repoita .a..19 7Th1 78—E’y— 0t 22’O’ I - 599642 V in’) 2173847 EbK I - The numbering is now up-to-date and we can create reports.aei. Select AssemblyJist_BOM report template from the list.esefrne I___ copynght 0 2007 Teds corporation 0 5-4 TEKL4 STRuCTuREs 13. We will next create an assembly part list of the whole model.s End point (1238) I St—on) S A 78’—8’)’ • o 0’ a • 0’ 44’D’ 78—8 y — Cnter of gravitv[ St—on] Top level I ft—on) Part PositIon Annhly no.i:ion Net 1ength ft—in) Groat length I ft—in) ((eight (Ib)5 0f. k.. weld lists etc. ‘A You can create reports already at an early stage of the project to check the model and gel pre-bill of material lists al quotation stage. bolt lists. Help: Drawing> Printing> Printing reports ‘I.t Name Ana-%.t stwllP C. Click on the Create report icon to display the Report dialog box.lit Be lrliaa m. 2.c.aOlyOa.aLEr-k.t ntoa_Th_lit Ealtjd. assemb]ies and cast units. 2. Report Hm. > Producing reports on entire model V Create assembly part list and cast unit list I.. Inquire object Id 1236 Type 2 Assembly phase: I Psi phase: 1 ert Start point (1237) ift—ini:. cut lists.aght]Wt) Oleighc(Croos) Vol.. Inquire part I. Now the steel columns have Part position and Assembly position numbers and the concrete columns have cast unit numbers (the position numbers may differ in your model).3 Check the Numbering and Create Reports We will now check the marks assigned to parts.( Opkiaon ‘Oaf Sop Wee Adv.ia Area (in’) 105) [lbf] a— 44—5’ Ci Ci 44 140’ 2201-18 217621 2201.d ecu NIe.aeti:y_cer. ( C The Inquire object dialog box opens.&14_lin 8-0—17 flt A&..a ‘a_By_li Tee Tea CGapoaBeoCeóee Cpaee.

—c [aK Cupyright © 2007 TekIa Corporalor TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. O6IC4fZOOT 1O43:24 P&ge. The report is now automatically displayed in a dialog. 9110 3664 613 913 814 914 14 14 23 23 3743k 12)8 is 2101 28017 63 63 13 13 266L5 44 . Click Create from all to run a report of the entire model. Repoii ASSEMBLT LIST WITH XAY P6OJuCfllK JOB NUMBEr 25:15 3n15 nr SON) DC.e: En.: ?i.3. check the options as shown below. Mso the text file is eated in the model folder.5 .i Options Save asi standard 4.0 BASIC TRAINING Numbering and Reports 5. Report V (ii E ii. On the Options tab. Bark Qty Pro!±le BSM1 014X90 ELMS 321X44 B nil L Length lLgtt NeLgnt flIIiSh 98 99 99 99 812 910 811 911 912 912 2 2 984 19 —8 936 I’ 1969 1 1 1 1 8 8 2 2 8 846 924X42 88134 Z4Xl2 B 813! 924X62 Sm 9241<62 SEa 7242(52 COLUMN WISXSO 1136 18—4 5/8 1827 39• 1874 432.

We will create this report again.xsr [__Show Create from all I I_. 6.Assambly_list_BDMABM. Open model folder to check that the actual text file appears in the model Tekla Structures also stores a flaIl numbering history in the file: numbering. In the Report dialog box. Click Create from all. and give the report with a specific name in order to keep the informañon on the stage of the project. Tekla Structures asks before it ovensTites the existing report Message t • Do you want to reace existing fe? j Yes 1 I No Naming a report 7. Select Tools folder. .bly_Phase_i ist Asceablv list TMes in repoils -9 1’ V r1: T tIeZ a (\ . JO. > 9. give them a specific name. J Cancel [ Create from selected 8.history.ab ly_or_P art_Id_list • ASS ii_To_l ist Bolt Iri list molt_list Checked By list C os&ronent Co dcc T$ie3 Coapon. Check the numbering range of the assemblies and parts.0 BASIC TRAINING Numbering and Reports . Repeat the procedure above to create a cast unit list of the entire model.J standard Re Dnr Retort te.bly On Bold lint As se. The report is now displayed in a dialog box.) Ass. To keep the report files you have created.xsr - (Or you can type Assembly List <today’s date> and change it next time you run the report) G [savna. The file contains the following model numbering details: • • • User who carried out the numbering and the date Numbering Full / Modified Numbering settings used 1’ Copyright @2007 Tekla Corporation 6-6 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.nt_iist Report tie Nanf.Iater Advanced Diii As scab ly c ant as of Granty Asseablynd_Code_iist Asse. edit report file name to read: Assembly_list_SOM_ABM. If you try to create a report with the existing name.5.

see Help: System> Files and folders . Tekia Structures highlights them in the model V 5.w/lw/O—>cr/lC 113 0 series :v/lv/U—>w/10 115 0 serles:v/1 c/U —se/lb 1176 oerias-u/le/C—s or/IC 1196 retOrt v/I v/C —r v/lU 1216 seoie. Concrete/i 995 Concrete/D > Concrete /4 oeries:Conrreta/1 Concrete/C —> Concrete/4 993 series Concrete/i 100 1 Concrete/C —> Concrete /4 aerieo:Concrete/1 1009 Concrete/C—> Concrete/s 101 Scarier Concrete/I. Part id Part ad Id: Past Part Id: Part Id’ Past Id: Pert 16: I ° I When you select a list entry that contains the ID numbers of the parts or the assembly. v/I. This displays the numbering history in a dialog box.aes: Concrete/I Concrete/C—> Concrete/S 1067 senor: Concret/ Concrete/C —s Concrete/C loll stoics: Concret/1 Contret)0 -s Conroctel6 lop7serxo-. Concrete/U —> Concrete/I seraes:Concrete/1 1026 Concrete/U —> Concrete/I satire.tcncrete/1 Ccncrete/C—> Concrete/S 1050 lCS8sa. i9/0 —> v/li Part ad: ran ad: Part it Part ad: Part. ad: Part Part adPart ad Part ad. d: ad: Part Part ±1: Part id ad: Part ad: Part ad: Part Part ad Part at d: Part ad: Pert Pact id: Part ad: Part Id: Part Id.-v/1 v/C —s v/jO 1236 serIss. Part Id. assemblies and east units numbered Study the numbering history log I. go to Setup -> Numbering Copyright® 2007 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRuCTURES 13. Tekla has set up and provided a selection of common numbering setups./l v/C —re/It sroier:w/l v/O—>p/lO lab 5-o/lC 0 srrieo. For more information on the log file.Concrete/1 1042 oncrete/U —>cncrrtejl saoiss. To view these.. Part ii.4 Numbering Settings From Version 13 onwards.0 BASIC TRdJNING 5.t > Log files> Numbering history log List 036 oeries:Concrete/l Csnorete/C —> Ccncrete/4 061oares:Cencrete/1 Concrete/U—> Concrete/C 069 rerias:Concrete/1 toncrete/U —stontretej4 sertrs. Concrete/i 1034 Concrete/C —soncretejl oeri*s.• • A ]ist of defined numbering series Information on the parts.v/lw/ 1110 saries.v/li 1-367 series-.v/1 cc/C —re/jo 1250 1270 aeries:v/1 v/U rv/i3 .ZSOrer-_es:v/1 v/U —r v/lI 1310 seraro:v/l v/U—sos/lu 1336 seraer:o/l v/C —sw/la 1358 oerier:v/l v/C —I.7 Numbering and Reports . Initial Numbering • • Before Creating Drawings After Creating Drawings Each of these has the numbering properties set up specifically for that part in a contract. Select Tools> Display log file> Numbering history log.Concrete/1 977 Concrete/U —> Concreta/4 series-..

0 BASIC TRAINING CopyrihI © 2007 ToMe Corporation Numbering and Reports . a B3 then a B5 in your model meaning the B4 was deleted at some point. r :? Numbering setup 1niAlNumbe:ig V Save asJ i_lrbaLNuntering — Nurnberthg FaNy numberiig Ccipsre I ElRerunberal I H Re. During the modeling process Tekia consistently keeps tack of what items are similar to what other items and numbers the model accordingly. f 5-8 TEXLA STRUCTURES 13. Also during the modeling process. when items change. a B2.ne o rximbers [ Check 1c staJad parts New: Conpare to old v V ElHos Part nne H Sea.. Initiai numbering will automatically fill those gaps so that the first time you issue your drawings or reports there will be no gaps in the numbering system. Consequently. items that previously had a number assigned may have been deleted. It consistently allows numbers to change every time a numbering of the model is performed in der :o fill any gaps that may appear due to items being deleted from the model. There maybe a B!. This causes Tekla to ignore the current number on an item and possibly give it a new number based loosely on the order it was added to the model. leaving a gap in the numbering.Initial Numbering initial Numbering is used Select 1_Initial Numbering and click Load This setting would be chosen right at the start of the modeling process and would allow the user to quickly check that members that are supposed to be similar are getting the same number. sabcn El Column orientation El Reinforcing bars El Embedded objects El Surface treatment Tolerance: Steel Concrete 1/32 1/4 Modified: Compare to old H Synchronize with master model Isavenumberirig-savel ElAutomatic cloning Reinforcing bar 1/4 Other OK 032 J[ Apply J L Cancelj You can see that Renumber All is checked. the numbers must revise so that no different items have the same number and that the amount of different numbers is minimized by consolidating similar items wherever possible into the same number.

Before Creating Drawings This setting differs from Initial Numbering by forbidding Tekia to renumber everything in the model.. the particular number that was assigned to one particular member which has since been deleted or changed to be similar to another member could now be assigned to a completely different member.0 BASIC TRAINING Numbering and Reports 5-9 . Coyiht@2OO1 Telda Corporatori TEKLA STRuCTURES 13.Drawings Fa* numbeing Ccnpae Hos Pait name flRerxIrtJetal E fle•use old numbers] [Qtik br standard parts Corwase to o Modgied: Compare [odd - fl Ream orientation Column orientation V 2 Aedosci’g bss Ernbedd. l Numbering setup (5 (save as) 2_BeFore_Creating_Drawings JJ Nuisng Options 2fletoreCreating. It thes to retain the current numbers on parts that already have numbers but it does try to fill any gaps in numbers by re-using deleted numbers that are no longer in use.dotçects fl Synchronize with masler model (save-numberingsave) • Automahc cloning • I SurFace ticatment Tolerance: Steel Cccele — 1/32 1a 1 - Renforcrngbar 1/4 Other 1/32 OK ApplyJ Cancel A typical scenario for this setting would be when modeling and checking is complete and we are ready to start creating drawings. (The exception to this would be the Anchor Plan which typcally doesnt show column marks anyway) Note that if this setting is used.

Altec.After Creating Drawings The third default setting is used when approval changes or revisions arrive after drawings have been created. The keep number if possib]e setting allows unique members in the model to retain their numbers after a change. / — If you would like your numbers to remain constant through the approval process. then when the others are changed. This would stop a particular mark that was assigned to something at the approval stage from changing to something completely different at the fabrication stage.1aicn 2 RernForcñg bs 2Ernbedded*cts Suf ace treatmant Toterance Steel Concrete fl Sschonie wh master n-od& (save-ntrrering-saveJ EAutornatt ckring 1/32 1/4 Reinforcing bar 1/4 Other OK 1/32 IF Apply ] [ Cancel V The system is allowed to re-use old numbers in order to minimize the gaps in the numbers. they may become similar to the first member that was changed and will assume it’s (new) number.CreatintDrawinas Numbering Oplions Family numbering Compare Holes fl Renumber all 1 Re-use old numbers I Check tar standard parts New Nodhed Cm. r 3A[ter Creating_Drawings Save as 3. 5•jQ TEKLA5TRUC1uRES 110 BA5IC TRALNING Numbering and Reports Copyright © 2007 Tekla co-rraton . This may be particularly impatant if you are using multi-sheets (Large sheets with a number of items detailed on one sheet) where you would like to avoid havhtg blank spaces on your sheets. it may take anew number. similar member. For multiple members in the model.. they may retain their number but if one is changed and a numbering is performed.parelc± Keep rNjmber posaNe t 2 Part name D Seam orientation 2 Cokirrir orE. in which case that unique member will assume the number of the already present. unless that change makes them similar to another member. if they are all changed at once. you may want to uncheck the Re-use old numbers setting.

Phase V&e 1 I AndAJr [_Md ‘°_I ai OK Apps I TEKL4 SCTORES 13.Take New Number A further option available in the New and Modified section allows Tekla to take a new number regardless New: Modified: Takenewnurnoer jnew number V This maybe useful for revisions after fabrication and erection has commenced as it will not interfere with any drawings or numbers that have been previously issued. with mSth’ç peopouties tan be s4cled ceQof E Obtect Propey Con. Changing the numbering settings in the middle of the project can be dangerous.0 BAsic TRA[NING Numbering and Reports 4. Set Initial Numbering vJ[save s) 1_InitiaLNumbering 2. This way we can allocate parts in a certain area of a building to a particular numbering series. make sure you understand how the changes will affect the part marks. assemblies and cast units the way we want. In a case where you absolutely need to change the settings in the middle of the project.. Switch on the select filter 5-11 copyright @200? Tekla corporalion . This may make handling revisions slightly easier.5 Change Numbering Series By defining a numbering series (numbering prefixes and start numbers) we can group parts. We will now change the numbering series of the items in phase ito start with 1000 and the items in phase 2 to start with 2000 I. Number the Model — Full Numbering 3. • • 5. Always carry out a full numbering on the model after you have changed the numbering settings. Define a Select Filter to highlight oniy Phase I objects - [I Object group selecL filter F v Phasel ObWcl.

fib 5-12 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. B BEAM 121 121 1000 10001 —ii ‘nqlB’<40 E ProUe: fl Mater A882 fl FirAsh: 3 Q Class: H [usei-defined attributes UK Apply H Moday H Getil! P/F Ii cancel 7.:el K! [54. 3 [save asJ standard Design DeIorrning LoadingJ Composite Stan number: FlEE! LE! standard Start . Open the Part Properties box (Properties I > Steel Parts> Beam) .eleases End releases Attributes Position Analysis - J[ I Numbering series Prefix: D Part D Assembly Attributes D Name: V.Phasel 5. Now drag a box over the entire model 4 6. Uncheck all the modi’ switches and revise the numbering series.0 BASIC TRAININS Copiight © 2007 Tekla Corpsradon Numbering and Reports .

This can be undone but if it isn’t caught in time it can have potentially catastrophic consequences.7 53 5261 3902 Sr2 zd: zd: id: d: *d: id: 3d: 3033 2072 3004 5erIes:C?l000 792’series:O/lOOO 9011 saries:0. Click Modify Repeat the process for the Phase 2 items 9..C —> 3:124 0.2 > 0. Be careflul to allow a good safety margin of available marks when using this type of phased numbering system.es:C sera.bly Asa€rtly Asser.es:0 120:0 3321e5:C/1000 !-2 —> 2.-2020 senes:3.bi.bIy sseb1y Assetly Assextly Assexb1 Assartl7 Asserr.0 BASIC TIN[NG Numbering and Reporis 5-13 .d: ‘d: id: SC2.ESer. 2204 B’0 —> 3. .d: :d: . If you have more than 1000 different members in phase I then the I001° member must take the number 2000. Perform Full Numbering 11. S.2004 3-2 —> 3/20:4 S.• If you fail to uncheck all the modify switches you will change every single highlighted item to match the properties shown in the current dialog box.2202 series:S:2200 20/ 1 ser. This will overlap with the first member in phase 2 and cause confusion.1004 3:Q —.bly zser1y sse. Check the Numbering Log (Tools> Display Log File> Numbering History Log) Assax.1000 SOdS rros:C/10OO 5263 series:0/10_ seraes :3:20D0 5eries: C:00 renes:3. 10.1020 0/0 — 0:11-21 0/ 0—>0: 1112 0/1003 0/1004 tiC —> 0/1004 0/0 —>0/1003 0/2 —> 0/1126 —> 0/0 0/2 —> The numbering log should show that items have changed to assume 1000 series or 2000 series numbers. • • Copyright @2001 TekIa Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.ssehly :d: s. 8.t1y 3.

0 BASIC TRAINING Numbering and Reports CopyTht 2CC? Telda Corporation .5-14 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.

eSe

TEKLA

Principles of Drawings

Tekia Structures 13.0 Basic Training 29 October 2007
Copyright 0 2007 Tekla Corporation

C,

Contents

6

Principles of Drawings
6.1 Integration tween Drawings and the Model Tekia Structures model Drawings Changes in the model members Drawing Types Drawing List Opening and closing drawings Drawing list contents Drawing status flags Drawing Levels Modify drawing properties Modify view properties Modify object properties Drawing Objects

.1
2 2 2 3 3 3 5 6 7 7 8 9 10

6.2 6.3

6,4

Copyright © 2007 Tekla Corporaton

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13,0 BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings

6-ui

P.

r

çb
6-lw
TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TINiNG Principles of Drawings Copyiigbt@2007 Tea Corporation

!F

Principles of Drawings

In this lesson

This chapter introduces the principles of working with drawings in Tekia Structures. We will first explain the integration between drawings and the model. Then we will: • • • • Introduce the drawing types available in Tekla Suctures Introduce the drawing list Introduce the various levels of editing the drawings Study the drawing objects and layout

6.1

Integration between Drawings and the Model
Tekla Structures stores all the important project information in one place, i.e. the model. Drawings and other printouts such as reports, nc data files etc. are output produced directly from the model.

F

cpy,ight @2007 Telda Cerporatron

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings

6.1

Tekia Structures model
The model contains all the important project information: • • • • • • Pans’ geometrical and structural information Part marking Pan properties Bolts Assembly information User defined attributes

All the modifications must be done directly in the model. The model is always modified in the Tekia Structures Model Editor.

Drawings
The drawings are current views of the members contained in the model with added definitions for: • • • • • the sheet size to be used the way titles and tables are placed on the sheets what is dimensioned and how which marks are displayed how the item is oriented on the sheet

You can create drawings at any stage of a project. Some of the drawing commands are located in the Model Editor and some are in the Drawing Editor. You will find all the commands for creating and managing drawings in the Model Editor. To view and edit drawings, you will use the Drawing Editor.
Help: Drawing> hotroduetion to Drawings

(

Changes in the model members
Changes in the model members can result in the drawings no longer being up-to-date. The following are examples of changes that affect the drawings: • • • A parts profile or geometry changes Parts have been added or deleted The number of identical parts has changed

Tekla Stsuctures indicates updates in the related drawings and the drawing list the next time you number the model. Numbering does not have to be up-to-date to create or open general arrangement drawings.

6—2

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING Poinciples of Drawings

CoRyr’ghI@ 2007 Tokia Corporation

6.2

Drawing Types
General Arrangement (GA) drawings, also known as Erection plans or E-sheets. can contain several views, which can include the whole mode) or any part of it. With the GA drawings you can create erection, foundation and other plans. as well as details from views in the model. Single-part drawings are workshop drawings of individual steel parts. Drawings can be produced for any steel part in the model. The single-part drawings can contain holes but welded parts cannot be included. This drawing type is available in Steel Detailing modue. Assembly drawings are typically workshop drawings where details of an assembly consisting of steel parts are presented for fabrication. In most cases, an assembly consists of single steel parts that are either bolted or welded to the main steel part. This drawing type is available in Steel Detailing module. Cast unit drawings are formwork or reinforcement drawings of reinforced concrete structures such as foundations. This drawing type is available in the Precast Concrete Detailing module. Multi-drawings are workshop drawings which gather together several single-part or assembly drawings on one sheet. This drawing type is available in Steel Detailing module.

6.3 Drawing List
We will briefly cover the Tekla Structures drawing list. You can use the drawing list to: Select and open your drawings for viewing and editing in the Drawing Editor • • Update, clone and delete drawings Update GA drawing marks Display and fiber drawings shown in the list • • • • Choose drawings to select parts in the model, or show only the drawings of the selected parts in the list (not available for GA drawings) Lock, freeze and issue drawings Add revisions to drawings Modify properties of several drawings at a time.

The drawing list also displays the creation and modification dates of the drawings, drawing size and type, etc.

Opening and closing drawings
You can only have one drawing open at a time. If you already have a drawing open and changes have been made. Tekla Structures prompts you to save that drawing before opening the next one. Open drawing list and a GA drawing To open the drawing list and a drawing in Tekla Structures: I. Select Drawing> List.., from the menu or click the Open drawing list icon on the Standard toolbar.

copyright © 207 Tekia Corporation

TEKLA SIRUcTURES 13.0 BAsic TRAINING Principles of Drawings

6—3

2. 3.

In the drawing list select a previously created drawing. Click Open. or double-click on the drawing to open it in the Drawing Editor.
>

r
[
CarIDel

See also Help: Drawing> Getting started with drawings

Opening drawings.

When selecting drawings in the drawing list, the activated buttons at the bottom of the Drawings dialog box are Open, Update, Clone, Delete and Cancel. The table below describes their functionality.

I E n’
Button Open

Lc J L
Description

Delele

4SD,,.ê’gs Icerd, 1 selected

Opens the selected drawing in the Drawing Editor. You can only select one drawing from the list at a time. If the Open button is grayed, you have more than one drawing selected. You can also double-click a drawing on the list to open it. See also Opening drawings. Updates frozen drawings. and recreates unfrozen drawings. Locked drawings are not updated. Clones the selected drawing for a similar part. Deletes selected drawings. You cannot delete locked drawings. Closes the dialog box.

Update Clone... Delete Cancel Close a drawing

To close the drawing in the Drawing Editor: I. Select File> Close drawing from the menu or click the “x” in the upper right corner of the drawing window.

Tekia Structures asks: ‘IckLa Structures drdwing

is,
2,

U Disthle atdorn&ic updatg (Freezel

L

Yes

No

JLcncei J

Select Yes to keep the changes that you have made to the drawing, or close the drawing without by clicking No. Check the box to Freeze the drawing upon saving.

saving

-

Freezing When the model changes, Tekia Structures will update the parts and drawing objects in frozen drawings, but will not overwrite any elements added manually, such as extra marks or dimensions. See Help: Drawing> Ceding Started with Drawings drawings
>

)

Working with

6-4

TEXLA STRucTuRES 130 BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawirlgs

Copyright @2007 Tekla Cerporater

You cannot change drawing marks. ?‘ I . Mark Name Title 1. You can add a drawing title using the Name field in the drawing properties dialog box. You can adjust the column widths of the drawing list and Tekla Structures will keep the changes. . Add extra drawing title fields to the drawing properties dialog box.) at the beginning of each row. indicate the drawing status. - .. Dates Revision Size Type The creation and modification dates of the drawing. The example below shows a portion of the header line information that is available in the drawing list. The drawing types are identified by the following letters: W for single-part drawings. along with the Changes column.. The drawing mark is the number of the part from which the drawing was created. Title 3 User-defined attributes Copyright a 2001 Tekla corporation TEKLA STRUcTURES 13.Drawing list contents All of your existing drawings are shown in the drawing list. Title 2. G for general arrangemeiit drawings. Include up to 20 user-defined attributes in drawing lists.. Paper size.evisbn Size 36”24 5’W’ Tpoe Mark S lI [‘1 Name 3100 Cmi !*lel FOU.0 BASIC TRJNING Principles of Drawings 6-5 . A for assembly drawings. nOC See also Help: Drawings> Getting started with drawings> Opening drawings> Drawing list. The revision number or mark of the drawing. Item Flags Explanation X Flags are characters ( etc. Issue Lock Freeze Uptodate Changes Created 03)29. You can sort the order of the drawings by clicking the desired header line button in the drawing list. The table below explains the header line items of the drawing list. flflO P. They. which is shown automatically.. flflQ Mo&red 03)29. M for multi-drawings. . C for cast-unit drawings.

which are shown on the left hand side of the drawing list. Quantity increased Quantity decreased ! x 3. All the parts related to the drawing have been deleted. — — Lock GA and other drawings from being accidentally deleted or changed. The drawing is locked. Lock (LZ) and Issue ( _l) flags can be manually added to the selected drawings.Drawing status flags The status of drawings is represented by flags. The drawing has been issued. you might re issue drawings that have been sent to site. 6-6 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13M BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawin s 9 Copyñybl t’ 2007 Tekla Corporation . A drawing flagged n has been updated. see Help: Drawing> Getting started with drawings > Opening drawings> Drawing status flags. right-click to open the pop-up menu and change the drawing status. A copied drawing has been modified. — Flag Changes Text Parts modified Description The parts in the drawing have changed. The actual drawing is up to date. Use the buttons on the right hand side of the drawing list to change the status of a drawing. select the drawing in the list. e. or part properties have changed. e j a Issued drawing changed The issued drawing has been edited or otherwise changed. The part from which the drawing was originally created has been deleted. The flag appears automatically on issued GA drawings that have been modified.g. A frozen drawing has been updated. others exist Cloned A linked drawing has been moditied. Alternatively. parts have been added or deleted. For more information about drawing status flags. The drawing is a cloned drawing. Original parts deleted All parts deleted S -* • • Linked drawing changed Copied view changed Drawing updated Original parts deleted. but the number of identical parts has changed. The drawing is frozen. and there are still other parts relevant to the drawing in the model. For example.

. These properties can be accessed through the Drawing properties dialog box for each drawing type.0 BASIC TRAf4ING Principles of Drawings 6-7 . • Delete Selert all Create Drawings Lc. Seject Properties> type drawing... AIt+U Revision. Alt+Enter Leer-defined attributes. The General arrangement drawing properties dialog box is shown below...Iesta Lock — Fieeze Upto Open Ctaige. which can then be used in reports and drawings.. see the following help files: Help: Drawing> Introduction to drawings> Three levels of editing drawings Kelp: Drawing> Drawing properties Modify drawing properties The highest level at which you can change the drawing properties affects all of the objects in the drawing. CtrItO Oeake —-1 03/28 Properties. in the model database when the issue drawing thnction is used. on the menu bar or double-click on the drawing to open the drawing properties dialog box. Open the drawing to view the drawing title. 6.’+’J SFEL+0 ctrh-E Del Ctrl+A OF Issue a drawing Tekia Structures saves the issue date. Click the Issue On button and the - flag will appear. Copyright® 2007 Tekla Cerporaten TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. CtrI+R ‘Jçdste ae mas Rerea:e Prr: &ayis. Ct.4 Drawing Levels You can edit drawings in the Drawing Editor on three levels: • • • Drawing properties View properties Object properties For more information about the drawing properties and different drawing levels...cl’ Freeze Or. To issue a drawing: Select the drawing in the drawing list. Check that the issue date is shown correctly in the drawing title.

gs CopyTight 0 2007 Tekfa corporation . DimenrioT] El 2 J Lsurface freolmenl mark J Parr marl Pal 2 [ Golf mark 2 Connection merk.. El Othecs [ Ei’ ocn El I user-defined arrribures J OK IL Ap 21 Firer EtoarifJw I Cancel A Modify view properties Whenever possible.. LayorA. 21 Name: E:ee Viewr 21 Onensloer r [. El 21 El etap Craface rearmans fl&er*cs El I 2l[ \Vml& Odd 21 I__flerrcenwj. pat mark. It is important to remember that changes at this level take precedence over the drawing level settings. The second level is to edit the view level. 21 I flerrilorcement markr.. _J _J 21 21 I View 21 21 Marks menslon. you should modify drawings by changing the drawing properties. CDL 2 [Neighbs.0 BASIC TINFNG Principles of Drawh. 0’ 8-8 TEKLASTRIJCTURES 13. The View properties dialog from an assembly drawing view is shown below. These modifications also remain when the drawing is recreated due to a model change.. In the drawing interface. double-click on the border surrounding the drawing view to open the View properties dialog box. where you modi’ the selected drawing’s view.[t Genera! arrangeruent ci nawing properties Save [ Si Load J sLdsd Save at r I Derail view.

d evfll 4 fr’ 30 . 3/32 Aid coureersurac Gase oF outstardw Center-Incense. 2 El LNeolibor part til J4 _H Moy ][iE Iw/rJi Cscel Modify object properties The third and lowest level is to edit at the object level. The properties dialog for an assembly drawing bolt mwk is tho be[ow. where you change individual objects in the drawing.Save Attributes 1 J Attributes 2 .. hlwka 4 2 El 0bects Paitsnak Surtace treatment rearkj El El Lees maik. I Connection maj El El El El Neighborpaitmaek [Reinforcement mark ELOca 4 Others 2 Eli Eli OK Ssutace tieatnera] H&eenee El r Np&. sçe red Ste hega Sick anal. * toll m. Size 550 # Winder ci be’s 550 at rieq* Card. _j Refrocceenet Eli Grid Fiyer.0 00 2pe&ttad. Vein: Deothdorwi -51/128 115/32 X man: 431183/128 Ywas Devdn 115/22 i•’”2/32 yew erien’ t negitos pate. 5’ ±±! 2.0 BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings 6-9 . 0...d S tsr “tx-’ ties ztarsdard C.tee GenerM 2 Avde n± Rse length Bolt dameser Hdediaeeter Standard Shsrt nane Full name c< Gage oF o4aiendn or Centes-lecenter diz Type: DJ Anew-ct. ore 5- Copyright @2007 TekIa Corporation TEKLA STRuCTURES 13. Tndividual object settings can be accessed by double-clicking on the obiect.7 Lead J standard V Save as J Column with_GO Label ElScae: 12W No V Rseabon aor. .4e4ir ElSize: QFilbypails Detrie as distances Xre*.

poly lines. changing something else at the level above may negate the changes you have just made. Then modib’ anything else that needs adjusted at the view level and finally if any further cleanup is necessary (and this should be minimal) you can do this at the individual object level. Once you have edited something at one level. symbols. DWG/DXF files. 1_ If you find you are adjusting many items at the individual view level. rectangles. polygons. clouds.Drawing Objects In Tekla Structures. They will almost definitely be able to suggest a method to minimize any extensive drawing editing. circles. you shouldn’t have to edit your drawings at all! r 6-10 TEKLA STRUCTURES 130 BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings Copytight© 2007 Tekla CorraIinn . Always work downwards in the drawing hierarchy. marks and dimensions. text. the term drawing object refers to lines. please contact Tekla Technical Support. Ideally. Get your drawing as close as possible to what you want by first attempting this at the entire drawing level. arcs.

TEKLA Assembly and Single Part Drawings Tekia Structures 13.0 Basic Training 9 November 2007 Copyright © 2007 Tekla Corporation .

r .

1 7.Contents 7 Assembly and Single Part Drawings 7.3 7.4 7.0 BAStC TRAtNtNG Aseembty and Single Part Drawings 7-hi .2 Assembly and Single-part drawings Create Drawings Create Assembly Drawings of selected parts Create Single Part Drawings Creating Drawings from Groups of Similar Members Creating AD Drawings Automatically Functionalfty of drawing wizards Edit Drawings Manually Alterations Change the model Update the Drawings I 2 2 2 4 6 9 9 12 16 17 18 7.5 7.6 Copyright © 2007 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.

0 BASIC TftAININS Assembly and Single Part Drawings Copyrght@ 2007 Tekla Corporation C .iv TLKLA STRUCTURES 13.

Then.Assembly and Single Part Drawings In this lesson We will introduce the creation of assembly and single-part drawings in Tekia Structures. Revision control of all drawing types is presented in Principles of working with drawings.0 BASIC TlNINS Assembly and Single Part Drawings 7-1 . We will learn how to • • • • Create assembly drawings individually Create drawings of groups with common attributes Create drawings automatically Handle drawings after thanges are made in the model. We will then edit the drawing properties. We will first create single-part and assembly drawings by using predefined drawing settings. We will also demonstrate how updating effects the drawings. Copyright @2007 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. we will use wizards to automate the process.

You can create drawings and reports at any stage of the project.2 Create Drawings Once you have numbered the model.A STRucTURES 13. 7.0 BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Pan Drawings CopyTight © 2007 TakIa Corporation . All of the views in single-part or assembly drawings are current views of the members as they are in the model. I. the drawing is a view of one of these members. iIlter out parts and bolts in the drawings. however. Assembly drawings are workshop drawings. If you change the model. Tekla Structures will then automatically assign the original drawing to another member with the original position mark.7. Tekla Structures integrates the drawings and reports with the model. you cannot delete any of the parts or bolts from the drawings.1 Assembly and Single-part drawings Single-part drawings are workshop drawings of each of the individual steel parts in the model. Because the infonnati in the drawings and reports comes directly from the model. it will get a new position mark at the next numbering. When the model contains any identical members. Select the Column at Grid A3 p 7—2 TEKI. in which details of an assembly consisting of the steel parts are presented for fabrication. Open the BasicModelCombined model. dimensions and marks in the drawings are always correct. 2. If the “host’ member of the drawing is modified or deleted. or make them invisible. For more information. for example. You can. contains information about the quantity of all of the identical members. The drawing. For instance: You may want column drawings to be dimensioned differently from Beam drawings and brace drawings may be different again. then we will create drawings in coups and then we will use the Drawing Wizard There are many different settings available within the program to control how the drawings created will look. Tekla Structures updates the related drawings the next time you perform numbering. however. You can create an unlimited number of these drawing creaüon “profiles’ Create Assembly Drawings of selected parts We will now use the Column with BOM (Bill of Materials) settings to create an assembly drawing of one of the columns. This means that. We will begin by creating these drawings one by one. you can create assembly and single-part drawings from the model. see Help: Drawing> Introduction to drawings> Basics.

BOM a_j E Nate: 2 Title: CO LU FN 5. 7..3. Click OK Go to the Drawing Menu and Select “Assembly Drawing” Open the Drawing List and then open the column drawing to view it.0 BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings 7-3 . This sets all the properties to commonly used settings for column assembly drawings. [ Assembly drawing properties [ Save Load 1 Cokjnnyth. Go to the Properties Menu and Select Assembly Drawing Select Column with BOM from the drop down list and click Load. 4. ‘6-J Copyright © 2007 Teds Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. 6.

Select the Plate with BOM as shown below and click Load. I.a Select any other item in the model. t EL:---i 8. Make sure you have ‘Objects in Components” selected Highlight the column base plate in the model. 1ii. A beam for example and run the drawing by following the same process. 4.e -a OSIE - CCLUISN - 02 I nL_DFVATERAI. lç b — F*-N. then OK Single-part drawing properties Save IL Load ] PLATE PIate_wth_DOM Save a Plate_with_ROM ENane: E TJe 3. 7-4 TEKLA STRUCTURES 130 BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings Copyright @ 2007 Tekla Corrstion .. Create Single Part Drawings We can also break out the individual parts of these assemblies and create individual drawings of these items. Set up properties for plates by going to the Properties Menu then selecting Single Part Drawings r 2.

1 a ‘..aLLsaacD ODAM DtATE Ed L3J 6.. FA6 NAME I 8P2 7. — at r. c— o4/S/O7 OO2LI27 4fl5/2X7 Maad Pa. Upeds D. Of course. Lad E — —St... . it wouldn’t make any sense to select each individual item and mn each drawing one at a time. Double click on the item on the drawing list to open the drawing.J.. When you open the drawing list.. • ha’. notice that the drawing type is now “W’ instead of “A’ denoting that this is a single part drawing. We can thither automate this process by selecting groups of TERLA STRUCTURES 13..r w.‘ [DI) a’— “I A C VS P lLn IPZ .5.. t’2r 1r1119r [P1/2W [‘9ir.0 BASIc TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings Copynght © 2007 TekEa corporaor 7-5 .’.. Click the Drawing Menu then Single Part Drawing. £.

For example. Then switch to Beam Properties and run all the Beams drawings at the same time. This restricts selection of items in the model by any property.kE1U ifl * p - Now drag a box over the entire mode] and notice that only the beams will be highlighted. we set the Column Drawing properties then run all the column drawings at once. E eam_Fiter 2. only items that are named BEAM will be selected when we drag our mouse over the entire model. This avoids selecting any unnecessary objects when you drag your mouse over the entire model. 7.items. k 4.0 BAC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings CopyrigMD2007 TeIdaCorpora . Create all the beam drawings Now we will use the selection filters to group similar items. For example. Set the Properties > Assembly Drawing to Beam with BOM’ Single-part drawing proper-ties fl saJI Nase Til: Load BEN-I j Geam_wititSOM - V Ii Save as Beam_wh_60M 3. ( 7-6 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. .3 Creating Drawings from Groups of Similar Members I. Uncheck all the selection switches except Parts and Objects in Components. if we select the Beam Filter front the drop down matu.

. in//lOU..7 04/257221/a? 04/500/7 54/26/20/7 04/26/20/? 04/26/2022 /0260027 Ut Ct)tAflt.14? 10.1.7 . Now run the assembly drawings.19 0-?9 0 II 6SI jill •2SJ RI lOAM 61PJ4 aLMA IEAM 11AM BEAM 6/AM 6/004 SEw. O) /fl /fl /a05 i0.tO 210101//MA 20/01///al 00/25/2105 0/05/010 5/00/05 n//10 0//03/ 510//n — — SIB Iflfl. no. [!1 1 L 211. ri fl•l? 101.11 Assom* dmww’g ?.710—lri2. Si’*-p& ThA Qd-W LJ 3 6. 0-4210/. 101OWU.2z±_l OZ rrrj -- 01•U 10-14290/.. I ekla Structures - C:\1 eklaStrucLv nMocIels\V1 3.wr Notice that all beam drawings will now be created.wrp.10 tIll A A A A A A A A A A A A A A & A A Il ea V IBO — iI - Lt.1auW1ThUU 10-14296.WU IclAIlt_ 0. Create all the column drawings Now do the same for all the columns. 1 I—— — Ow — BVIV2C 2141111)IC 214fl110 sA/2Aj1t2 si/flAIr 54/fl/22117 SOAr/all 2405)22107 24/10/267 24/20)21. In/SIt In/2It Iro.1.1/ 20.1r.5.O\BasicModelCornbined Parts File Edit View Points Loads Analysis Detailing nrawing Properees Sebip Tools Inquire i W Ufl@7 DE Wizard..11. Set the Column with BOM properties Copyrht @2007 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. rjiirj 6 S IEEi r111 MI 06 1. 1.0 Ill/a Bill 101/ 11.0 SASEC TRI{NING Assembly and Single Part Drawings 7. SCAM SCAM B/AM 01404 — FoA I JE --..

&Thç Cwsl r7dvwtmer dr.rn I 9’ 7-8 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. E_ E Click Load then OK Select the Column Filter in the model. Drag a box over the entire model .Save ilL Load j m_titBCM :.:. Run the assembly drawings for those Tekla Structures Fh Edt - 1:1 pklncIu Parts cliii esMoitelsWl 3_DBasicMoulelCc. Notice that only the columns are highlighted.i.0 BASIC TRINJN$ Assembly and Single Part Drawings Copyright @2007 Tekla Corporation . 6.Q Ctcl+W I .inIsinei1 Detafriq Drathig ye.:1i 0 5.IN 42.: ‘ct. E:c]umnl her 4. r 1 Name: ETIe CCLU. 3.ts Loads n&ysS Proper Setup Took inqire Jw U?’ Th:Thu Qd-L Ør c) ‘I Lli11v P - 44 €tu/ard Sec*pad &avS.

o]i c4!Afl: o4?1s?JO? oulwaAi H. and etc. It sets the Beam drawing properties and the Beam Select filter. finds all the columns in the model. Drawing wizards cannot be used to create General Arrangement (GA) drawings or cast unit (CU) drawings of concrete structures. The wizard simply automates the process we have just covered in a step-by-step fashion. if the drawing already exists and there have been no changes in the model. drawing wizards automatically perform the following steps: 1.a4 W fl uwm s1a’ aJIWAOD) AIm 00. ‘Th ‘ “ z Users can repeat the process for other items such as braces. To tbrce recreation of drawings. 024. C’.090 0101. 4. angles etc. 04151111? 04/1/157 14/20.A.. select the parts from which to create drawings Create drawings. I — Remember that drawings are never recreated by the program. For this reason. 3.. Tekla has included a wizard to do all this work for you. users must delete the existing drawing.4.. A t 21’?? A.d 11019JYD’ W2V217 ei.30’ 0. Then it finds all the beams in the model and runs the drawings. Then it sets the Column properties and the Column filter. A 0)14) R1’)9• A 11141 At 513.113000.11 inn”.O F .11 rn-Ar A £010 £127 A 7UJ A C4 fl/fl. hips.n.11/1101 I0/Th1/XIZ 5111/n fl/t00O O4t) 011W/fl fl ll/0 00.0 BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings 7-9 . F ‘11 n’?ltA11 9 Ifl)TTO A 07] irTI?? 0)1 A 0 rAil 1111191.4 Creating All Drawings Automatically You wilt notice that it takes some time to either select each item individually or in groups and set up each item’s drawing properties and there is also the chance that you may miss something important. and runs those drawings. assembly) Select the predetined drawing properties to be used With the given select filter. A 10111 If??’?) A [0130 01/211. 7.A4 Ag.rir. The process is repeate d again and again for braces. purl ins.1144 OIL/MN tL)/4h 0110444 COLUMN COLuMN 334/lI F RAW? [iI CID (ZiLD jj .‘1 -LFiEJ Lø F__Up4A —• Cb.A STRUCTURES 13.1117 1/101110 CA10J 04)00/AS? 04/117217 1/207307 04710/000 04/1011327 IAI%/1[i)7 rATIO F nn. For more information on drawing wizards. A 10. If it doesn’t find selling a for something in the model it will still run the drawing with the ‘standard’ settings and will warn you with a message in the title column of the drawing list. Functionality of drawing wizards For each member type in the model. Copyright @2007 TokIa Corporation TEKI. channels. 2.fln1Iu 5 ‘rirIt. channels. AI 1094 0044 0034 &1A4 rrj ‘IA’ RAIO WMA 11L0404 WLOAA 0. see: Help: Drawing> Getting started with drawings wizards > Creating drawings> Using drawing > Help: Drawing> Getting started with drawings> Drawing reference FiIt>Wizard. 00/51/lOX IS/n/loll H..?? 71r21r w 101. rafters. Define the drawing type to be created (single.

nr th rOOR g5prN) USWizadHK usW&AS USWizard_Single_Pa. S. It may take a few moments to complete depending on how’ many drawings we created already. Sort the drawing list by name and search for any items that have the title ‘NO ASSOCJATED DRAWING SETTING USED BY WIZARD’ 7-10 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13._Fart_DravAigs_with_B0M-A I hf [‘tti. e t.0 BASIC TINlNG CcpyThl @2007 ToOls Corporation Assembly and Single Part Drawings . 2. / V A By creating wizards that match the select filters and drawing properties in the project you can automatically create all single and assembly drawings of the parts using suitable predefined properties. or just from the selected parts..When you apply a wizard. @7 1. Preconditions of using a drawing wizard: • • • • • Numbering of the model must be up to date The appropriate wizard file must exist The saved drawing properties listed in the wizard file must exist The saved select filters listed in the wizard file must exist Model members which will be selected by the select filter must exist For this part of the exercise we will use the wizard to create the remaining drawings in the model that have not been created already.&S 3. [0l our. Select Drawing> Wizard. from the menu or click on the Wizard icon on the Standard toolbar to open the Wizard dialog box. Click the Create from MI bunon. you can choose whether the wizard creates drawings from all parts of the model.Is USWizard_S ingle_Parle-All b Show Edit Cancel - - [Cieate horn a4 2eale horn selected Sv€. 4..ced • Wizards tab. Select Assembly Drawings with BOM on the Wizard Wads Adva.

r.. Highlight these items in the list and click the ‘Select Parts’ button to show them in the model. You can then analyze and recreate these drawings manually with the drawing settings of your choice or the wizard can be modified so that these items are included in the future.). mnA A IFII?)t A OL’ASnOy flUnAOX nAn A 2 Iii l2 II IEAII Anexo. You can view the next drawing on the list by clicking Next or using the shortcut Clii + Page Down 6. It is advisable to create all the single and assembly drawings with the wizard. çr ‘I. 1’ / r U IAA’A4 w33 Using the procedure outlined above.___ ———U-- — I-- in I.2. etc. cop1ighI © 2007 TeNs Corporaliin TEKLASTRUCTURES 130 BASl TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings 7-11 . braces.lA’IL&AA A IAAI EI2 A CAl •I A A #41 I____ LJ 5. you could create single-part drawings from any other selected steel parts in the model (columns. tan A IAA ILIOT lA. You can also open a few drawings and inspect or check them.r. angles. Click OK in the dialog box to stop creating the drawings. Tekla Structures displays a Cancel dialog boK during the creation of drawings.

Views n 3. polygons.ng size scaiel l2J PIOlectiori type I Third angie Yes Yes Yes LSPWe V V El Align section views with main v. j. main view: El Ertpand shortened parts to lii: El lró4e s!e. text. and circles are not yet associative. Layout. Single Part Details can assume the attributes of the current thawing or can be set with their own attributes in order to improve how the drawing looks automatically. El I View. the rectangular part mark frame. some manually created drawing objects such as lines. In this example we will set the single part views to have the USPlate attributes. We will now edit one HSS BRACE drawing manually to include the same editing that we defined for the vertical brace_V drawing properties (the bolt distance dimensions. I.iycnit properties Load - r*. lines. graphics and marks) in Tekla Structures drawings. I.p&lv V El Sirpaet at’tijtes: OK ii F Get I[wfrl[ c 7-12 IEKLA STRUCTURES 13. Assembly drawing properties Save J Load HSSBRd.CE BraceHSS wE’ 8DM rsave as 8raceHSSjà8OM 1 2Name.e.7. symbols.ew El Align end views wE. Assembly Save Dra*. El L__Section_view Eli Click the Layout button Now select the Other’ tab and change the include Single parts’ option to Yes. However. 2.0 BASIC TFNING Assembly and Single Part Drawings copyright ts2TtI Tekia Corporation . dimensions. and single part views). delete and edit drawing objects (i. 4. Open the first HSS BRACE drawing in the drawing list Double-click in open space on the drawing to open the Drawing Properties dialog box. r A Include Single Part Views (Entire Drawing Level) Most drawing objects (both automatically and manually created) are associative and automatically update if the model changes.5 Edit Drawings Manually It is easy to manually add.

Notice that the single plates are detailed out separately like a more traditional hand drawn drawing. In the view properties dialog box.0 BASIC TIlJrNG Assembly and Single Part Drawings 7-13 . change the scale as shown below copfpgbt © 2007 Tekia Corporatiri TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.5. - I -J ‘I I ‘. -EEEE 1 * EEEhti cC F 2 VERI1CAL 1-155 SPACES D4 - BILL OF MATERIAL F I: Change the Sc. Double Click it 0 p19 0- S S I p19 AA 0 8.ae of the Section Views (View Level) - - . 6.-. Select the Section A-A view border.- 7. Click Modify Once the drawing refreshes it may look something like shown below..

. [ Reinfo. Click on the Create Y dimension icon 12. Weld. J 1 j 0 0 2 2 I_Conneden mark. 4 Others Surtace treatment.fo.. Fdler. Part..0 BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings Ccpyiight 2007 Tolda Cowora6. Add bolt distance dimensions (Individual object level) Click Modify 4rk’ IL Mo&y ilL setj[W/rJ[ Carrel 10... [5iaceeatn rnak. [ Rek. Reference objects..r 23..cement. 2 [bc pal hiteti OK 9... Pick the corners of the plate to be dimensioned 13.. 0 0 E 0 I Bod mask. Repeat for Section B-B II.. past... E 7-14 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.... EL_______ L Boll.ound (in •0.L Objects EL O Pastna&.cermnt masks.n ._J 1 Neltc: past mask.0 00 3D views] 0 Reflected view: 2 Size Q Fit pasts 0 Dehne as distances x run No v -231128 -33/128 43/128 Xmas..] Neighbo.Save Attributes 1 View Load Attributes 2 Label stenda v ( Save racehSSy4b_B r Sce Rotation a.. Move the cursor to where you want the dimension to appear and click the middle mouse button. El_______ El Grid.128 V ml”: Depth down: N’ max: 33/128 Depth up: 43/128 2 View extension for neighbor parts: Marks 0” .

- - 2 A ‘I.) ktaEIC’ Emn3 4. Double-click one of the part marks to open the Part mark properties dialog box. Select all the part marks in the drawing. On the General tab.oiWo TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. Click Modi.0 BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings 7-15 . (You can use the Select part mark select switch. ‘ The associative symbols indicate which drawing objects are associated to the model and will be updated if the model is changed Click SHIFT+A in the keyboard to display/hide the associative symbo ls V Change the frame of part marks (Individual object level) 3. To move a dimension: select it and drag it to the desired position Add the dimension to the other end in the same way. change the Frame around mark to rectang ular and tick only this check box. 2.•1 N - - . I. D 15 B-B Copyright @2007 Tekla Caj.

such as exfta marks or dimensions).6 Alterations We will now modi& our model by changing the size of the plate in all gusset plate connections. Now. The difference is that part of this brace drawing editing was done manually. you should first check if the result can be achieved by changing the drawing properties. we could repeat the manual editing to them one by one. However. 7. Whenever you have manually edited the drawing it is recommended to select Disable automatic updating (Freeze). this one brace drawing has roughly the same editing as all the other brace drawings. Updating will: • Switch the flag on a frozen drawing to This indicates that the drawing has been updated (also manual editing. Whenever there is a need to edit the drawings. Close the drawing. changing the drawing properties is a better solution because this method is more automatic and much quicker. you will need to run numbering and update them. Tekla Structures prompts you to save the drawing.Now all the part marks in the drawing have rectangular frames. As long as you can manage to create complete drawings by using predefined drawing properties the creation and updating off the drawings will he more automatic. We will study how updating affects the edited drawings. click the check box to Freeze the drawing and click Yes in the confirmation dialog box. Do you want to keep he changes to he drawing? Disable automalic updating lFieezel Yes_iii No Cancel A When you close a drawing that has been changed. a • • In order to automate the creation of drawings as much as possible. Changes in the model will result in some of the drawings no longer being up-todate. A snowflake icon ‘‘ appears in the drawing list to show that this drawing is frozen. If we wanted the rest of the brace drawings to have the same editing. This way you ‘will systematically freeze edited drawings and only them. To be able to open the drawings. 5. you should try finding adequate predefined drawing properties to create (he drawings with instead of editing them manually.0 BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings Copyrighl © 2007 Teds Corration . / — Remember you can modifi all the settings in a drawing at the drawing properties or view properties level. 0 7-16 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.

edit the extra width of the knife plate as shown below. texts etc. Change the model Change gusset plate bolt spacing 1. copyTigli @2001 TeI<la Co. with the originally used drawing properties. Select the connection where the braces cross the column in the model — Shown below 2.• Regenerate any drawings with an flag that are unfrozen. The updating deletes all the manual editing (added dimensions. Double-click on the connection cone to open the connection properties for editing. On the Picture tab page.0 BASIc TRAINiNG Aesembly and Single Part Drawings 7-17 . 3.dad Lore olhei types 4.ra1ion TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. Sa’ Load - e. Check that Ignore other types is selected in the connection dialog box. Update the quantities on a drawing with an • ! flag.).

25)20]? o4//2637 r(txfl(E 1E/29Y. Run numbering I. 1. 3.2S/27 34. Help: Drawing> Getting started with drawings> Drawing status flags tsto. Select Tools> Numbering> Modified. ir)2io A A 4 IDE HSS BR4 HSS BRACE Q Update unedited brace drawings I.. Due to the integration between drawings and the model a drawing that is not up-to-date cannot be opened. It is not possible to open earlier revisions of the drawings. 3. The unedited brace drawings were created with only the predefined drawing attributes. Click Modify. To get non up to date drawings listed press Display> Invert button after Filler> Up to date. Select the edited HSS BRACE drawing from the list. Update edited brace drawing / — You can filter up-to-date drawings with Filter> Up to date button. I 7-18 TEKLA STRUCTUREs 13.. To update drawings: Select all the HSS BRACE drawings from the list. They will be complete right after updating.c Psrrdcd 94. Update the Drawings Once the numbering is carried out. To be able to open the drawings you need to run numbering and update them. the flags in the Drawing list show all those affected drawings that need to be updated. Click Update.0 BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings copyright © 2007 Tekla corporation . Open the drawing and notice that the dimensions that we added were automatically updated because the associative symbols were located on the comers of the knife plate. Now the model has changed and some of the drawings are no longer up to date.5. Click Update. Open the unedited drawing to see that it is ok I We will next update the manually edited brace thawing. 2. since they are simply recreated using their own attributes. 2.

This allows user to copy the dimension and editing from one item onto a similar item. These are for your information only will not print on the drawings. You can also remove all the magenta clouds by running the remove clouds macro from the Tools> Macros merni. ‘I. Remember to add a revision to drawings that have been updated or changed after you have released drawings for the contract. Further information on this is available in the help flies or on the Tekla Extranet Copyright © 2007 TakIa Corporntian TEKLAS1RUCTURES 130 BAsrc T[NlNG Assembly and Single Pad Drawings 7-19 . You can add clouds manually using the Draw cloud tool. V Another way to avoid repetitive editing is to use cloning for similar items.qt5 (N/S = =-= 4. 5. There will also be magenta clouds shown around all the changes that were made.

“I 7-20 TERLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Past Drawings CopyTigI2O7TedaCajioron .

0 Basic Training 29 October 2007 Copyright © 2007 Tekla Corporation .e*e TEKLA General Arrangement Drawings Tekia Structures 13.

P n .

0 BASIC TRAINING General Anangement Drawings 8—Ui .1 2 3 S 12 12 14 16 17 17 8.3 Copyright@2001 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.2 8.1 Creating General Arrangement Drawings Create an Anchor Bolt Plan Create General Arrangement Drawing Modifying GA Drawings Modify drawing properties Modify view properties Modify object properties Drawing Objects Create Drawing Objects .Contents 8 General Arrangement Drawings 8.

DBASICTR4NjNG CopyrIgI4ø2OO7TddaCaraIjcn U.: General Arrangement Drawings . p 8-iv TEKLASTRUCTURES 13.r If.

We will also introduce the various levels of editing the drawings and study the drawing objects and layout We will learn how to: • • • Make 3D Views. We will first create an example drawing from the BasicModelCombined model (see the picture below presenting the steel frame). Elevations and Sections Use Filters Add drawing objects CopSitl 2007 Tdda Corporaan TEKLA STRUCTuRES 13. Plans.i:wøir r General Arrangement Drawings In this lesson We will introduce the creation of general arrangement drawings in Tekla Structures.0 BASIC TRAINING 8-1 General Arrangement Drawings .

or update numbering to create or open general arrangement drawings. The views must exist but they do not necessarily have to be open. which can include the whole model or any part of it. In the example below. / — You do not need to number the model. such as the viewing angle. check that the plan views are really 2D views. and rotate the rendered 3D views the way you want them to be shown in the drawing. For example. You can create general arrangement drawings from one or several named model view(s) with the following options: • • • Create one drawing for each selected view Add all selected views to one drawing Create an empty thawing You can create an empty drawing and add named model views to the thawing in the Drawing Editor. we will create a general arrangement drawing from BasicModelcombined by including several named model views in the drawing. foundation and other plans.1 Creating General Arrangement Drawings of the r We will now innduce general arrangement (GA) drawings and create an example drawing BasicModelCombined model. check and modi& the appearance of model views in the Model Editor before creating GA drawings. as well as details from views in the model. / — You cannot modii the appearance. I 8—2 TEKLA STRUCTURES 130 BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings Copyright @2007 Tekla corporation . Tekla Structures can be used to create general arrangement (GA) drawings which are also known as Erection plans or E-Sheets. With the GA drawings you can create erection. GA drawings can contain several views.8. of model views in the Drawing Editor. Therefore.

we will handle this now. 2. Go to Drawing> General Arrangement Drawing Copyright © 2007 Tekla corporaton TEKLASTRucTIJRES 130 BASIc TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings 8-3 . Open the Pian View at the base level Select and move views between the lists to control visibility To select multiple views.N AT Vistle views: CM DN ON ON PIZ C 3flD D ID C-RID 0” —1 In. — 3d flT it [ Delete 4 IOKJ You don’t need to have the view open in order to make the General Arrangement Drawing but it does let you check that the result will be close to what you are expecting. hold down ctrl -key while selecting Named views: EMVMIDtT ZL!WJIDtT ZL!tYAIIZN LZVATION PLAN AT EL tLAN AT PLAN AT PL.Create an Anchor Bolt Plan The anchor bolt plan would typically bbe created as soon as the bases were modelled in order to speed the construction process along but as we are just starting to learn about creating drawings in Tekla Structures. To create an Anchor Plan: I.

i Create general arrangement drawing
ELIVAI Icti ELEVATION ELEVATION ELEVATION ELEVATION ELEVATION ELEVATION

ow n:•
ON ON ON ON ON ON OID UD flED oai: flID fiT)

7—i

a
S C E F

r

3 Sf1?

1 ‘VtT7ON

Ax 1L
LAN PLAN PLAN LMT Al Al AT Al

0,’—i EL 12—7”i/2 EL. 23—C’ EL. 24’-T’ EL. 44-0’

0 ptioris All selected views to one drawkg % jrorawrng procertieJ Open drawin3

7
3.

Create

Cancel

Choose Anchor Plan wloetaüs and click Load General arrangement drawing properties
Save

l

]
A&I

Load

AnchorPlan_w-Details

-.

t

IL

Save as

J

AnchorPlarr_w-Details

FiNarne: Title:

ANCHUR BOLT PLAN You can select the scale of the drawing before creation. Click an the View... button and load the desired scale.
-—

F

4.

Click OK

5.

Now check the Open Drawing box and click Create

z

:

1

1

:

/

F

-,

-,

j

/

-=.

8-4

TEKLASTRuCTIJRES 130 BASIC TRAINING General Arrangerncnt Drawings

Copyright® 2007 Tekla Corporalion

________

Your output may differ from what is shown above depending on how the view looked on the model when you created the drawing. Remember you can alter the drawing output automatically by adjusting the scale or other parameters to get exactly what you want to see.

Create a Single View GA Drawing
1. Open the Plan at 24U Level View

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

E

D

g :4’

2.

Go to the Drawing menu and select General Arrangement Drawing

1

Create general arrangement drawing
Views

3.

Highlight the Plan at El. 24 -0’

EL!VAIIQN ZN 2A12 2 EIZVAIIDU ON ID Z ELEVAIION ON ID F PHASE t STAn ET5VAITDN LAN AT EL 0’ L?JI Al !L. o—i PLAN Al 1 12—71/2 rZLrN LL.—a.,.4-3-n.Jk.-_,

I

a; ci :a. ii’
PLAN PLAN PLAN ThUS

--

I

Al EL 60-10” A EL. 65-8” Al EL. E€’-S” tLAN ON OOF BRACIU

I

Oions All sected views to or drawing

U

Open drawing

HI

Drawig pro

Ij

L Create J

[__Cancel

Copyright © 2007 Tokra Corporation

TEKIA STRuCTURES 13.0 BASIC TkINrNG General Arrangement Drawings

8-5

Co OD

to —ø
10

0. (0

cap,

0

-

Cn 3-

c ni
0 0

aa
r—.
-

C n

a
(0

a

a V
½

2 3 a 3
— 0

II (0

-l

=

1

U,

•(

C, CD

Sm

a 3 a
-v
0 Dc

a

n
-C C,

a cm
CD
I’,

ci irn NNN NN
0, Ln

CD
0 (—I

B
— —

U
g
a
-u m
(p (P
3 a

a
C 3 3

C,

z
C) CD
-CI

-o
0

z

0

a’

0 -l ‘-3

> •a ‘C

St a a

a C,
0
:3

r
(0 3 a’

r 0 a
0.
0

a
0
a

3

-

(p

(P

r •
0

F’, -D

0

r

C

a
0
a

0; 3

I
C

0

co•
3

a r a

0

I

a

‘C

ii

a z o a, a a a a
a

a aSt a

Ha Ea
C,

a

‘a

o
N
Il

1*il
H I—il
I a ‘I

NN
I. I’9 DIIzI StIl
II I

NN
Ia. 1 Z

N is -Iis-i
i

-4

1

C-,

-g

n

3I-o I RI
III

i is-I

I-I IS-I

Ia 1< a

1(0

0,
3

zJLJH

13

131

C,

7.

Click OK then OK again at the General Arrangement Dialog Box Check the Open Drawing Box and click Create

8.

Open&ag

k

cxeate

Create a Multiple View GA Drawing
We will now repeat almost exactly the same process in order to make more erection plans and details. To create a GA drawing that contains selected views, e.g. 3d, GRID 3 and GRID A, from BasicModelCombined:

C

I.

Run numbering Tools> Numbering

>

Full to make sw-e your part marks are up to date.
TEKLASWUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement DrawIngs

Copyright © 2007 Tokla Corporation

8-7

2. 3.

SeLect Drawing

>

General arrangement drawing... from the menu. Create general arrangement drawing Views a
I 2 3 4 !L!VATIOtTDNIO 3 ELEVATION ON QID ELEVATION ON saio 7 £LEl/ATION UN GRID A fl!VarIDNONtID
ZLZVATID)T ON 2L1D C ZLZVATIDN ON LID 0

Select the 3d, GRID 4
and GRID A views in

the Create general arrangement drawing diaiog box. Then select the option All selected views to one drawing.

ELfl’ATICN ON ;aID EIEVTIOt OH Zfl ELE’’ATTOtI ON ID flEVATION ON GRID

!LZVAJ lot ctt;ato EL!]A1ION Ct GaID F

Opliors AU selected ews to or thawing v Open drawing Create

I[Dra operties...

[

Cancel

‘I,

V
Define drawing properties

You can select multiple views (or toggle the selection) in the dialog box above by holding down the Ctrl key and picking each view separately. GA drawing views are automatically labeled with the current view name. With the One drawing per view option you can select all the plan views in the dialog box, and create separate drawings with predefined drawing properties all at once.

To define the properties of the GA drawing:
Click the Drawing properties... button to open the General arrangement drawing properties dialog box.

2. 3.

Select standard settings from the option mlu and click Load. Give the drawing a distinctive name in the Name field, e.g. STEEL FRAME ELEVATIONS

8•8

TEKLA STRUCTURES 1300ASIC TRAINING General Anangementi Drawings

Copyright® 2007 Tekla corprnatior

General arrangement drawing pFoperties ISae

J

l_d

standard

V

Save as

standard

9 Name: 9TiUe:

IsTEFME 1

Views Layout..
Dimensions

,j oil
9 0 9 0 I 9[

View.

ii

E

I

Detail view

Dimension
Marks

DnensiotJj

9
9 Dbects

j Surface treatment mark,,, j
Part mark...

Soil mark...

Connection mark.

9 0 0 9

Neighbor part mark.,,
[Jorcement

marks...

0 0
Others

Pa’t.
Surtace treatnrt..
erence

Rot..

eighr part. R&docanert..

We Grid...

obiectsj

9 9
K

Pro4ecbcqi... [ser-deIioedtribtes...

oil
I
i..i!I.irIy

F1iet,.

0 lNe4Ptt1...

j

Get

J UirJ [

Cancel

4. 5.

ClicIc the View... button to open the General -view properties dialog box. On the Attributes tab, change the drawing scale to something suitable and click OK to apply the scale and close the dialog box.

CopflMC 2007 T&a Cerporaan

TEKLA S1RUCI1JRES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings

8-9

_

General
Save Attributes Scale:

-

view properties Load Scei Label
V

[

Saveas

it

I

e

Shortening

1 Anchor boll plan [i 1 20.OOQO 0” No No v
V
V

View extension for neighbor parts: EReflected view Show openirshecess symbol Datum poirl foi elevations: Datum level:

Specthed 0’
IIJr,
i

OK
6.

[

Apply

lW/rh

Cancel

3

Now click the Filter button and go to the Parts tab and complete the dialog as shown below. General -filter properties
Save

H

Load

v

[

saveasi’

Dbjects (other than component obiectsl
Coruiect’n oects

Nutnbets Filter by Pact

Parts

Ccwnporients Raci-j bats Not Filter
string

Usec attributes.

lEName
UClass

LI Profile
LIMatesis

LI Finish
Secondaty / Mai’ pads

E LI LI LI LI

NUTWASHEHANCH0RJ0ISTSLABU

II

Seccndaty

OK
7. 8.

jJ

Apply

]

I

SeL]

lw/ri

Cancel

Click OK In the General arrangement drawing properties dialog box save the selected drawing properties with a unique file manse, e.g. steelframe, by typing the file name and then clicking the Save as button.

8-10

IEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings

CopyrigFct 2007 Tekla corporation

1I

General drrangement drawing properties Save

J

Load__1 SteeL Frame

‘IHs

J

SteeL Frame

A
9.

Drawing property tiles steeltrame gd and steelframe.gd.more are created .ABasicModelCombinedattñbutes folder. Name Steel_Frame.gd SteeF_Frane.;d more

in

the

Click OK to apply the selected GA drawing settings and to close the General arrangement drawing properties dialog box.

For more information on drawing properties, see Help: Drawing> Drawing properties. Create and open the GA drawing To create and open the GA drawing: I. Select the Open drawing checkbox in the Create general arrangement drawing dialog box to have Tekia Structures automatically open the drawing.
Options All selected vievs to one drawing v j[brawinc properties.

If?ippen drawing LDee h..
2, 3. Click Create.

LE

Check that the created GA drawing is as shown below.

Copyright © 2007 Tokln Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings

8-11

button to open the General part properties dialog box. 5.. Open the drawing and press the ‘B’ key to toggle the drawing between all black lines and colored lines Select Properties> Drawing. - Select the Appearance tab. 0 8-12 TEKtA STRUCTURES 13. e. 8. from the menu.. After that open the Create general arrangement drawing dialog box to create the GA drawing with the selected views. e. Change the Color of Visible lines..g. you have to modify the view properties afterwards in the Drawing Editor.2 Modifying GA Drawings You can edit drawings in the Drawing Editor on three levels: • • • Drawing properties View properties Object properties For more information about the drawing properties and different drawing levels.0 BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings Copyright © 2007 Teicia Corporaton . on the menu or double-click on the drawing to open the General arrangement drawing properties dialog box. Check and see that the checkbox is marked with a tick. in the Drawing Editor: - I.. 4. / — You can first define the GA drawing properties by selecting Properties > General arrangement drawing.g.. to green.. If some views need different properties.All of the views in the GA drawing will be created according to the same GA drawing properties you applied. 3. Click the Part. you can change the drawing properties which affect all of the objects in the drawing. and then load and apply the desired properties. see the following help files: Help: Drawing> Entroduction to drawings> Three levels of editing drawings Help: Drawing> Drawing properties Modify drawing properties At the highest level. the color of parts. Modify parts color on drawing level To change the GA drawing properties. 2.

If you had made more than one drawing you can simu]taneously change the drawing properties. . - Oed. flelerence oble_?j El El BoiL Weld.0 BASIC TJNING General Arrangement Drawings 8-13 . 7. of more than one GA drawing: I.1:! 1 L_L Vise tnt. E ‘ E E I I [ Pan.. •1 Hidden line. Alt+LI Revrsion. grid visibility. or press Alt+Enter as shortcut tn open the General arrangement drawing properties dialog box. J elandard B . e. 2... Select Properties.aI Save - part properties Load > Savea.. JLMfl 1ETr1L c 1 Click Modify and OK. SurFace trealment. 4.._.. Right-click to open the pop-up menu. Center line E Color V i Reference h’ies El Color El Type InK 6.g. 3. Click the On/Off button to clear the checkboxes.Gr...J Srid II 6.. E E [ Neighbor parr Lf&nborcenlent. Ljser’defined atb’ibr.A STRUCTURES 13. IRcolc Type.. Change the grid visibility to Not visible. buttoc to open the General grid properties dialog box. Open the drawing list in the Model Editor. Copyright © 20W Tekla Corporation TEKI. Select two GA drawings in the drawing list by holding down the CM key.. 5. Change grid visibility of many GA drawings LZZZ v.. T9pe Mark ——— Name El Open Title 1 _QIIa. Click the Odd.oe....jtes.iwI Title C’4O Alt’+€nter 0 [2] Properbes.

2. 3/16 Anal [LJ[ j[JfrjrI[ 8. 4. 5. Double-cltck on the border around the 3D VIEW drawing view to open the View properties dialog box. Check that the checkbox is marked with a tick. Open the modified drawings one at a time to check that the changes were can’ied out correctly. 9.Lii! General - grid properties PCsIaed v NcRble Save as (5i1 v Text pacing • •. Turn the Hidden lines option back on. Modify properties of selected view To hide the dashed hidden lines of parts in the 3D view of the G [I] drawing: 1.. Show hidden lines of parts 8-14 TEKLA STRUcTURES 13. 10. 3. c Click Modify and OK Click OK to close the General arrangement drawing properties dialog box. button to open the View part properties dialog box. • • • • -1)2 Grid line Text Hetcjhl... Whenever possible. Click the Part. where you modil3’ the selected drawing’s view. Select the Content tab. These modifications also remain when the drawing is recreated due to a model change.0 BASIC TR[NING General Arrangement Drawings Copyright 02007 Tekla corporation . you should modi’ drawings by changing the drawing properties. Modify view properties The second level is to edit the view level. Click the On/Off button to clear the checkhoxes.

and add Profile to the list. Click the Part mark. lorcemanl marks.. Change part mark content 7.t Pal pmit’a Protile Maiwial Name Class Finish Sire Length Camber ENrneiism resaik ((s’ls”e)> •aKasdelenenls Owe EI2E Color: V V Face dieci a’ Gsce ol nstatk’o C Cere’<:-cfle &‘a. remove the <<Assembly position>> and the frame around it from the Elements in mark list for the main pafls.9I rltil°n . Vkw part properties ‘ENG. Patmar El I Sustace treatment ii El{ Boltmark E [onnection mark. On the Content tab. El El L Neighbor pail mark. Test r. button to open the View part mark properties dialog box.0 BASIC TRAINING General Arrangemerrt Drawings 8-15 .r. Click Modify and OK Copyright © 2007 Tekla Corporatror TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.es...: Beam Plate Polygon El El C El El El o-c/cit Main part Sec pa: El El LIE CE AddthonM maiks Li Orserpialion . E o&oft El Inner contoups: Center me Beam Main part Sec pal Plate Polygon El Relerence Hp.ee Saveas Content Appearance Eel Fill P& lwese El El Sjgrto: &fset 251S4 orJoIl V 22?LI floienhddenb..necimg side mapics {OK El on/oil ]I Apply .nsks: Q Ca.. Ps. 8.. — M’ car vSthIe elem..V5 He9sr Fat 3i32 [s User-detired atlribete 9.conc - . Click Modify and OK.j Modify Jj Get —’ 11 ][fjL Cancel 6...

Modify frame and leader line of a single part mark To change the properties of a single part mark: 1.0 BASIC TINrNG General Arrangement Drawings Copyright © 2007 Tekla Corporation . Double-click on the Elevation on Grid A view border. 4. 2. Modify object properties The third and lowest level is to edit at the object level.The 3D View will now Jock much cleaner. change Part Representation to Outline hhjj Click Apply then Modify The result should lock like this. button On the Content tab. double-click on the part mark of one of the I-JSS profile diagonal braces to open the Part mark properties dialog box. where you change individual objects in the drawing. In the GRID A view.. 3. Select the Part. 8-16 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.. adjust the Part Representation Properties 1. Modify how Items are represented To change how items are represented in a view.

Create Drawing Objects In the G [11 drawing. Create manual dimensions To add manual Y-dimensions to the diagonal bracing connection (on gridline 3) in the GRID A view: I. 1 2. V Click Modify and OK The part mark should now look like the following.DCoIoc Loader line Typt — V V LI knn 3. rectangles. see Help: Drawing > Editing drawings.2.a. and automatically (parts and gridlines). On the General tab. which helps with the selecting of points. poly lines.: Auto vj To enable the tentative snap. clouds. text. Set the snap settings on the Drawings: Snap settings toolbar as shown below. clouds and text. semi-automatically.no around mark - . arcs. DWG/DXF files. For more information. EEl [] Tve standard V standard Caiera 6r& F. circles.0 BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings 8-17 . In addition. There are three ways to add dimensions to GA drawings: manually. N 8.g. marks and dimejsions. symbols.3 Drawing Objects In Tekia Structures. the term drawing object refers to lines. check that the Xsnap is set on in the Setup menu. you may want to include additional drawing objects for temporary and/or revision-related information. we will manually dimension the location of the diagonal bracing connection and add a cloud and a note text to the connection. polygons. change the frame and leader line types as shon below. Copight a 2007 Tekla Corporatror IEKLA STRUCTURES 13. S. e.

0 BASiC TRAINING General Arrangement Orawings igbt 0 cop © 2007 reNa Cor uation 1 . U Click the Create y dimension icon on the Drawings: Dimension toolbar. select the dimension line location and click the middle mouse button. first. 4. to the mid point of the connection created between the four diagonal braces. 6. I 8-18 TERLA STRUCTURES 13. S. and then to the intersection of GRID 3 and GRID 40. Snap. End the command with the middle mouse button.E Xsnap Smeri5eec S D Shift—M pen Drac and drop Middle button 3. right-click and select Combine dimension lines on the pop-up menu. Select both dimensions (by holding down the CtrI key). Snap again to the center point of the connection and then to the intersection of GRID 3 and GRID 44-0. Move the corsor to the left side of GRID 3 to select the location of the dimension line. Select the dimension line and move it to the correct location by dragging with the mouse. The separate dimension lines are now combined to one dimension line. Add / remove dimension point combine dimeniiion lines Remove dimension point Set dimension zero point C You should now have the vertical location of the diagonal brace connection shown in the GRID A view (see the figure below).

Create dimensions using the commands in the Create menu: Create> Dimension> Parts X. 3.. 6. button. — To open the General dimensioning properties dialog box. using the General dimensioning properties dialog box.0 BASIC TRAINING General Anangement Drawings 8-19 . 5.... Copyright 0) 200T TakIa Corporaton TEKLASTRucTURrS 13. in the Properties menu and click the Dimensioning.. Click Setup> GA dimensioning. Select the objects you want to dimension. 4. It contains several dimensioning oplions: • • • The Which points and parts Tekla Smoctures dimensions How the dimensions are combined Whether the reference line or center line of the part is used as a dimension point primary steps are as follows: Open a general arrangement drawing. Set the properties.Semi-automatic dimensions A special dimensioning type is available in Tekla Structures for semi-automatic general arrangement dimensioning. — Automatic dimensions You can automatical]y add dimensions to grids or parts. or Parts XY.. 2. Parts Y. or both.. Click Apply. navigate to General arrangement drawing.

and etc. Click the Snap to any position icon on the Drawings: Snap settings toolbar.e...oo. left.ujil W OIl)F ojwelie.ait hadeeft. 4 4 8-20 1’EKtA STRUCTURES 13.&ne £1 lr& sraL.rei I For a more in depth discussion. ftelc*rç i4cazaaS yenta. maximum number of outside dimensions and the object groups to be dimensioned. right.nse.th.e.ecJ Beat Ere tzedlo n. below. cle&l S Gad hr.Cl &raran.aI d.nE H L Dinem.eeni Celhbineioo.onr Layoul 13) View I H Detail view - 1 HI D.rtroin 00000.. - Ur.4a.r: Oil Oil V 0 On.aeanro..c de. i.n. i. oloning ‘lollerlirs PCsierdaId Lve J God PatIo LI Orrenoet.ided.d Ls’ as M. lfldi 5 Ouloda dma.t Ge.ieloul.vai lEvelcal Left Annie The pans tab allows you to define the maximum leader line length.al dl alien. 0 rode &r.de pails eel ‘nIcely ci Or’ ‘ 5M. Sled. The grid tab.d J .av Gd II Ea’.zo.rjon: Di. ‘ General dine.n’s Ot. above. Loan J ltaida..ooa..r. dir.ne’. allows you to turn on rn-id ]ine and/or overall dimensions as well as how they are placed. fl I Gad Parl’ Load I _pc_.th postal I__________ I OK J[ cer I[M.d fl ØO..0 BASIC TRAINING General Anangement Drawings Auto v Copyright 02007 Tekla Corporation .. see Help: What’s New > What’s New in Steel Detailing> Faster drawing production > General arrangement drawings > Automatic Dimensioning of general arrangement drawings Create a cloud To add a cloud and a note text to the GRID A view: I..lata.nr 9 Na.enn& IH I Dienanniieg.a..

End the selection with the middle mouse button. Change the text properties and frame as shown below and click Apply and OK. 3. • standaid Appeai&te Text ElTe* HOLD standard Ecoloi: EHe4t i 3)32 Aria! O•cxE 121 Font: E4rgl El Alignmenl: Lelt Arrow 23 - it Fiame El Type: Leader bie: it Type: it ‘I.2.0 BASIC 1RtINING 6-21 General Arrangement Drawings . 2.. Pick points for the cloud position around the diagonal bracing cor.. to open the Text properties dialog box. Select the standard settings from the option menu and click Load.nection on gridline 3. Create a text note for the cloud I. ( ECdm P!acng H El El 5/64 3)128 EJ [OK 1I LFLEM canceij Copyright © 2007 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. Select Properties> Text. Click the Draw cloud icon on the Drawings: Drawing toolbar. 3.

First. r 5.4. Click the Create text with leader line icon in the Drawings: Drawing toolbar. Select File> Close drawing and click Save in the Question dialog box. - aJ 0 - t\c p - yJ ue N O - / 8-22 TERLA STRUCTuRES 13. pick an edge of the cloud as the origin of the leader line and then another point to place the text. The GRID A view should now look like the figure sho below: V l24Af! a V24X5 6.0 BASIC 1R’JNING General Anangement Drawings Copyright © 2007 Tekla Corporation .

‘S TEKLA Multi-Drawings and Multi-Numbering Tekia Structures 13.0 Basic Training 29 October 2007 Copyright © 2007 Tekla Corporation .

.

Contents 9 Multi-Drawings and Multi-Numbering 9.0 BASIC TRAINING Multi.1 Multi-Drawings and Multi-Numbering in General Multi-Drawing properties Options for creating multi-drawings Multi-numbering setup Creating Multi-drawings Create Multi-Drawings Manually Create Multi-Drawings Automatically Updating and Revisions Updating multi-drawings Revision control .3 Copyright @2007 Tekta Corporatimi TEKLASTRUCTURES 13.1 2 4 4 5 6 6 11 13 13 14 9.Drawings and Multi-Numbering 9-ui .2 9.

9-iv TERLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TINING MultiDrawings and MultiNumbering Copyright@27 TeIdaC&pccahion .

0 BASIC TRAINING Multi-Drawings and Multi-Numbering 9-1 . with computers being as fast as they are and printers and copier paper being as inexpensive as they are it is actually quicker and easier to produce details on individual sheets rather than take the extra step and collect these details onto large and cumbersome multi sheets. Multi-Numbering refers to the system of applying marks to items in such a way that the item can be tracked to the multi-sheet it appears upon. Multi-Drawings emulate the more traditional output of the pencil and paper draftsman of long ago when it was more practical to draw many items on one sheet. Detailing time can be saved considerably if multi-sheets are no longer required. Nowadays. Tekla offers countless multi-numbering capabilities so there is sure to be one system that will suit your requirements We will learn about the creation and use of muti-drawings and explain the principles of multi-numbering. Those items may all have something in common or may be completely random. We will learn how to • • • • Create multi drawings manually. controlling which items go on which sheet Create multi drawings automatically by allowing the system to decide placement Customize numbering setups to create simple or complex multi-numbering Handle revision on multi-drawings Copyright © 2007 Tekla Corporalion TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.1 Ufr1 Ti Multi-Drawings and Multi-Numbering In this lesson Multi-Drawings are defined as drawings that contain a number of individual items collected together onto one large sheet. We will also handle the updating of multi-drawings and revision control.

• You want all of the single part drawings of plates with the same thicloiess gathered onto one sheet. When using multi-drawings you can link as many assemblies as will fit on one larger sheet. but others might require less space (B or 17x1 I).1 Multi-Drawings and Multi-Numbering in General Multi-drawings are used to gather assembly and/or single part drawings onto a single sheet. be]ow are some examples: • You want all the assemblies on same size drawing sheet.9. If they are inked with a layout.0 BASIC TRAINING Multi-Drawings and Multi-Numbering Copyright © 2007 Tekla Corporation . each assembly can have its own separate Bill of Material. . Some assemblies might need a larger (D or 24x36) sheet. 9-2 TEXLA STRUCTURES 13.rJ • Assembly or single part drawings can also be linked to a multi-drawing with or without a layout.

?] IC ‘I CE] CS] No.t CSfl*ZDJS ri? N C 121 102 I or II los.C.• If you need to have the sheet number included as part of the assembly and/or part mark..2C]I5 Mod(sd 0]10O1 U&1iOX fl{]1LO[ SLZ..?] IC.4__I Sd. The only way to achieve this is to add the assembly and/or single part drawings to a multi-drawing.clr. L F U Ciwied O9FI9?2t lt/I9/2a)5 119/2B o.Numbming 9-3 .loik ]C]] IC.19. COI0 tUfl 09. l Copysight © 2007 Tokla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.. you can use mu]ti-numbering.15/105 09. COLUMN COLUMN COLUMN COLUMN COLLIflI OLLOYk io I I DonOa A’ I EiirLJ S.205 a3’42W ew42Iy S3/4’zu F3Jr?V fl/Cfl fl/C?? £1/2 le A A A A A A I.0 BASIC TRAINING Multi-Drawings and Multi.i1StOJ CA/IS/ItS C5113/2CCA L/13.

see: Help: Drawing drawing.Dmwings and Multi-Numbering copyright @2007 Tekla Corporation . Just select all the assembly drawings you want to link to multi sheets in the drawings list. 1. To get information on common drawing properties see: - Help: Drawing> Drawing properties> Common drawing properties Options for creating multi-drawings You can link or copy assembly/single part drawing views with or without layout to the multi drawing.0 BASiC TRAINING MuIti. You can create empty mu]ti-drawings and then link or copy assembly or single part drawings interactively. The name field will be shown on the drawing list.g. For more information. where as with link the connection to update information from the original is kept. and Tekla Structures will link as many assembblsingle part drawings to one sheet as will fit and then create another multi-drawing and continue the linking procedure. This option isnt recommended because you cant use specific settings for different types of drawings. It is also possible with one command to create assembly or single part drawings and then multi-drawings from these drawings. 3. 2.Multi-Drawing properties Save__J [ 101 Load standard v [vi] standard lJName Title: Vews Layout Others 1 I El El P Protection Apply I Liser-delined attribules JflJpet JIF/r]I canceiJ Name: can be used to define the content of the drawing. The difference between link and copy is that with copy the connection to original drawing is broken. For multi-numbering the Name: field will correspond as the multi-drawing number and depending on the multi-number setup it will be added to assembly and part or 1 mark e. > Getting Started With Drawings > Drawing Reference> Multi- 9-4 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. This is an easy way of creating gather sheets. This option is a little bit laborious but you can optimize the use of paper. Name: 101 Assembly mark 10131. You can create multi-drawings automatically from selected assembly or single part drawings.

bid. 0101. palOl. lOlc.101. — • Further information is available in the help files. IO1BI. / . 101a3. E.. lOlal. 5C101. 10183. 15101.g. 101st. biB. aclOl. OCIO1. 101a2. lOlpl.Multi-numbering setup Setting up any type of multi-numbering involves making changes to the batch files. lOla. 23101. Always make a copy of any batch file before changing any setting. The batch files contain most of the default settings in Tekia Structures and users can potentially cause considerable problems by editing these files. 10101. 21101. bO:pb.. 3ab0. IO1EC. LOLA. BB101. 38101. lelOl. 10W. 2e0. idol. P101. assemblies. blOl. iCipa. Multi-numbers are assigned according to the following batch file settings. on the extranet and by attending an advanced training course. 101A. 2 lOlp 2. IOlaa. Help: System > Files and Folders> Startup batch file Copyiight @2007 Tekls Corporalion TEKLA STRUCTUREs 13. The following lines in the batch file affect numbering: rem rem rem rem rem rem rem rem rem rem rem rem rem rem set set set set set set set set set set set set set set MS MODEL PREFIX INFLUENCES MULTI NUMBERING F0R= XSUSEMULTINOThIBERNGFOR= MS USE NUMERIC MULTI NUMBERS FCR= MS USE MODEL PREFIX 11* MULTI NUERS FOR= XS USE ASSEMBLY NUMBER 303= XSSWITCF{MULTINtJMEERSFOR= XS VALID CHARS OR ASSEMBLY MULTI NUMBERS XS VALID CHARS FOR PART MULTI NUO4BERS= XS MIN NUMBER OF ASSEMBLY MULTI CHARACTERS= MS MEN NUMBER OF PART MULTI CHARACTERSXS ALLOW CR. 101CR. 01C2. alOl. 1B1C1. See the help files for further information. In a case where your fabricator wants multi-numbers for assemblies and/or parts those drawings need to be linked to multi-drawings. ABIO1. clOl.0 BASIC TRAINING MuIti. pblO.NumbeHng 9-5 . ._. If you work for many fabricators and you need to define different numbering setups for each one you can create multiple batch files. ACId. 10132. parts. -. aalOl. bib.AWNG TO MANY MULTI DRAWINGSXSSWITCEPOSJcUMBERSJOR= XS PART MULTI NUMBER FORMAT STRINGXSASSEYMULTTNUMBERPORY. AlOl. 1O1BA. ablOl.Drawingc and MisItI. boleb.g. Tekla recommends using the Tools Advanced Options menu function to change these settings so that the default settings remain consistent.ATSTRING— Using these variables we can get following types of multi-numbers: E. ccl CI. 10183.

h 0 j 1iE 0 W4d 40u-. 45 ø. 0O’t.Re On e91r15.. This v..‘ 9-6 TEKLASTRUCTuRES 13. We will use assembly and single part drawings created previously..we . Qii-L Ctil-’W r FkbâaMng Sngle-pait drawing l Assembly drawing General arrangement drawing.. The multidrawing isjust intended for use as a gathering sheet.. you need to remember to include the single part views in the assembly drawings. LS ZaIh*4 . I/2l& A A ‘I 2i W PZ1 0.A 9. Creating Multi-drawings All the necessary editing should be done in the assembly or single part drawings. IIir-ain j Ust.t 500& IO 204422 //0 - 1/1U fl r4/2D I€1’D Ir.. — C. 04/20/2. A A A 01UMN COLUMN lUPj 6fl - L444 m I — DEl Lfi. [Jj. Ctd—D Selected dingo S4. Create an empty multi-drawing (Drawing Properlies Setup T3o tnque > Multi-drawing > Multi-drawing)...M A .111 cause the loss of all drawings which have a multi-number assigned.d 40104.. If you need multi-numbers you need to edit the batch file and restart Tekla Structures.. Set multi-drawing properties (Properties > Multi-drawing.rtd cnMrr wfth Iavro U You shou]d be able to see that there is new drawing on the list M.. 0 p4. Also if you want multi-numbers applied to secondary parts.0 BASIC TRAINING Multi-Drawings and Multi-Numbering right 5 Cop 0 2007 Tekla Corporation .ch — o—.. Ha S.Sifl.). We will create multi-drawings using methods I and 2 described under Options for creating multi-drawings..61 IOu JJHN CLtL% J!J L!r_ - Sded.. Muki-dm*i 1I !: Cknedrawg.. Load Multi-Drawings setting from the top of the dialog. 2.2 Don’t change the numbering setup after linking assembly or single part drawings to multi-drawings. ttj V’hzard.Md O4//2 D4’2W1 4//Z C4’2/Z 04/2W. 3. 4.u.._2!!i!J J(N. 04/26/2. Title I./29&. Click OK.. Create Multi-Drawings Manually Create empty multi drawing I.. 6 T A Mu.

o.. P FiTfl I_JLJ F.oc4 — A_.ooeoc 4/md. L.ed. . you will see the 4 draxngs being linked to the multi-drawing... This ensures that all similarly scaled items are maintained at a similar scale on the multi-sheet..r’ e4ns/Z 04)24/2 04)20)2 00/24/2 ‘ri’-’Du A A A A A A A A A A 4 A A is-SI [B.1: EIZ B. .t€r et. 2.. you are advised to use one of the ‘US Wizard’ settings to make the original drawings then linking these views with the layout onto the multi sheets. Hold the cursor over the highlighted drawings right-click and select Link drawing views.. 3w2 Type M H I’ — Flu.. t Open the multi-drawing.. I . 5—.nns161/215 IWiIDTO W 120W - 20)20)2 C4. — — LEJ Q H. 10131. one on top of the other. 1.. Highlight the first 4 beam assembly drawings. ho co.. 25’fl I 01/21 2 ri.tes.Drawings and MultINumbening 9-7 ... Fri - 01/210 16/210 m.04] 2:5o =6I 00*4 0EPJ4 66*1 00*4 BENd OLw4 001’4 01*4 00344 00kM 00A4/ Lef[!’!J Lock By B.4. wJ/u0Iu. So. 4 3. ‘°‘_. otherwise... ooiiiII%I ..Q Link assembly drawings to multidrawings / — If you know you are going to be creating multi drawings for any cotfiract riaht from the outset.: Copy drawIng views [ink draadlng views Copy drawing viens with layout Link drawing views with !eyout AFi In the multi-drawing..&od Re.g.2 04/26/2 iro-ir w ‘)25B’ O’lfl’O’. I sb—i tHod. 10132 etc.’.secened Ct —D At—E. according to your numbering setup e... Copyrighl © 2007 Tekla Corratioc TEKLR STRUCTuRES 13.o. - C. 1/115 .?] ]0 0] 3: R.t 34/IWO 101/710’ A r’ZI 09 lB/Il 00*’ ocAW BUMA 50 O.SI [0.——..d I_0c! T4I25/2 04120/2 04/20/2 20)2012 -. Ore P’-ope’tes.2$IZ C”26)2 04)23. C.—. If you are using multi-numbering you can see the assembly marks changing on the drawing list.0 BASIC TRAINING Multi..1 r..— 444..I 06*4 n4126/L ocIsoIu. the numbers will remain the same....OZ [0.

- Ir —r Place views on multi-drawing 1. right click and select Place views.Numbering copyright 0)2007 TekIa Corpora%n . To arrange assemblies on the multi-drawing. • • • To arrange the assemblies interactively: Select outer blue border around an assembly Left pick the border Drag the assembly to the desired location Your multi-drawing may look something like the one shown below 9-8 TEKLA STRUCTUREs 13.0 BAsIC TRAINING Mulu-Drawing. and Multi. ER : :!t_ 2.

the drawing list and repeat the linking procedure.I— . After linking. Click the undo button until the automatic and interactive arranging has been undone. Highlight the next four assemblies or. The Bill of Material (top right hand corner) will be expanded and interfere with the beam view when drawing is re-opened. H i J: 1 •! • - — 4 :ni Remove the extra assemblies from the multi-drawing !1 It seems that we cant fit all the drawings on one sheet. See below for thrther information on this. 4. re-arrange the assemblies on the sheet. As long as the drawing has been open all the time you can unlink the assemblies by using undo. If you have already closed and re opened the drawing you can still delete the assembly from the multi-drawing but there may be implications if you have used multi-numbering. We need to remove some assemblies from the sheet. I. Copyright @ 2D07 Tekla Corporaton TEKLA STRUCTURES 110 BASIC TRAINiNG Multi-Drawings and MultiNumbering 9-9 . 4! r ::!*z±z’tL_1 — — in Add more assemblies to multi-drawing 3.

‘ Cl..CD 0 V CD 0 0. CD Cfl o. 0 0 CO a 0- . 0 -I) ft cn C-. 6f Cfl 56) PDa zp 4 PD 00 0 PD s’ a: 2. -I o CD ft cn 0 C 0 ft( C) z0 C a a a z 00 _t. C) ft 6 0 C.. C > 0 00 0 Co — 0 a ft CD C. ft - 0 C C — ft C 00 2. C cI. 0 g ft ! 2.. 000 Cl) I. 5• Zr S. c. -. 0 I. Is> Gt Co Z Oft —. a p’ 00 S ft C. PD. a ZC 00 0 ft 0 z z 6) _a ft 0 1.

.g. La rn.bo ro .. tout Mu. I. Create Multi-Drawings Automatically Until now.tNES S. we have just accepted the numbers assigned to the assemblies and have not updated them with regard to multi-drawings.1i. remember the underscore between the words.REBAR PVSI1IOSINUMEER FDRMAT.btt diawat Spo. 5..it uot.wArsrRt3 X$ZMLT ><S_PTFv5I1 FDN_NUMRERJURMATJTRrNG XS.*a bci.NUMBERS_FOR XS. E. a..q. Use all capitals and no spaces. 7. I BEAM —Marked lOIN can be changed in the Tools Advanced Options: — set XS ASSEMBLY DRA WING VIEW TJTLE= Take a look at the Tekla Structures help file for more information.C TRUE CTekJthtrwiosesSiddN13’o’4OsO ASSEMBUE5 >cLULyDcrI_O9FFEOJSyAOLNStEHUJ.TcNalNrrnr boNd how. ES .UNIQUE.SSE.STDfART_MUOEL XS.fro POt k._SLitREPRJS xs-aIocnsroa_AosEy ‘Movno.0 BASIC IRRININO MultiDrawings and Multi-Numbering 9—11 .no% n.to}otg imoi W..tuietend ?ooauod ASSEIER_ Es ASSEO.PCS. Wddt • 1 4. Complete the values as shown below..LIBEtTR _JsEa1jbi IREFNOYa4CtC1OPhWWG_bWS XS_JSE_NuCyL.rç Na >nAINLJMBEROP*RTMULIICJSMSCTERS O.n-cq Diar5 r..5HOWJPERFORM_NUMSESWi&HESSAUE XS. The assembly view title e.i Fit ott H.o X5J5E5Li’. This is necessary for the program to check and apply the new settings.tS DSi. Open the drawing list Select all the column drawings Right click on the highlighted drawings and link the assemblies to the multi-drawing. Copyright © 2007 Tekla Corporation TLKLA sTRucTuRes 13.a. When typing MAIN_PART.Ifl Senznvar... 2.dar.d. Now we will setup some multi-numbering to affect how the columns which are to appear on multi drawings will be numbered.. Go to the Tools Menu and select Advanced Options Select Numbering form the list on the left 3.*dBEG flyd..areo.SWITCHJSULTI_NUMRERSJOR XSSWITO&.ASSEMBLY_NUMBERS XS_UNIQUEJIUMSEAS XSLSSEM9’i€SR. 8.y.i..jhwb. Ed.yob.ErrpEstLrs:&yoa9A—r:uE &r. 6.bn ietotrd Wirkat bob Mk.ie put . 3.d aucirass To to . Click OK Re-Open the model. ..Q Create multidrawing for the column drawings ‘.c...ii - .SIAPNG XS.

You should be able to see that Tekla Structures creates a new multi-drawing and then starts linking the assembly drawings to it. /CSQ.i -. giving you more control over what assemblies are shown on multi-drawings..21 tOLL’S.n Al • r—j 1 E Sea-th s.li1 o1 C&14R updaie updaie “Sn R. Tekla Structures will try to place as many drawings on a multidrawing as possible but often. Revici Sirs CC-I. 54/25/2 si al ID HSS SR4CZ Rai0 IPP7 Geerifl2eneet 1 Freeze 8 CC-Ion - StANDARD Issue Disinter lorsud. it creates a new multi-drawing and starts the linking procedure again until all of the selected assemblies are linked to multi-drawings si.Nunbering Copyright © 2007 Tekla CorporatIon . particularly with complex column drawings this may only be one drawing. 155 tRotS 155 BCE DWSQ E&t. Once the first sheet is full. 10.e Tppe Maik II [I. (iluIzI— ulJk’ir-frI lI_IJr. 12 soledod reel-u_v Lc. 04. n Create multidrawings out of the bracing drawings Highlight all the Brace drawings in the drawing lisL 1. Right-click at the top of se]ected drawings and select: Create Drawings> Multi-drawing > Selected drawings..I 9.Sesdn . user-detl’ied attibuies. Wean.lI I_I .. Ddere - -. For this reason it is sometimes better to manually link the drawings. I’ riod Malci [Ip[ ii] .Or C-s c. 04.25/a. 9-12 TEKLA stRucTuREs 13. LI 04 I____ MIJtbóe.aea CO I-eli I I 11111’ I Lick u_UI I [CLIJu_Il - I oJ( Firers Pent &awr.ng 34/1)2 34)25/2.35 ID.. rsrft-w Calif Ce’ +A 0.0 BASIC TRAINING Multi-Drawings and Multi.. Notice that the assembly numbers on the columns will change as they are added to the multi-drawings. Mt4€nter “It-to I’ 1 II I [ up to dale ssp.aieia4i rotle &awige (r CieMed Moeind Open Propertes.ZkQ 04/25/2.

This also means that if something changes in the model. 2. the new drawing also needs to be linked to a multi-drawing. copnight © 2007 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. rri 9. Any saved modification to an assembly drawing requires the multi-drawing to be updated. so for more information take a look: Help: Drawing> Getting started with drawings > Defining drawing revisions But because of the linking procedure and multi-numbers thae are a few issues that need a closer look. > Multi- V The multi-number is assigned only once. If multi-numbering is used modifications that affect numbering might also require re-linking of the assembly drawing. The assembly drawing must then be re-linked to the multi-drawing for the new. so ifyou assigned the multi-number during the linking of assembly drawings then the number should not be changed again.3 Updating and Revisions For the most part updating and revision conirol is similar to that done in other drawings. Updating multi-drawings Changes to an assembly drawing are not automatically updated in the multi-drawing.0 BASIC TRAINING Multi-Drawings and Multi-Numbering 9-13 . if clip angles change so that they get a completely new number the assembly drawing needs to be deleted from multi-drawing. ‘I.Create multidrawings out of the single part plate drawings Highlight the Plate drawings in the drawing list. Right-click at the top of the selected drawings and select: Create Drawings drawing > Selected drawings. For example. In the case where an assembly or single part mark changes so that a new drawing is cloned or needs to be created. then it will also require the multi-drawing to be updated. which requires an assembly drawing to be updated.cHp angles to get multinumber.

4.. 5. Revision control Create revision If you are sending multi-drawings to your clients then obviously you will need to add a revision mark to the multi-drawing.2 C/C r 1 0 1 a 1 (B/S) 1O1B1 Close and save the drawing. Click Create. Highlight the drawing and click Update. Add a re’ision mark. 6. 9-14 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. You now need to update the multi-drawing. button.Modifying an assembly drawing Add a typical weld mark to an assembly drawing: /ieø 13 1OCOL 2½ 51. Update multi drawing You should see that there is flag and a change message in front of the multi-drawing. This means that assembly or single part drawings that have been linked to the multi-drawings have been changed. Highlight the drawing on the list.0 BASiC TRAINING MuItI’Drawings and Multi’Numbwing Copyright @ 2007 Tekla CorraIion . date and text to the dialog. Open the multi-drawing and you should now see the weld mark in the multi-drawing. To add a revision mark: 3.. Click the Revision. You can see that drawing was marked on the list as having revision A.

By default. You should see that the revision has also been added to you revision block. Weld size changed REV DESCRIPTION - Seam 10181 Sf1512007 ] DATE FAB: NAME I FAB:ADORESS FAB. date. — 04/26/2007 TRAINO2 10151 Several drawings can share the same revision mark.Nizmbering 9-15 . and information. see the following links: Help: Drawing> Getting started with drawings> Working with drawings> Defining drawing revisions Help: System> Files and folders> Startup batch file.CITY/STATE DESCR’ION 2ROJECT NAME BEAM BASIC TRAINING nO ‘lv. revision numbers are shown.Ii [hI flITU I’ll: Revision 1 V [Save as] Revrsion 1 v El Date: V 2/15/2304 WeC 52 teal chsed-Bei 13’Bl El El L E IIeate [ Delete j F /r [ Canc& Open the drawing.0 BASIC TININO MuIii.Drawinge and MaIti. OAWN 0Y DATEDRAWN CR0 No. / () You can Choose whether Tekia Structures shows the revision numbers or the revision marks in the drawing list. Copflbt @2007 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURCS 13. To attach the same revision information to severai drawings simultaneously. select multip]e drawings from the drawing list. For more information.

n 9-16 1EKLASTRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TJN[NG Multi-Drawings and Multi-Numbering Copaight2OO7 TeIdaCaoron .

eSe 1EKLA Drawing Management Tekia Structures 13.0 Basic Training 29 October 2007 Copyright © 2007 Tekla Corporation .

N .

3 10.Contents 10 Drawing Management 10.0 BASIC TRAINING Drawing Management I Oiii .ight@ 2007 Tef<la Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.4 10.8 Controlling Drawing Revisions Revising General Arrangement Drawings Create revision marks in drawings Handling Revisions to Assembly Drawings Show revision information in a report The Drawing Classifier Modify a drawing using a classifier Cloning Drawings Adding a logo to a drawing template Creating Basic Templates Adding Templates to Layouts Plotting Drawings Exporting Drawings to Other Programs Making PDF Files Sharing Your Entire Model Copy.5 10.2 10.1 2 3 5 6 8 9 10 11 21 23 28 33 35 36 36 10.1 .6 10.7 10.

0’ I O-iv TEKLA STRUCTURES 13M BASiC TRAINING Drawing Management Cop.ight@O7 TokiaCoiporaxo .

0 BASIC TININC 10-1 DrawIng Management . There are also a collection of tools that allow complete customization of how the drawings look. These topics are covered in more depth dosing advanced training but we can introduce them here and learn some basic functionality. as an affective way to minimize repetitive editing How to add a logo to a default template How to make a template and add it to a drawing layout How to plot drawings Copytight © 2007 Tekta Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.Drawing Management I In this lesson In this chapter we will learn further drawing editing and customization tools. We will introthice How to control and handle revisions to previously issued gena arrangement drawings • How to handle revisions to assembly drawings The drawing classifier • • • • Cloning. Tekia Structures contains a vast array of facilities that allow the user to effectively handle changes to a contract after the drawings have been issued.

The revision table also shows the revision date. see the following links: Help: Drawing> Getting started with drawings> Working with drawings> Defining drawing revisions Make changes to the model 1. You can create a list of revisions in a report. Modif5’ the model by changing the profile of the columns on gridline A-7 and 3-7 from W16X50 to W16X67. r /2 2. ( a Tekia Structures displays the revision information alongside the revision number or the mark in the drawing list and in the revision table within the drawings.0 BASIC TRAINING Drawing Management Copyright © 2007 Tekla Corporation . Number the model—Tools> Numbering> Modified 10-2 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.1 Controlling Drawing Revisions Now we will cover the revision handling features of Tekia Structures.10. For more information about drawing revisions and creating reports. \Vhen the model changes: • • You have to update s revise drawings Attach revision information to the drawings.

c. C?)I2OJ n. They are also shown with a magenta cloud.. This is because it may have been the same as the other beams on gld... Copyright® 2007 Tekla Corporation TERLA STRUCTURES 13. — •r.. Select the drawing to revise.0 BASIC TRAINING 10-3 Drawing Management . Open the drawing list..4 —— L•d U. This doesn’t print out and is only there to show the detailer that something has changed.. . AX (N 19’-8 Notice how the columns changed automatically and were updated on the drawing.. right-click and select Revision. A. rr 7TT ‘c. Also note that the beam is highlighted above too. 2v!ca.3.:. Ic.4.._l LI 5•II’ .. C II: MI mm mm mm I—’ 4. to open the Revision handling dialog box.s 5 and 6 before we changed the column depth causing these beams to get slightly shorter. Revising General Arrangement Drawings Create revision mark To add a revision mark to a drawing: 1. Open the Plan drawing that was created earlier.r r. Lit’i.

nt Copyrigisl © 2007 ToMe Corporation .k. The revision number is shown in the dialog box.Im La F U .. I 5. L [ Delete j [ F / F J Cance4 Once the revision is created. Ckr. -- Undo Redo CtrL+V [ 2. [ZJEIEEI I CtrI+Z - ott [1 [_&i] Revision.. F’zpe4ns Cl. 16Da2s 1SJ3?5 Ste ‘15 828 nlTSQ* .ied Mome 811 Re. C. open [yaleni. It R Delete [“I 115 Drawnq • Lodc Freeze Issue < — riper.e. and click Create. ! Revision handling FcwAppioval V Save as] r ‘V - Mark Date: text A 9. DIirrrs ProjIe AFFBI&: REV DESCRIFTIDN DATE EAB NAME F AB AD D RE SE FAB-C m-/LS1crE DESDRIFTIDN RDEDT &YE CLT STEEL FRAME BASIC TRAINING k: I — DR’Mc O9!292006 CO2 5 ‘RAIt El 0’ 104 TEKLA 5TRuCTURFS 110 BASIC TRAINING Drawing Managem. 4. ve 3 T 6 S I [ IL] j] iwe r 1 J : °tt.F rS2 828 6 ‘I [iIfi±!J I Up to de By pat Oot.. - S 332 Ctfl. revision date and description text of the revision in the dialog box as shown below.2005 Revi&on 1 Size 11 52’ 82 Te 6 Mk 131 Nant Steel Fraye Open the drawing to check that the drawing title and revision table display the revision information correctly. F U Created 1 SOD 2O( ModiFied 1503. Lte I cancel Enter the revision mark. a revision number is automatically assigned to the drawing. Check that the revision number is shown in the drawing list.30.a.2006 -J Column Proliles Atei --fl lJ [ Create 3.

For more information. see the following links: Help: Drawing> Getting started with drawings> ‘Working with Drawings >Deflning drawing revisions Help: System> Files and folders > Startup batch file. E Text: - El Placfrtg El [Pace. Select Properties> Revision mark. Tekla Structures automatically adjusts the remaining revision numbers for that drawing. Create revision marks in drawings We will create revision marks in the drawings to help locate the changes made to the model. revision numbers are shown. To attach the same revision information to several drawings simultaneously... The revision dialog will open and allow you to modi’ or delete any revision marks V Define revision mark appearance When you delete a revision. select multiple drawings from the drawing list. Select the revision number I in the drop-down box next to the Mark field to obtain the corresponding revision information. see Help: Drawing> Editing drawings> Editing drawings reference> Create>Revision mark. To create a revision mark in the drawing: 6..dard Revision Mark: Date: Appearance [Save as] standard . By default.0 BASIC TRlNIN0 Drawing Management 10-5 . You can choose whether Tekla Structures shows the revision numbers or the revision marks in the drawing list. date. 7. and information. Modify revision information To modi’ the revision information of an existing revision mark: Right click on the drawing in the drawing list and select Revision. For more information about creating revision marks in drawings.A ‘I’ Several drawings can share the same revision mark. l Revision mark sa. from the menu to open the Revision mark properties dialog box.A STRUCTURES 13.] [P/F] CopyTight © 2007 TekEa Corporation TEKI.

0000 [_S&ect. Type: Leader line: .IZD ‘I 5/64 13/128 v• ‘0 OK j[ Apply Modily _JIw/rJrnc&__I 9.8. select the Arrow type as shown below. —zzE1 Frame -=1 IEJ Type: Arrow —. change the Frame color of the revision mark to red and click OK. On the Appearance tab. and its appearance corresponds to the properties set in stepé. Create revision mark in GA drawing 10. ‘IL 10-6 TLKLASTRUCTURES 130 BASIC TRAINING Drawing Management Copynghl © 2007 Tekla Corporaton . Double-click on the revision mark to obtain its properties. Revision mark MipIr e [j Text Color: slendard v [ Save as] standard - . Select Create> Revision ma>Arrow on right from the menu and pick a point to place the mark. Co D 01 K” / Handling Revisions to Assembly Drawings You will notice that once the colunws changed in the model and the numbering was performed that a selection of drawings started to show various flags.-e Revision Appearance E Height E Font: Angle: 13/128 Anal 0. pick close to the column and its part mark on gridline 7 11. Check that the contents of the revision mark is correct.0. For example.

1301 0 11flW — lrL /1 la’V1/2 9070/3 ‘0*12 rn. boded .0cc_il . .bcl&a.. MOOd ‘l fl fl A A A fl II N Reawo.1k Entea.!.? S. the b* — aa*C...1009] [0.1 “I. ED LJ 10 Di. .eased QuandIp creased Pa.AS1RUCTuRES 13. 97. ..tho chareed 97/11/2007 07/11/2007 07/11/2007 07/11/2007 07/11/2907 07/11/2007 07/11/200’ 07/01/202 07/11/2007 27.2002 00/X07 07/11 i2007 En..ts modOjed Ti Rails modified Parts modified Pals Ired Pale rcSed Liked drae.*s m/ll/0303 03/00/fl twIll/Mat lotand 301)2 107101’ ire’in CwateO’ainmgo 1.d j 0 s.? 13 ‘€“1 /7 1310’ 13’6”1/2 13’81/2 13”$”1/2 13010 .o.1095) RflOR’ COLUMN ‘NOAsS COLUMN COWMN 3ENO OEAV 3 ROTTER I.0 BASIC TRAINING Drawing Managonleni 10-7 .ed Revision Size 13 lope Mack Na.13ASS ‘NDASS HSS BRAEE BRACE kISS BRACE kISS BRACE HSS BRACE BRACE 0P)A Add a revision mark to the drawings The proarn automatically detects what has changed in the model and cross-references that to the drawing list. Wa owe — i. ru. Size I.11 API] ID 2001) ID 1999) ID 1008) ID 1007] [0.00) e3/%/ImJ 00/00/0000 00/00/0000 00/00/0000 00/00/0000 00/00/0000 00/00/0000 00/fl)00W rrnrr 0’3/4’20” 0 3/42i3” l3”6’1/2 &‘3/4’20” &‘3/4’20’ 13 0’l ‘2 3r23 1?W 1/2 lrr/2 la-ri.• iY’O’lIB .. ‘C”l /2 A A [8.mw 0 Lotote 0—Lu C- Cti-ez Add the revision information For Approval [save asj Revision 1 E]Mark Date: 1 3/10/05 Columns atA7 and B? altered text L_ CEeate [ Modify [Delete 11W / F I ( Cancij Note that al’ will appear in the revision column in the drawing list.10231 )3C2] A A A A A IA (300) (PCI C1024( 1C1023l rLS) 91037’ (31 A A A A A A A A A A P2001 3.11)2007 27111/2007 07/11/2007 07/11/2007 07/li /2007 07/11/2007 07)11/2007 07)11/2007 07)11/2007 07/ 1/20fl 07/11/2007 07/11/2007 07/11/2007 00/00/0000 07/11/2007 07/11/2007 37/11. Now update the revised drawings.00.tt.. Owe-dosed alevoIm.eapsoo 07/1/2107 07/1/303? E7fl1/300? C?6’i3 07fl’JV 07/11/2037 07/11/2007 07/11/2007 07/11/301? EOCO2C 03/00/0020 t10 03/tBb ttOD m/00I pled La odam Sden 4 sac = LZ JZ EE1EJ cp.. Eha. Lie to dee.e. sort the drawing list and bring all the changed items Select each one of the changed drawings and add a revision to the drawing..i1 30’ I lii? 0117 ‘I ft !!15 rn 997 E3/e20 tzz Ezi Lea) Penpoebos. Click the Changes column in order to together as shown above. lee. iutota.eased Quariltp dec. 07. I Liii (111 4 IIl/l5l15J Petal. Copyright © 2007 Tekla Corporator TEKI. BEAM COLUMN UuanlIO3i dec. Luau 03 7/I tea vi0 . HaS Naee 1. . jc.Up to dale Changes C’eaed MoI..

lisa Lock Peeze 0-anges ParEs modified Pails modified ParIs modified Drawing updated daled 07 t Otawiig tda]ed DIOWIII • • cieac 07)11)2207 07/11/2207 07/11/2207 97/11/2207 07/11/2007 07/11/2007 07/11/2907 07)11/2007 07)1 1)2907 01)11)2007 07)1112207 0/11112007 07)11)2207 07/11/2207 37/11/2007 iHo&md 00)/0000 Cl/il ‘2007 17/11 ‘2007 07)11/2001 00)0010020 07/11)2007 07/11)2007 07)11/2207 07)11/2087 07)11)2007 00)0810000 00/08)0800 00/0810000 (03/00/0000 Revosicr 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Sdm 13°B1/2 03/420 03/420 1301/2 11’Ol /2 1TSl/2 35221 3523 0 3/420 53)4295 136’1)2 1361)2 1161)2 S3’Sl /2 08/W./3 10’%1)2 1 1/2 1351/2 A S/C..0 BASIC TRE.1 [0.1 10. S%h/%/c SN1/lt)I3 (WIt/mi) Rn/nr. To create a report containing the revision information: Click on the Report icon on the Standard toolbar to open the Report dialog box.]NING Drawing Management Copyright © 2007 Tekla Corporation . I 71 C/ 1 tEl/I 1251/2 A A A A A A Hi] ILE1] 0. I Ho4 Le ByB I07)11/220? 07/il /2207 07/11/1007 07/11/1007 07/11)2007 07111)1107 57/11)210? SIll ‘12107 SRI]’ /2051 LosS ..t 210010 HIS BRACE BRACE II — r&nrii Uptodose • • • • 009. ILP (0 t: 0 0.o. 10-8 IEKLA STRUCTURES 13..2001] 10.. HIS BRACE F ‘nor BRACE HIS BRACE HSS BRACE ‘tin- A A A Ulawl l01I .1 131 131 [30 130 ER.1000] 01007] “NO ASS. Select the drawing_issue_rev from the report list and click the Create from all button.11)2%? 07/11/2%? n7/11/7t1fl7 3u5!•/7 lype A A A A 4 4 A 9 A A A A A 4 A A A A A Ma IP I 101 1C1 0..b.: EM. 3) ) V Show revision information in report Always add the revision before updating the drawing to make sure that you catch every drawing that is altered.SsslecNd Now the system will remake the drawings so that they will match what is now in the model. 3(0i’2 ‘30’i/2 1 tb E.ad. ROaR. — — — — :. NO AS S. The modified flag will disappear after you open and save the drawing.1001] 10. Show revision information in a report The report drawingjssue_rev shows the revision dates and revision information of drawings.’ermn 131(0 07.11/2087 07..e — REmus Al — Dh — — A.. 1.amuo. For more information about reports see Lesson 9 Numbering and Reports.

Revisions made to the G [3 drawing are marked with a red rectangle. Lcancel I Click on the Show burton to open the report.2OO rziu. See the picture below as an example of the drawing issue ev report. 2DO 9.’2Oa Dete: DESCAIprxoN Ii] 1 1 9.2 The Drawing Classifier There are always situations where you might like to customize how one item looks on your drawings without affecting everything else.30. Create from selected J [ Browse. A typical example of this would be where joists are shown on roof plans.0 BPSIC TdNrNG 10-9 Drawing Management . Check that the revisions are shown correctly in the report drawing issue rev.. Rewt Tile — Name: drawingJssiae_rev.[lReport standard Report Optths %tJ fe_j standard Report templates: cast_unit_cg unit lot list cast unit_part list cast unit_strand_list component_veid_list connection list drawing issue rev cest drawing lest rev flies — in eports Titlel: --i T itle2 drawing list drawing_revisiot histor cdi a g_dw g_l is t ci c_bar eje_pert_selection 4 :z:zzzz Title3: V.3O. Report DAOiLNG rvIsroN HISTOaY 50r ctrr?Acr Nc:13A3N002 rIrLE: FHASl: Org NAME rv No. Joists are usually out with the supply of the detailing or ffibrcation Copyright @2007 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES 13..xsr Sbowj Print. DAlY Page: 1 ‘J3fl9.xsr (Tekia Structures creates the report in the model folder). AM? HIStORY AM’?..rns _°rcfilea Altered Columns Profil esAltered 10.

They are normally sho’ii with a phantom line. It also means that this work wou]d have to be repeated again on the next contract. Notice that the IT Slabs are called out and numbered on the drawing. Drawing Management . — r A better way is to group those items and then apply a rule (a classification) to how you would like these to be handled. To do this in Tekla. users have a number of options but the most obvious would be to highlit each joist on the drawing and change it Part representation to a phantom tine This is very time consuming and will be overwritten if the drawing has to be remade. Modify a drawing using a classifier Open the drawing I. We will make a classifier that will hide this extraneous information.igttC 1 Told. Find the plan at 24-0 level general arrangement drawing that was created earlier. Caa*. then to tell the program exactly how you would like to handle these items. This means that even if the drawing is recreated.company so dont need to be hilly detailed on the plans. 10-10 TEKLA STRUCTURES 130 BASiC TRAINING Copy. the classification will be remembered and the drawing will modi& automatically. You can also take these rules to subsequent contracts or store them in your company wide Firm Folder so that the rule only has to be created once. 0 2.

i6-4 -2 -48 -O -8 -o . • Group the items you want to handle differently (In this case the TT slabs) • Define the settings that you want to differ from the other items on the sheet • • Create the classifier Refresh the drawing Group the items 4.cP2 TT24 “6-4 -2-48 97 t 3.97 t cf?J TT24 . -o -8 -O Making and running a classifier follow a fairly simple 4 step process. 1007 TEILA STRUCTURES 130 BASIC TRNa*G Dmwfng Management 10-11 . Make a select filter to group the TT Slabs by double clicking anywhere in the drawing to bring up the General Arrangement Drawing Properties dialog box.

Click on the View.. I El 2 \ie.. 2 2 I Boll mark. Neighbor parl..] Er I Bolt..0 BASLC TR4INING Drawing Management Copyiighl 2007 Tekla Corporarpor .. [ 5. J 2! EL EL________ 2 [_UserdeFined attributes. sir Mody Filet... Objects Part.. 2 Title: Views CE Dimensions Lici_t.. You can select the scale at the drawing beFore creation...... 10-12 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.... Grit. flEl Marks Part mark. button and load the desired scale.. Connection mark. 2 I Deta view.‘It General arrangement drawing properties Save Load k1 1 I saej Ran J Pl& t Name: El PLAN @ ELEV.... Relorcerrnl.... 2 Get Nehrpartfier... 2 2 2 2 1 [ I I Neighbor part mark..... Wetd. [ReinForcement marks. Others [Dinierdon. Stalace bemert Reference oecFs. OK ]I Apply jj ]I [w/rj[ CanceLEl Click the Filter button. SurFace treatment mark.

/ — Adding the asterisk to the term acts like a wildcard allowing everything that has a profile name the begins with iT to be grouped. Copyright © 2007 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. Then save the filter as TISLAB. OK 1L AppIyJ L Modi1y]t sej [Win Lcancei j Go to the Parts tab and enter iT in the Profile field.0 BASIC TRAINING Drawing Management 10—13 . coaponent objectol Pats Components Not El I C C C TT I —— ElCIass Pro(ile flMaterial I :DFinish Secondary I Main parts I________ Secondary L 6.1W General - filter propertie5 LsaveJ adJ Comection objects Nurràens Filter by Part ElName TTSL4B vI[ J Reintcfrig bars User attsibutes Filter string T7SI 2 Objedo (nthei tha. () Define the classification 7. Do not click Modify. Now go to the Part Mark button on the General Arrangement Properties dialog box.

We want them to remain as they are... We want to remove the assembly position.... ReFerence objects. 1 Eli Modify Fer.. it’s frame and also the section name of the slabs again without affecting the steel members. Objects El El El Others L Part Surf ace treatment.0 BASIC TBAINING Copy I2OO7T&daCpora*n Drawing Management .J [Usedelined atlributes. .. -] El El El El I Neighbor part mark. 10-14 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13...JI 4 Appl jJ ][w/rj[ Cance 8.. J El [Connection mark..RGeneral arrangement drawing properties Save Load j PI& ‘V Save as 9an r El Name: Title: El PLAN @ ELEV. [ Det& view.. n Marks Eli Dknension.. I ReinForcement marks. Eli El Vw.. [ Dksenscn EI[’&rna&. I L I Neighbor part. Reinlorcemer.. Bolt mark.. button and lo& the desired scale. Click on the View. I El [iriace treatment mark. j Get El Netr p& !iker. El El OK I ][ Pr&ectkn. El[ BolL Weld. YOU can select the scale ci the drawing beFore creation... J j El[ Grld.. Views ‘zzzzzz: El C Dimensions Layott.

> Type: Cor Font I 123 l Remove Color: Height.A StRucTuRES 13. Anchor_Plan. ‘TTSLAB’ refers to the items that we grouped together under the Filter button. • 10.TT S LAB ‘H [vasij Iilter_Plan_TTSLAB • • Using the word filter makes the program recognize that this is a classifier setting.-€ asJ V Elenents In mark vmbly position i<< Frame around elenents [<Add frame] >> rrorr.an TTSLAB in the Save As field. Enter f liter P]. it could be Elevation. Fort 3/32 M OK ] Apply J ModWy J[ Get J[W/rI [ Cancel 9. Alternatively. It is the name of the filter we created.9C_standard Coraeit Gen& Main parr AvailaNe elements enbly poiIlon Part position Prolie Materia’ Name Class Finish Size Length Camber Fittings INS/FSI Face drrecfron Sage ol otks0an&._ General - part mark properties 1iE @J . (ilter_Plan_.o-cerer dIa Teet Symbol Userdotined attribute 4 •#• [i. This is taken from the name of the settings used to create this drawing.g k Cere.e. Click OK and close each dialog box except the General Arrange Properties box Copyright @2007 Tekla Corporation TEKL. Detail or anything that you have defined as settings in the General Arrangement Properties dialog box.0 BASIC TRAINING 1 0-1 5 Drawing Management . ‘Plan’ refers to the type of drang we want this classifier to apply to. Again Do not click Modi&. Once the Elements in Mark column is empty we will create the classifier.

. I [ We. Bolt. El El j Ri Neighbor part... GI.. [Connection mark. Reload the Plan s(The settings you want the classifier to apply to) settings and now click Modify..rJi_Saveas Ran Ri Name: jJ Title: Views .Plan •Stair You can sele’ nchoiFlan Click on the’ nchorPlan_ru-D etails inoborPlan_withouLD C Elevation lann.j F’ I_User-defined allributes.. Ri Part mark.. Reréorcemenl.. J L1 [Surface treatment mark...30 -View •Elevalion PLAN@ ELE .] 2 2 I Neighbor part mark...iia. 12..ai view. Cancel 11. Fet..0 BASIC TRAINING Drawing Management Copyrighi © 2007 TeJ<Ja Corporation . Reference objects.Wt General arrangement drawing properties Save _lI[ El Load ..... Objects 4 EL 2 [ 2 Part Sizlace t:ealrnert. jPeinforcement marks...bor part fdter... 10-16 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. hiding the TISLAB marks but leaving all the steel members as they are. The drawing should now update. RI RI RI RI 2 Bolt mark. STE ELFAAME tI_Frame Dinns fC_standa.F nr r 1&. Others [ OK Protection.tkn. I Ne._M[roJ_UL ‘3 i-_ -H - ale CE Dimensions I Ri De.d Maiks ...nn . j[ Apply][ Modify _J Gel ][i7/r)[.

0 BASIC TRAINiNG Drawing Management 10-17 . Delete all the HSS Brace Drawings in Phase I (IO series) except one Open one of the HSS Brace Drawings similar to the one sho below. Cop. Cloning is exactly as its name suggests where a master drawing is set up and similar drawings are cloned from it.3 Cloning Drawings Another way to minimize the amount of cleanup required on drawings is to use cloning. I. Add some dimensions and a note to one end.10. This is particularly usethi when you have repetitive dimsionthg required on a number of similar items. 2.ight @2007 Telda Corporabn TEKLA sTRUcTuRES 13. L: E EE-EEZ-iE E EE ONE -VERTtCAc HSS ?ACE -01007 3.

4. 1 . a 0 1 z a_ow a pa a 00 a 11/4 lk = -J <a LI) (D a 0_a. 11 ON LI. C o o -ia CD 0 ‘a Ct zn o D2O a a cn a a CD —. C C I a Q g S a • a ° a) C) a- - RE1g {i II I 0 . -U - LI) o C 0 a 0.0 00 1.

elds MOdekIg Clone V DtPer gI&iC objects welds Clone Level marks Reyision maiks Links Text liles Clone Clone Create V Clone Clone Clone V V. V DWOIDXF V Hyperlaiks Oth rnks [Clone selected 8. 6 [ cbing Obect: M Action: Clone Action: Clone Clone Uone “ Texts Symbols Diawrç v.t Drawing cloning Select draving to clone Objects and actions Object: Dimensions ings... V LCancel I Now highlight the items in the model that you want to have clone drawings made from. Copyright © 2007 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING Drawing Management 10-19 .

/V i2OD 07/11/2CC? 07111/2021 07/11)2027 07/11)2027 07/11)2001 07/1 JflT 17 I 89/420” rJ/r2c 0J/4’20 03/4.2ro7 07/11/2007 01/11/2077 07/11/2007 07/11/2007 07/12/2037 I:. the editing made already will be showm p3 I’ 10-20 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. Notice that the drawing list now shows the new cloned drawings. COLLII/k COLUMN COLUMN COLUMN F’ 1 1 B3/4’20 3513’ I.....11/2071 07)11/2007 07/11/2007 07/11/2007 1X1 51 2C2] 20] DL_. r Select dravëig to cbne Objects and actions in cloning Object: Dimensions Action: Clone V Drawings. COLUMN COLUMN El [:1.i 0.10231 [C.rc. II H55 SHALE HSS ORAtE RAFTER 51 02/07/0200 02/07)0200 07/11/2007 1 Y’8”I/2 32r A 6 IR.0 BASIC TRAINING Drawing Management ht 0 Copyn @2007 Tekla Corporation .] Object: Texts Symbols Action: Clone Clone Cb. t2C Jointaie Owoes Mo$ied Cvl1/7 07111/200? Rrnion See Oiawfttoec Dia. 1 /20D7 07111/2027 01111/2027 01. 14..10241 I: II.20 03/410 1 0’3/420 83/420 0’3/4’Z7 A A A A A A 1X2 1X3 1121 SCOI [0011 [C.2onl :0Ljj4 COLLI4.. l3’S”I/2 1 3”6”1/2 — — A A S A A I!.e V v.9.’ .pdate CL’ C7r/103’ /20C7 3.2ff DIn 1/203’ CJ11)20D’ Or.:. Drawing welds Clone v v Other graphic objects Mcdeng welds Cbne Links Te4%s Clone y v ‘v! Level rnaiks Clone v DWS/DXF Revision marks Clone Other marks Clone Clone v Hyperlinks Create v ine 6 [ selected [ Cienied 0711/2207 07/1112007 27)11/2077 Cancel J lj/pe A A A Maic Nntt 10.20011 12] 11.’IX COLUMN COLLMI% 34. And if you open one of these. Then click Clone Selected..1007] lo.

TypeAF. The Title Block is another templaLe.l ‘.tpl Template Files Ltpl.. Copyrighi © 2007 Tekln Corporation TEKLA STRuCTuRES 13.rpt Type_BoMsjl TypeA_caliOff TyjeA_CaiDML.rpt [) status_site. In this example we will add the Tekla logo to the drawing but users can add any dxf file of their choice.rpt My Recent Docurerds L J Status Shop. the Bill of Materials on a drawing is a template.l n TypeGIfle6lodcs I .10. We will deal with Style I which is at the top of the list.rpt L2K1 Cancel My Computer Files of jpe: There are several different styles available to use and these can be set up in Project Properties within the model.rpt TypeAyLA_c&loff.0 BAsIC TRAINING Drawing Management 10-21 .tpl IJtflI Old LI.1 jTypeA_F’tA_8OM.TypeAM_HandraiJ_TLyevrsions TypeCu.Wl TypeG_Anchor8oltTable.jtempIae .rpt [ Sbuctures.tpl TypeA_Phases.4 Adding a logo to a drawing template Most users will probably want to customize their standard drawing templates to show their company information and logo automatically. TypeA_OnHoldtnft.ftoom.tpl . This is covered in detail during the advanced training course and there is farther help on the subject available to users on the extranet. V Status_Drawing. .Templates can be textual (for reports) or graphical (for drawings).ml j]ransmittal. Th’peAMndr&_t_BOM. / — Drawing borders cbnsist ofa set of rules called Layouts that are made up ofa coflection of Templates which call information from the model and the program.. The drawing border is created by adding and locating each of these templates in a Layout > Help> Introduction to Templates Open the template to be modified Graphical Templates Now that the logo has been prepared.: .tpl file — Load File Lnok.tp TypeA_OnHold.RebarScheduleuS. arfacngjst. For example. but this chapter outlines a simple method of quickly and easily adding information to the standard drawing templates.rpt Stt1e1Loso.i i Desktop JTekJaLogo.M File Dame: TypeGM_TitleBlocks. l TypeA_Revisns. My Documents r’A_Grkt. To do this we will open the template being used as for General Arrangement Drawings and add the logo to the Style 1 area Go to File Open and find the TypeGM_TitleBlocks.tpl j sts_d_kgt. all that remains is to add that to the styles or layouts to he used.l TneA_Y±5io&s.

.a C. S . 0 0). V z 0) —4 r 0 0 (0 CD 0 0 00 0 0 0) -4 00 C) -4 a H i (n z a C cii “1 . ‘-< C.D) V m 00. a 0’ a a in in o if. -‘Cl) 0 3< 0’ 0) 0 S..8 a 0 I . ‘1 CD a 0)1 0) 0) t 0 0 t -.J €0 0) o — l. ii. 0 C (1) (0 0 0 S ci C-) E 0) a . (0 I. C z n 0) E 2.4 0. Q CD z Ba a z z 0) 2. e.

5 Creating Basic Templates There are a number of templates already supplied with Tekia but you can also create any template to show any information you like. the drawing classifier and how to create and edit drawing templates and layouts in detail. saving time by avoiding having to open every single drawing and insert a block or add some text many times over. The basic training course covers only how to create and basically edit drawings. Start by opening the template Tools> Templates Copyright © 2007 Tekla corporation TEKLA sTRuCTuREs 13. The advanced training course covers topics such as creating drawing wizards. In this example we are going to create a very simple template to show a for approval’ or ‘for construction’ stamp on the drawing. / — Using a template for this type of process makes the stamp appear on every drawing automatically.‘ Q There are many more functions available to help users create and edit drawing borders and drawings. editor 1. 10.0 BASIC TRAINING Drawing Management 10-23 .

. 4.v..0 BASIc TRAINING Drawing Management copynt fl17 Td Cupamta .Ipli Er W. 5. Textual Templates are for reports and material exporting thnctions for MIS or CNC programs.ndae r UK ][ Cancei Graphical Templates are templates that apply to drawings. Go to the Insert Menu and choose Component> Row 1% 10-24 TEKLA STRUCTUREs 13.v Iret W. Save Temçtste OMS Recent Flies Eat ad-a Ps. 3.eee Pane Picpersy - yates Rea4 -j > 2. Op H* /- LL____ I’ 0 I S Seve Sect As. Select Graphical Template Tefrate types “I Textual te. The next stop is to define a row where we will add our content information. Then go to File New in order to create a new template.

t* —‘ Une PoMine et crde EA tun. You will be asked for the content type.renae. Ft : r C. 9. Now go to the insert menu and choose Text Edit w ..nrvne. For instance an Assembly content type allows attributes that are pertinent to assemblies to be shown. Copyright 2007 Tekle Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. Fecie 6.eiaenet Sc#tmg end dran / — 2 . The content type determines the type of values that you will be able to bring in from the model. * Fitrn Ale..n1oe.anaan. Cor*er type V SSEMBLY BOLT ST_UNIT COMMENT CONNECTION JII ‘IDLE MESH NUT S. you need to select a content type For the row.r’ ‘.:.pIdLol . 7.0 BASIC TRINING orawing Management 10-25 . Select Content Type IF you weni to insert object speciFic attributes..turs Cancel This allows us to show the date the drawing was last plotted underneath the stamp.___________ __________ FE tt Vw l’ir.rrn. r.tctJ Field 1 contonaMtrl I 10. a terd IZ Valire Add Gra. Inter. A cast unit content type allows certain concrete cast unit attributes to be shom Choose Drawing.DrI•. Type FOR APPROVAL in the text field and then locate it in the middle of the component row. Teata I. OpWe * J Sorr and dise TewnAa Coreponent Header Page Header r i -i — ‘3rr.

Now we will insert a value field that will automatica]ly update with the new plot date every time the drawing is plotted. FOR APPROVAL PLOTDATE:±::*..L :z. You can aiso add a line by using the Insert> Line command or a box around the stamp by using the Insert> Rectangle tool 13.*: t You can change the font. 10-26 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING Drawing Management copyright@ 2007 Tekla Carporafion . Insert another text field using exactly the same process titled Plot Date ::::::IFQR:ApPRQVAL’::::::: jP. the font size or the color of the text at this stage if you wish. Go to Insert> Value Field and click the point just above the left edge of the underline shown below. 14. A list of available attributes that can be taken automatically from the model will now appear. Next we will add the plot date beneath the stamp. 11.LOTOATE:: :: fl 12.::: p 15..

- . - - - - . FOR APPROVAL PLOT DATh:: &LIJ 17. 18. Choose PLOT_DATE from the list.- User attribute Attribute [DRAWINGI D CONTENTTYPE Content type D CURRENT_USER DATE Date DATE_CREATE Creatim date D DATE ISSUE Issue date DATE_MODIFY Modification date DATE_PLOT [late dra’.-ing printed DR_D EFAU LI_H OLE_S IZE DR_DEFAULT_WELD_SIZE DR_PART_POS Drawing Part positbn D HEIGHT Height ID IdentificatIon number NAME Name NAME_EASE Base name PAGE Page Hi PLO TFILE Prt Ie name ot drawing *0 ROW IN PAGE Row i page ED SCALE1 Scale 1 Hi SCALE2 Scale 2 SCALE3 Scale 3 0 SCALE4 Scale 4 Hi SCALE5 ScaleS SIZE Size TIME Time Hi -0 TITLE T:tle hO TITLE1 Title 1 TITLE2 Title 2 TITLE3 Tit’e 3 0 TYPE Type -0 WELD_DEFAULT Weld de!ault size 0 WIDTH Width AS S EtA B LY HISTORY PROJECT V REVISION USERDEFINED 0 NUMBER .0 BASIC TRAINING 10-27 Drawing Management . Finally save the template in the usinnp/templates folder. You can also change the text size and color for value fields too. Copydght © 2007 Tekla Corporakor’ TEKIJ STRUCTuRES 13. - - - - - - - - - - - 16.

Tplfli I .qI plah.---——. .- [54 - r —4 I. i ‘qe 1 Lit t: I.tpl L Engr_24x36. what physical size the sheet is and what template are shown on the sheet. — --. CU_Logo. To define layouts we go to the Properties> Layout maw.ek S.s. How it looks.t %Ø9 - — —.-- r.pa*l &ngr_$t Engr_SC f - L3 . n_t.tpl) v IF > L Canc 20.PLOTDATE: 19.2.t g_SubnittaIi.-.l J J -ENG_conc_pilaster_schedule i -EPJG_pad_thono_stheduIe.o Tt+S. ‘r• • FOR APPROVALI . tpt CLi_BOMX.PCEr.J My Dzcunerils -$• jCU_Rebar_Bends2.0 BASIC TRAINING Drawing Management Copyright © 2007 Tekla Corporation .ij Wndo-.vsJbmittaI2.l CUMatfrt cIJpr. Give the template a name and click OK Save FiteAs “ 0 t EnarSe . BAsE_scHEDuLE. r.6 Adding Templates to Layouts Now that we have defined the template we need to tell the progran what drawings we want the template to appear on and where on those drawings we would like it to show.tlr Tenwiate Recent Filet Ed o..1 9cu_BoMztpI cu_80r1. tpl CornerTi&_TopLeftlpl j -ENr3_coIumn_sthedu{e2. he — X Iea . The available list of layouts will appear. Save Si.tpl Engr_3Ox4iI Er_Revab. PC_Er: PC_Er_: __.jTplEd 2.r - iN. 10-28 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.tect IIemIanI . .$l :±‘TVttaI3. There are several layouts included as standard and these are generally sufficient for most normal usage scenarios but users can add their oxri if they wish. ‘ drawing_e. A drawing is made up of layout information and templates. We do this by defining layouts..s .e%iscn Style1I En_5tm r e nam& My Computer Files of type: Graphical Template Ales (.I Cornerlick_BottornRight.2 tamplates My Recent Documents • Zcu_s_treittaia. Layouts are what the program uses to make the physical attributes of the drawings.N.—. Your template is now available to be added to a drawing. For more information about Templates see: Help Templates Template Editor > Introduction to 10. CU_Rebar_Ben&l cu_Reira. l -ENG_sfrip_ftoting_schedule.: J J PC_Er_i PC_Er_i PCrJ Desktop • .tpI lE.nddrorts settr. ..

CopyrghI 0 2007 Tekta Corporalion TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. By organizing these into sections though. This opens the available drawin gs that can be used for General Arrangements.lsrtDrg Sngl eta 110ff Calculated sizes... jj ather5heet RanraiL_TL MLJssy_)rg Xultimrgs 050 as P0_Erect i cn Sin.. This helps the program achieve better results autom atically.We are going to add the stamp template to our GA Drgs in this exercise so highlight the s 5 GADr on the list. we can allow the system some flexibility in how it creates the drawings.0 BASt TRArNING Drawing Management 10-29 ... Layouts sezth1yrgs Ass yCalloff Ass ya 11 OfV Current layout Ii Tabls layout. For example we can permit the program to use II xl 7 layouts or 24x36 layouts when creatin g assembly drawings. Fired sizes. SA_Drs -t Delete Cancel r Add OK J IL ApplyJ Select the Table Layout button.. We can actually use any type of drawing layout for any catego ry of drawing.

To define what templates appear on the 24x36 drawing type. 4 V Update Current table Reference Table H Drawing frame v H EC Scale: Tra. n Available tables: TypeM Phases •1 Chosen tables: StylelLogo Iyp-ecx_?evisions I yp a ax_Title S icc TeM_Styie4rid I yp eM St yie4 Phas acrid Iypel_DaliD±f Iype_InAssyList Typewritlealccks+30M drawing_title_gE I a.0000 H Vecici between corners .ii Table layouts Tab Iayaft: 124x36 MlchcrSoit Current table layout Margins Widtft HeIght: t 0’ 0’ Spaces Horizonlal Vertical: 0 0 IL 24k36 Add ii j Uate Apply j Delete [ OK J [ Cancel As you can see we can have Anchor Bolt Layouts specific for those types of drawings or we can have a 24x36 sheet set up for all other GA thawing types. 0” y. highlight it then click Tables.spaent 1. El H Cancel & [ 10-30 OK J App’ TEKLA5TRUGTURES 130 BASIC TRAiNING Drawing Management CopyrighI @2007 TekIa Coirerallon .

Then find stamp on the list and click the arrow pointing right to move it across to the column on the ripht i-nd to make it visible on the drawipy. This is done by referencing a point somewhere on the drawing and referencing a point on the template we have made.i i nfl Chosen tables: Styleltcgc I yp eN_evi sic as I yp eC_Ii tie! locks 1MW 4 Cuteeni table Reference [ Table Update J C DrarFrarr El C C C Scale: Transparent 1 . Available lables: TypeMfliasea TypeM_Style4Szid l’peMStfle4haserid TyeWCa11Off TypewlnAssynist ypeW lit leE 1cc drawing_title_ga e.00 C Vector between corners ec 0’ yr_ C fl flOK App J Lc!ncdl Now we must tell the program where we want the template to be located. Copightt27 Teaa Ceoraton TEKLA STRUCTURES 130 BASIC TRAINING Drawing Management 10-31 .

Tables Avalthle taLks: IyeX_hases — [1 C}sen tables: Styleltcgc IypeGMlevisitns TypeGX Title3lccks r TypeXstylearid IjpeM_Style4Phasec-zid Type?Da11Dff TypeulnAasyList TypeW_1itie31ck+!CX tawing_titie_ga ZeViSiQn V Update Current table Reference Table LID Drawing frame U stamp H Scale: Vectoi between corners IL ID jY: 1. the OK at each of the dialog boxes until you are back in the model. The 3’ value in the box adjusts the template up 3” vertically on the drawing from its bottom center anchor point. The plot date value will fill in as soon as the system detects you have plotted the drawing 10-32 TEKLA S1ROCT1JRES lit BASIC TRAINING Drawing Management Cupy. Then we find the bottom center of the stamp template making the template appear centered on the bottom of the drawing.igM S 2807 Telda Corporation . I-lad just one box in the corner been selected then the template would appear at that corner of the drawing instead. Clicking both corner boxes as shown above acts to center these. ‘y’ Checking the Transparent box allows the drawing items to overwrite the template or encroach upon the template without being hidden behind it Finally click Update.0000 I UPl9 Tanspaien OK Cancel We define the reference points by first of all finding the bottom center of the drawing frame. Then re-open one of your GA drawings.

E!H E F— - 1.-i [I For more information about Layouts see Help> Drawing> Drawing Layout +-u. 2. OO?flht 2007 Tekia Cortrflfl TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. Select File> Print current.rH 10. which have been selected in the drawing list can be plotted from the Model Editor . Plotting Plot a single drawing To plot a single drawing from the Drawing Editor: I.0 BASIC IRAINING Drawing Management 10-33 . or click the Print drawings icon on the Drawings: Standard toolbar. to open the Print drawings dialog box. 3. Single drawings can be plotted from the Drawing Editor. Select the print device (plotter) to be used and click Print..7 Plotting Drawings Tekia Structures plots drawings both to selected print devices and to flies.. Open the drawing in the Drawing Editor. Single or multiple drawin gs.

1 Lcce j For more information about available plot options. and click Print / — If you select several print devices. For more information on adding printers see: Help> Drawing> Printing> The Plotter Catalog Plot a drawing as a file Plotting drawings as a file allows you to send drawings electronically for remote printing.enlalion Print Md / EdiL Piint àpe Auto Entire dravsng Frawe.ing> Printing> Printing Drawings> Plot options.wrj. V J rierseiup. Select the drawing or drawings in the list. Plot multiple drawings To plot multiple drawings from the Model Editor: - 4. 2.0 BASt TRAINING Drawing Mnagenent cop.: Print drdwings Pir cwiad ece P:iae. -. see Help: Drawing> Printing> Printing drawings.U1 tynewerintet Q Prig an rw4fl sheets Nuwbe. Open the drawing list in the Model Editor. Tekia Structures sends each drawing to the device with the smallest paper size. To plot the drawing to a file: 1. 6. 7.. Select at least two drawings in the drawing list Click on the Print drawings icon on the Standard toolbar.t4v 1 Lx17 1aser et4v_3—i!2. For more information about printing to print device. Select File> Print Drawings r 10-34 TERLA STRUCTURES 13. 3. Select the print device to be used. 5. PLT or even PDF. Exporting Drawing as Other Formats You can convert Tekla drawings to many commonly used industry format drawing types like DXF. Open the draw1ng list. Before you can do this you must install the printer or print driver in Windows then add the relevant printer to your Printers catalog in Tekla Structures. ol coes Oi. see Help: Dra4.t 32x42 a.ight@2O07TekIa Corporiioo .ss-c &5Y4flg r Q Prrij in ie Re ØAjo Sesienjet24x3 5esii. on which the drawing will fit. DWG.

Select DWG as the File Type. It simpiy appends the revision mark to the name of the file it creates and saves on the computer. Print duawings selected in the drawing list. .Print drawings Print &awings selected in the drawkg list.-. Go to FiIe>Export>Drawings to open the Export drawings dialog box. Exporting Drawings to Other Programs You can also send drawings to other users in DXF or DWG format so they can be opened and edited by clients or colleagues who don’t have Tekla Structures.] [ Cancel 4. The Include revision mark to Filename allows users to differentiate between a file printed before revisions and the same file re-printed after a revision was made. 2.] V...ABasicModelCombineddrawings folder as the destination folder of the plot files. Type .\drawings in the Name field. ‘ v [Add I Edt.. Click Print to plot the drawing to DWG.. designjet_24x3 designjec_30x42 1asejet4v_11xI7 fl Include revision mark to tie name Scaling 3..00 E Prt on mukiple sheets Number of copies: Orientation: Pr a’ea: Landscape Entke drawir [_Frames. This will define the .0 BASIC TRAINING 10-35 Drawing Management . Select the type of output you would like and click the Browse button to speci& the location the plot files are to go on your computer.. Copyright © 2007 Telda Corporation tEKLA SIRUCTURES 12..\duawings -. Prtiter Setup. Firowee. Punter instances Ik’r. Printer instances: Print to tile File location: C:\TeklaStructuresM ([Rrcwse j Include revisucti mark to lie nan - designet_24xS designjet3ox42 laserjet4v 1 x17 1nejet4vS—1/2a1L Scalno - Auto OScale 1. )XF PririttoIIIe fle location. 5. I.

For example. There are also a number of free or cheap PDF file maker programs that can be used in conjunction with Tekla Structures to enable sharing of your drawings with clients who may not have a license of Tekla Structures. / If you do not enter a file name for the destination plot file.irrngs selecled in rho diawng nt. 10. This folder should contain the saved *. a drawing named A. Once you have chosen and installed a PDF making program you can make and share PDF Files. rsnLes: fl. I overwrites a drawing named a. Users can create a representation of the model in a format that can be viewed in Microsoft Intemet Explorer which is already installed on every machine that is running any form of Microsoft Windows. For more information about plotting to file. starting at step 3. see: Help: Drawing> Printing> Printing drawings to file > Switches for naming plotfiles Making PDF Files PDF Files are the open format employed by Adobe and there is a free viewer available for download on the internet called Adobe Acrobat Reader. To export a Web Viewer Model: 1. Tekla Structures does not distinguish between upper and lower case letters. Tekia Structures creates the file(s) in the current model folder. You can also print a drawing to DWG using the Drawing Editor. Open the selected drawing and follow the above steps. or you have chosen several drawings. Tekla Structures uses the drawing name(s) as file name(s). see: Help: Drawing> Printing> Printing drawings> Printing to DWG/DXF Help: Drawing> Printing> Printing drawings to file For more information about defining drawing plot file names and plot directories. 2 Prir Io 1k F. Many of these program behave like an imaginary printer attached to your computer and instead of creating physical paper as the output they make PDF files that can be sent electronically via email or written to storage media or even printed out locally or remotely.e Iocatcei I 2awsts\S.:‘PrioI Ii rwiogs Print dra. Pirde.ABasicModelcombined\drawings folder.eo1 nr to Me nane Stating 4.l. Go to File> Publish as a Web Page I 10-36 TEKIA STRUCTURES 13. Check that the drawings were successfully plotted to the .8 Sharing Your Entire Model.dwg drawings.eeFrare ‘q [Browse I ie3ignjt24aS designjet3Oxt1 laseriet8vllxr’ C fri&ide . It is also possible to share all sorts of information graphically with everyone involved in your contract regardless of whether they have Tekla Structures or not.0 BASIC TRAINING Drawing Management Copynghte 2007 Tekla Corpsraton . If you do not enter a folder name.

0 BASIC TR4]NJNG Drawing Management 10-37 .. Copi. Select Publish from the dialog box that appears..\PubhcWeb\ModeI.J New Open. You may see a warning about an ActiveX control that has to be allowed to run. Publish what? l Publish as Web page () Entie model iDSelected parts Publish as Type: () XML CD Sohd Page title: Tekia Structures model Template: Tekla Web Viewer 1 File name: . Ti Print drawings.. Internet Explorer should now open on your computer...xrt browser L Cancel 3..pht @2007 Tekla Corporakon TEKLA STRUCTURES 13. Report. Sht*P 2. Pr1repocts...... Ctri-N Ctr4C) Ctn—S W Save Save as. CNC Pubkh as Web Import Ewort Catalog Reference models.

. - S FC W. After a few moments the model will appear. 10-38 TEKLASTRUCTURES 13.0. 1— 2 4. 5..1W low-lIol lI.- 0 7...4)In(er ‘7 . — ..ejw4 .. ‘ockur1 content.w&&I •Tdda W - £ TtLo S4at T St9ctsn Y&la W . Plot — •. Ted. Tttk 93 C o.0 BASIC TRAINING Drawing Management Copyright® 2007 Tale Cwporatir C . Click on the bar and Choose Allow Blocked Content Allo. 411 ‘. tThtho’1..r * rl. — P H.snt&rattcfreAtfltheafw 1i* I -I - .a e’. 4’sbew I’ 0 cu.

rd’I 2007 T& Cpori acRS1RcTLREsI3.heml & TnUe :bnbtx 0.s Instruct Lxplo. - P Mv TidebIn 0 Chest ‘Pe’ reels- 5tSda Wa swwes Ydda Stuclises niedel: esadlod. Now the model can be rotated. TEKLA’ Structures The Model that Works seed Il Imh S na s hot Is C linbopid SmfJQJ Pa 5 II N*$1zE Leidse 5. zoomed. urlisres sotlLi:eas.’:ING Drawing Management 10-39 . moved or flown through in the same manner as if you would if you were running the fuI installation of Tekia Structures.5% • rn.e HSSC “ A S Ctressthscturegtd& hi 3O.ned.‘ Icick Web Vcwc It•kl.Trthwçfl U 9$ Telde rehJa Excenni - rnHe Ir. Cc. 1004 Done d My Cn’iuittn •e ‘00% 6.t’ dCsrtEied54bkWthrdx :Vethoy.AnticS Exyrns.s 54.Wndos’.cMa3elCoq1b.o3As1c:ft.

Requests for information can be handled easily by highlighting affected items in the model in a different color prior to exporting as a web page./ — This isa terrific way to quickly and easily share information about your model. Progress can be tracked visually. All sorts of information can be shared among those involved via this easy to use system. I 1040 TEXLASTRucJuRs 110 BASIC TRAINING Drawing Management CopyTight 02007 Telda corporation .

2006 Copyright © 2006 Tekla Corporation ._*e TEKLA Stairs and Handrails Tekia Structures Basic Training October 26.

.

2 Create Stair Handrails Create Stanchions (Posts) at stairs Create Handrails Modify Return Bend Lengths BS1.Contents BSI Stairs and Handrails BS1.1 Create a Stair Finishing the bottom of the stringers Assigning Gage Material attribute to treads BS1.4 Create Drawings Stair Drawing Handrail Drawing Change the Handrail BOM type 3 4 10 14 16 16 18 19 25 25 30 31 37 42 42 45 47 8SO Copynght@2co5TeklaCcrporattn TEKL4STRUCTRES BASIC TRAINNG Stairs and Handratis .3Create Handrails Along Landing Create Stanchions Create Handrails Create Corner Elbows Prepare the Assemblies BS1.

jj TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAJNING Stairs and Handrails Copynght@2005 Tekja Corporation BSO1 .1 ‘a (\.

! Stairs and Handrails In this lesson we will introduce you to some basic miscellaneous modeling tasks that you need to know when detailing projects with miscellaneous assemblies. Many of the basic modeling functions that you learned in previous lessons will be used in this lesson. You will learn how to: • • • • • Model in a stair and handrails using several miscellaneous system components Utilize various components to connect the stair and handrail Utilize various modeling tools to complete the stair and handrail assemblies Create a shop drawing of the stair Create a shop drawing of a handrail assembly BSOi Copyright © 2005 Telda Corraton TEKLA STRUCTUnES BASC TRANING Stairs and Handrails 3 . We will start with a small structure (already modeled in TS) and add a stair and handrails to this model. After the model is completed we will create the necessary drawings for shop fabrication of these assemblies.

one at the bottom nosing point and one at the top nosing point. F down ciii key vd* :elcctrç Named wewn. !LrJRTIDII E!. Create the work points Click the Create point array icon.BSI. “a Select the intersection at A5 as a reference — notice the Origin values change as shown below. This allows you to locate a point at a reference direction and distance from any other point. Select and nve vtws between he do to c* vntWy To select uwAc4e vews. Click OK.10 S-RID GRID 0 GRID GRID F. 4 to :4 We will now add the point that will mark the center of the top tread nosing by learning a new tool.EV?flOH 5VIIIOH ELEVATION ELEVAI ION TIEVAIIOFI ELEt7IION ELEVATION ELEVATION ELEVATICI ELEVATION ON SIT SN SN ON SIT Ott ON ON CII ON ORID 1 GRID GRID S I. (a 4 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Stairs and Handrails Copyright® 2005 Tekla Corporation BSO1 . Click on the open named view list icon. Move the PLAN AT EL. C This opens the Views dialog box shown below.ws 3d PNASE PLAN AT fl S-RIO 4 5010 GRID 02.1 Create a Stair In order to add a stair to our model we first must add two points. Smdy the contract drawing to determine the locations of these nosing points. +12-7’ 112 view into the Visible views side. vistle .

type the values shown. which adds the red point seen below.1 n’IgVP in yMa•J vu n•avsa vi flahcaJ Coordinet X ‘1’ - 5” 4’Q” 21/2 Z ‘‘°:“ • alz-7”112 OK • L j[ createj[ Reset ][ Cancejj In the Coordinates section of the Point array window. Then hit the Create button. Select the intersection at A6 as the Origin. DON’T close the dialog box or interrupt the command. Go to the 3d view (right-click and select Next window) and zoom in around El. Next we will add a point for the bottom nosing. BSO1 Copyflght @2005 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Stairs and Handrails 5 .

which adds the red point seen above. Click OK. Double-click in the newly created view to open up the View properties window. nj In the PLAN AT EL +12-7’112 view. Select the Create view with two points icon. 30 000Ô [20 0000 Representation fl View LIrpe VmwdeØh Up EDo*n - E I Lifter. select the top nosing point first followed by a perpendicular snap at Grid D as shown here. type the values shown.. 1 I 4c LQ1E Ii Mo&y if Gel IP/rI[ cancat name as Change the Angle. C’ L This will create a-view along the plane which will become the center of the stairs. Then hit the Create button.r In the Coordinates section of the Point array window.. 6 TEKLA STRUCTURES BAStC TRAINING Stairs and Nandrails Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation 8501 Li . shown above and hit the (. & Down fields and type the view Modify button. Lip. otandard View v [aj istandard ENaen& EiAngIe Protection PHASE 1 STAIR ELEVATION vIE Rdelon aroundz ID P]ane [@ Orthogonal E Rolarron acoundX Rendered &. Right-click Interrupt. Click OK and then right-click Interrupt.

and Handrail. On the Picture tab.. This will create a new stairs in our model. • ‘. Also close the Component catalog window. Using the create X measure and Create Y measure tools. Check stair dimensions Check the stair tread and rise values. Enter 74 and hit the Search button. RI RI Equar + V t 7!! / j3!3!! 1 RIo’ 1 Click OK to make these changes active and close the dialog window. Click the lower point that we created at the bottom nosing point first and then the upper point that we created at the top nosing point.!aP4I U-S I ZpS’4i Double-click on the Z pan (574) icon to open up its dialog window. BSD1 Copyright @2005 Tekla Corraon TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Stair. Picture Stair setup Z pan Brackek f Perpenciiciiaiv RI 1. 7 . enter the values shown in the fields below. add the dimensions shown below to the elevation view. Right-click Interrupt.Input the stair Click the Find a component icon.

you will notice that some changes are required to the top tread. the values should come out to exactly 7” and 11” 5. Double-click on any part of the stairs to open up the Z Pan (S74) window. Also check that the bottom tread rise value is 6½” 0 B TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Stairs and Handrails Copyright @ 2005 TekIa Corporation BSOI . C Looking at the top of the stairs.n U C Create X Measure Create Y Measure If everything has been done correctly. On the Z pan tab enter the values in the fields shown below and hit Modify.

fl ci 0e1ak BSO1 Copyright l) 2005 TokIa Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Stairs and Handrails 9 . Also enter STAIR in the Name field.aC*C4 b C1<2O. The result should look like the image shown below We also need to go to the Stair setup tab and select the option to make this stairs a complete assembly.— S:Z s lio flS 21HZ S in it p C.ese bottom lsp Locale asserol4’ Sl’ngeo detenc. Pictue Star seto Zpan I StingerpoUe B. Hit the Modify button to change the stairs in our model.1 C Pot_No c i — Malen& 0 paime IsTAIR St.irioei olalicti P&ionkwlane alice’ Dose Ito slop H 2tiiddte C.

—--. ‘Select Objects in ComponentW Now for the bottom of the stair stringers. Click OK on this dialog box only. Wied El Noel Bc cpt ••ao c.H.l.J snap t 10 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Stairs and Kandrails Copyright @ 2005 TekIa Cerration BSOI . click the button which up the dialog box shown here. zoom in at the bottom of the ride side stringer.-—-.O Prl.: — V ho. j. not all stairs can be created 100% with the system components.°[____ 1 I ‘i Hit the Modify button to change the stairs in our model. Change the Wshop!site option from site (flag) to workshop (no flag) for weld #3. the system component we add for the base plate will not know whick member to add the connection to.2”.. Finishing the bottom of the stringers We will now create the bases for the stringers using regular system components. . Firstly though we must change the selection switch from Select Components to Select Objects in Components..4e rc”o. 1. Otherwise. Tekia Structures Z Pan (574) No 1 sr1 EZ — - S!:e 1çe A.-——.We also need to change the weld from a field weld to a workshop weld.-— •.r”J:’ .—. - N 3 L — —- 01(00 . To do this.a Fn.ooflfr RFI V Sllch No V. The first one can be added at the foundation line and then moved up 1. V 4 00000 0-U0 C —- V - v b. Add two construction lines using the Create construction line command. Leh . r rs “. Using the will make it easier to add this construction line along the foundation grid line. U! Edaa/I Wst. Use the system Stair components to get as much as you can and then model in the rest. Due to the complex nature of stairs.

Use the Create divided line points command to first add a point somewhere between a point along the top of the stringer and a perpendicular point at the bottom of the stringer as shown below. Double-click Stairs detail (1043) from the Component catalog. 4 The Stair detail (1043) component dialog opens.The second one needs to be created at the centerline of the stringer. ‘ The point this creates can be used along with the mid-point at the bottom of the stringer to create the second construction line. p The intersection of these construction lines is required to use the system component 1043. BSO1 Copyright @ 2D05 Tekla Corration TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Stairs and Handralls 1 .

r Bat — - Select the Base_Condition_Left settings from the drop-down list and hit Load. Pick the stringer and then the snap point as shown. OtnCt. Right-click Interrupt ft La 12 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Stairs and Handrails Copyrighi 2005 TekIa Corpotafion BSO1 .Tc. St t. Enter the value shown in the fields shown above and click Apply.co Detail ItNif LJ Li ——— Ptn Pat.kl.tchjeps Stag It. This cuts the stringer as shown and adds a base angle.

1W lekla Structures Stdir Va%e Detail (1043) Sa V 1 E4_Jj - Base_tondRionp.. but use the Base_Condition_Right settings.Do the same to the left side stringer.ght 1 [_________ G&. Corporaton TErQA SIRuC]LRES BASIC 1RI1[NC Stairs and Handraits 13 ..ght ignore aIhert3ipes Pica.on_R.M z S Biack& ie V EE1— —ft —1 I_QKJ(j [_ !oy I Get j [E/ r BSO1 Copyright @2005 Ted.e. Baos_Condit. Bogs H) E [Welds. P&.

Select the stringer and right-click Inquire> Assembly to see if all intend pieces are shop attached to the stairs. the bottom tread becomes part of the stair assembly. lnqjte Copy Oe!ete St as reô maw.cfgy E. pa’ c-F assertly Cone. 14 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRdNINS Stairs and Handralls Copynight @ 2005 Tekla Corporation RSD1 . then the tread. The Gage for the tread needs to be identified in the parts User-defined attributes. I Create weld Select the left stringer first as the part to weld to. Assigning Gage Material aftribute to treads The contract drawing calls for the treads to be made of 12 Gage material.2c1 lsEs F-ide F-we This reveals that the bottom tread needs to be added to the stair assembly.. Then select the right stringer as the part to weld to then the tread once again. 1 IL --- - oterwpo ‘% . Use the create weld command to add the bottom tread to the entire assembly After using the Create weld command.

ihop_ ] Select the bottom tread in the 3d view. k Tekia Structures Beam (I) Clwiçe ide. Copyrigtfl @ 20D5 Tekia Corrabon TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Stairs and -landrails 15 . DON’T close this dialog box. C Q F. Shoder.. ls I U.aoeng men v. It merely adds an attribute that can be used in reports and drawings in place of an imperial thickness value.Jal.ad’n Menibe. Pa.y rna.. A BSO1 This does not physically change the thickness of the treads.ter P.lL).. Woe-flow I. Ce. cob hoed d...ore jcaoe Maleojal EIfZ :J /r.. Right-click and select User-defined attributes.elo*ia.e-a C C C C. hod SISm End code. D C C C C No Ui.arnetero IFU en. Then on the Parameters tab. hell 2 Jet he’d 3 the’ held 4 Merebe. EIIE1 First hit the (LCJ button to remove all the checks in front of each field.. This opens the User-defined attributes window. select SHTI2GA from the Gage Material option list and hit Modify.ue cmtol U Rn.k E.

‘a $ TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Stairs and Handrails Copyright 2005 Takla Corporation BSO1 .2 Create Stair Handrails To create the required handrail system shown on the contract drawing.I’7p Double-click on the Stanchions (S76) icon to open up the dialog box. cutting tools. use the Ctrl+P on the keyboard to change the view to a 2d plan view.. a custom component. select all the treads and then hit Modify in the UDA dialog box. we will need to use several system components. 577. 77 Custom component Handrail Splice Cutting tools Line cut & Polygon cut Modeling manipulation techniques moving. 89. In this view. H Sr.. and model object manipulation techniques. splitting. • • • • Handrail system components S76. & stretching “a Create Stanchions (Posts) at stairs Open up the Component catalog and search for component $76. copying.0 In the 3d view. This will make it easier to pick the treads without accidentally selecting other objects that you do not want to modi&. BSI. ‘. Change the view display so that the main parts are rendered (CtrI+4) and the secondary parts are shaded (Shift+2).

. Load .d daacd Pa.num vi H ::i* L_4_H flK 1 [ pply J [Lád1y r fiat j i.an.’ri [ çnc& We need to change the fields shown abvve to affect the number of stanchions. T XC: L LiJL_Z7t I I Maxi.Jt Tekiji Struclijies Std. Click the midpoint at the bottom of the right stringer. but you may need to move it to the side.landa. and work point to first post distance.etei. Hit Apply.chions (576) Save PICILJIC ] [ Raft. Then the midpoint at the top end of the right stringer BS3 Copyright €1 2005 Takia Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAiNING Stairs and Handrails 17 . DON’T close the dialog box.

The stanchions will appear up the stringer as shown in the image below. box. C 18 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TINJNG Stairs and Handralls Copydght C 2005 Tekia Coqxration BS01 . Right-click Interrupt. Then middle mouse button click.n Then pick the stringer. Close the Stanchion (S76) dialog Create Handrails Next open up the Component catalog and search for component S77.

(Grid Line 6) This is where our handrail will change from being horizontal to sloping. ESO1 Copyright © 2005 Tekla CorporaUon TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRArNINS Stairs and Handrails IS . 6: Modify Return Bend Lengths Measure the distance to the work point.s Sm Click on the Railings (377) icon.Rã. We will use the default settings for now and will modi& the ends later 5.

d ELds_J P. U 20 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINIftG Stairs and Handrails Copyright 2005 TelcIa Corporation BSOI . The railing will stand out 2-0’ from the last stanchion.s Bends M. I Si-cl-a.. .ctLJrv Parts Pa..1 0 Left 1 Pt&d .C.sdecint 0 2 Debut V 2 OW W Ii IC’ C 1020 an” Rano postlion I 2 0” .v I cJ Li Moy I F g/rj The result will look like the image shown below..dde Rats Slancljons :zzzzzp I HeP.amete.c. Therefore we have to input 2-0” minus 10 5/16’ as the value in the dialoge box (1311/16) 1W Fekla SI rod ores Railings (Si!) standrnd %0 save as standa.otation . The bends will occur at grid line 6 which is 10 5/16” away from the last stanchion..r. Now go to the Railings dialog and input the values as shown.

Working in the elevation view. rightmost point first. Create work points Double-click the Create Parallel Points tool Input the value as shown o stances EQK Click OK I áPPYJ JF [ cancel Input the points as shown. B501 Copyright © 2005 Tekta Corporaüon TEKLA s’RucruREs BAsic TRAINING Stairs and Handrails 21 .Now we will modi’ the bottom of the handrail manually to make it conform to the contract drawing.

Then right-click and chose the Move> Translate option. CL 22 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRRJNING Stairs and Handrails CDpyriqhl @ 2005 Tekla Corporation BS01 . Now right click and select Interrupt Make sure you have this icon Adjust rails pressed down. select the small horizontal piece next to it. Next select the bottom elbow piece and then while holding down the Ctrl key on the keyboard.r Two points will be added 20 below the points clicked.

- Pick the point at the elbow then the point above it that we just added. iptransiaw The bottom return now looks like this... BSOI Copyrtght © 2005 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TBAINING Stairs and Handr&Is 23 .-. Delete the two small remaining pieces to the left of the bottom stanchion.. Right-click Interrupt. Next select the vertical rail which reveals its yellow start point. DONT close the Move > Translate window. Click OK.-... Make sure the values agree with the graphic shown above.. Click the Move button and these pieces will move up as shown below.—. Select this start point and hit Move..

Pick the yellow start point and then perpendicular snap at the stanchion. Select this start point and right-click. Move> Translate. ¶ Clear j [W / r I [cancel I Hit Move and then click OK. Right-cLick Interrupt Our bottom return now looks like this. (3 24 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TINING Stairs and Handrails Copyright® 2005 Tekla Corcration BSOI . Inquire> Assembly to check if all pieces are attached as required.r Next select the small horizontal rail which reveals its yellow start point.

12-7’! view Create Stanchions Double-click the Stanchion (S76) component from the Component catalog to open it. We will add this set of posts by working in the PLAN AT EL.BSI. TEKLA STRUDTURES BASIC WNM3 25 Stairs and Handrails . Stl Oe.jrgit@25eaCo’prat.3 Create Handrails Along Landing Now we will begin adding the horizontal railing along the beam 7-0 North grid of I.

. C 26 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Stairs and Kandrails Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation 0501 . The stanchions are to be bolted to the web of the beam. These stanchions will be changed slightly to conform with the drawings.] [NocyJ J (aceI C The values we entered in earlier should still be present since we applied them before we closed the dialog box. and the finished floor level is 2’/” above the top flange of the beam so we must add to the overall height of the stanchions Make the changes shown above.djd Paiamelei [ Saveas J st&daca [bet P ( n I__/ 43.e Pails Load] sla.? Tekla Structures Stanchions (576) Save PcIu. Click the Parameters tab and select the Elbow w/plt for the connection at the bottom of the posts.0111 LL C 3-8%’ ‘a [oj fZiitLJ E[5 0” vi H I—H I Ellun” ‘aMaeimum Et6’HI [ oKj[ pp.

select the supporting beam then click the middle mouse button. rrrrr El standard C El [auto [ Click OK. Now add the stanchions around the corner of the landing.Tekia Structures Stanchions (516) r Save j [ Load ] [standard Save aJ standard r Pwje Fats &&fl&5 2 Slnhiai pIO&JcI nane Corneclion seting type ERL 2 Dslaut Elbow Stanchion conn&ction type Connection number Connection properties El w/Plt. Once the endpoints have been clicked. This adds the stanchions as shown above. Notice it added stanchions based on the spacing we indicating in the dialog box. Add stanchions around corner. pp’y i MDdf I r1r1 [W/Tfl I ancdJ Now use the Endpoint snap to make sure you dick the ends of the beam as shown below. Continue adding the Stanchions (S76) component by clicking the points shown below then selecting the supporting beam BSCI Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporarion TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TR4INING Stairs and Handrails 27 .

1 r Click the middle mouse button. Notice that the setting we used automatically adjusted the spacing of the posts to make sure that the 5 posts we requested in the system component are present. Make sure the Select Components switch is pressed down and double click the stanchions. Open the System Component to adjust this. Change the number of stanchions as shown below and click Modify r C. 28 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAIJING Stairs and Handrails Copyrighl @ 2005 Tekla corporation BSO .

h@2OO5 Te.] as’ 1 P I Maxmum vj o’.____I ‘t Tekia Structures Stanchions (576) E!_1 L Pttuie Pact LoJ standara Parameteic rsave as ] standard [ . L]LiPJ FMo] [ j p/r3 Check that the posts have modified.a Gcrator TEICR SRtJCTURES MSIC TR4InG St&rs and Handrails 29 . SSD Cz.

- I 2 Lear El Jz I ©n* 1 I M°v I I One I [Ffl çancei Select standard and load the settings. El El 0 _fA V El r Rnç posiat Pmoade msl&n . Then click the middle mouse button to tend the command.Create Handrails Double-click the Railing (577) component from the Component catalog to open it. W Tekia Structures Railings (S//) r Ldr1 standard El[Wdds_I I _I Picture Parlt ‘EJ Mde flails Stanchions as I standard Parameters Bends Slancirion selectnn EJ Delassir V El°’ U. Click OK Now select each of the stanchions around the landing in turn from left to right. C 3Q TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC tRAu[fttNO Stairs and Kandrails Copydght © 2005 Takla Corporaion 8501 .

— ‘1 I . r Repeat the command for the handrails at the return. The values we entered in earlier should still be present since we applied them before we closed the dialog box. BSOI Copyright tO 2005 Tekia Corporaton TEKLA STRUC BASIC TINRG L’RES T Stairs and Handraits 31 . Create Corner Elbows Next we wi]l add an elbow at the far right corner Double-click the Railing beam to plane (89) component from the Component catalog to open it.7 :ç.

On the parameters tab of the Railing beam to plane (89) component change the Up Direction to +y U 32 TEKLR STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Stairs and Handrails Copyght © 2005 Tekia corporaton BS01 . Lee Ir I L. The far right corner of the handrail system should look the image below. C°Q’C Other pots Pats Porotreposs Gooses 0 Pcls. Create elbows at 900 bend in handrail Now complete the 900 corners.hh2 0rerend Or - HI —1 or Select the vertical rail and then the horizontal rail.(. Pahng beam to pla tie (88] On the Parameters tab change the Method of construction to Extend and click OK. Telda Structures Railing beam to plane (89) DEl EEl :e’onda.IrsIth.e Ufldoa’.

d He j Pictuic Paits Paiametei 6enei - Updiiection I Locked Clan Coiiiection code Aute4acis iula ioup Aweda. Select Objects In Components’ ! The result should look like the image shown below BSO1 Copyright@ 2005 Tekla Corporaton TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRRINING Stairs and Handrails 33 . .ii4eg.Tekla Structures Railing beam to pldne (89) EJ [ LJ he’ ‘pe. g.e stanead v ntanda..C.‘ 0CDt IEIN0 F - - l None E Ncq’e v I L I p/rj Now click the uppermost short rail followed by the uppermost long rail You must have the ‘select objects in components selection switch applied to ensure the program knows exactly which rails you are attempting to connect.

I (kIl Structures RiIing plane to plan (90) [ Picture[Pasts Load ] standard vI [ias ] standard fleip.. Method of constpuctton Leg length 1 leg length 2 Fabscalor name El àeale El’ HI a j [MoyJ [ ] lw/F] [ca’cei) 34 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC T4INIWG Stairs and Flandrails CopyrLght@ 2005 Jeida Corporation BSCI L a .. This ensure that the posts remain continuous through the connections rather than the rails. modit connection type Parameters H General [Welds.(0 On the Parameters tab change the Method of construction to Create and click OK and repeat the process for the lower 3 rails..

t Create return bends at top of stair FinaLly we will add the bends at the top of the stair where they meet the horizo ntal rails. on the Parameters tab change the Method of construction to Extend.chze Pss . le4cla Sti ‘rIures Railing beam to beam (38) LSaveJ r Load P J atandaid La as lJ [weids modify connection type P. Double-click the Railing beam to plane (89) component from the Compo nent catalog to open it.ens Geneia J andatd 1 Method at constiuctian BSGI Copyngb @2005 TekIa Corporadon TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Stairs and Handrails 35 . / A ading beam to be am (891 For the top rail.

(88) ISeJ[Lo1 rr’p cycLài e P&ae Pats Parncas 6enc.For the remaining rails. lyr Teklo Sb uctures Railing boo’’’ to bean. v[Save] - L*J Method ci consliLietlon lI_Creale ¶ CL Now that the modeling of the stair and handrail has been completed the model should now look like this. 36 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TINING Stairs and Handrails Copydght © 2005 Tekla Corporatjon BSOI . on the Parameters tab change the Method of construction to Create.

Prepare the Assemblies Select the Select Assemblies selection switch Move your mouse over the handrai] and notice that the entire handrailing highlights. BSOl CDpyrighl @ 2DDS Tekla Corporalion TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAiNING Stairs and Handrails 37 .We can now start to create the stair and handrail output.

These parts will become ‘ship loose items’ once they are removed. absolutely everything would be shown on the drawing and the result would be difficult to read. We will split the assembly at the retums at the top of the stair and the 9Q bend on grid line 6 0 (S 38 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC 1rNING Stairs and Handralls Copyright ce 25 Tekia Corporation BSO1 . To avoid this we will separate this assembly into 3 smaller assemblies by removing the parts that join the assemblies at the locations where we want to split the assemblies.e It This means that if we were to produce an assembly drawing of this item.

Select the Select Objects in Assemblies selection switch Highlight the top rail return as shown below then right click on the mouse. 44 4 44 - —I Select Remove from assembly from the list BS3 I Cgpflh: V 2005 Tea Cocpomn 7EKA STRUCTURES BASIC TRANNG Stairs and -fandrails 39 .

I COPS Move Dee Set as new main part of assembly Center o’ gravito E:act lines Hide lines Hide Show assembly Fit by parts Create vie. 1/ . Interrupt Propertes..0. Delete confirmation \ Assembly struclure includes weldings or bolts Delete weldings and bolts? Lxø IL No Repeat the process for the lower three parts. Inquire I.. Now switch the Select Assemblies selection switch back on and mouse over the stair handrail. Notice that it now only highlights the sloping handrail. Click Yes to confirm the removal.’ Drawing Zoom . C 40 TFKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Stairs and Handrails CopynhI © 2005 TeIcla Corporation BSO1 ..tdate i.ndow Next wnidoo’. User-defined atfributes.’ Add to assemDiy I.

j Once this has been completed we can run the drawings. 5531 Copyht @ 2005 tekla Cocorator TEKLA SIRIJCTURES BASIC TRINNG Stairs and Handrails 41 . Dont forget to switch your Select objects in assemblies back on.Now do the same for the 4 elbows at the 990 bend.

I I 2 LNeto4p&k.BSI. * Assembly drawing properties Save (j_ -- I Stail’Mth BUM Sraprc_w’th. select the Assembly drawings which open up the dialog box shown below.. 42 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Stairs and Handrails Copytght© 2G05 Tekia Corporalpor 5501 ‘9 U . Laycis.lr Canecoeimak Snilace Srasace Iiewrej Dd&tha I’aSTTreal ma.._BO P ONn . —Pa’maL Picaeclinii v.] ] [ w Seal 0 1 cancal Ucer-defned akèr4. 2 2 [ LaiorL Gnno.drawirg. IUciese Saclion Y]ese or devalion o4 beck . Then click OK.. From the Properties menu..’__j Jo [ s— J [secmacyenfrA I J2Newp.tnng... “jeer. Bei Gnarnfer ii Pmjecl.: Select the Stairs_with_BOM settings from the drop-down list and hit Load. Select the one of the stringers in the model and then select Assembly drawing from the Drawing menu. 2 Oensxnin 2 2 O 2 2 I [ 1 [ 10 J 12 2 [ Bel Besrr.) Mut]. fl png nsa the mont view peopertes and changing the Ealienia &i’ In zero J. Phaea number. 21. -we arwwFng Genera] ermnoe’mer d’swng !) .4 Stair Drawing Create Drawings 0 Next we will create an Assembly drawing of the Stairs. C&erece pans ci • ace 4 Sj eme. Sirgieperl drwwpg. Sleeper’.

on a 0) 0• 0 -C 0 - -‘ ri 8 t 01 00 a 0. 20 -4 ‘P a z o 0 - 0 0 Cr a Cr 01 S -4 . CD 0 a ii 55 0 a 0 a C C C) C cn C. U p a 0) n E 01 0) 01 00 (0 01 00 Cl. = Cs) — —. a <0 a o -I ITS 55 @0 x 0 Ct p 01 o S 5< In a OCt 1 0 a Cd’ IW f0 55 0 “0 a 01 C Ct I 94.- Is I I 0) 00 C -4 0 n 0 01 0) m on c 0 C0 a 0 0 0 =00 0. 6R fill [Iii !t:j p 00- a a 0 0 C —C -. a H -r x a 0 01 0- -4 p 0. 01 0) C-) 0 C < 1 -t 01 a Cd’ —. an 0 0. .am C — — t to 0 DI w 0 0 o o E’O roe C Ca - a“C U - LJ aa ) 0 C) <:<20 - a a - 0 o Ct - © C.

the more the part will be shortened. / — By speci1’ing a large dimension here we have reduced the programs capacity to shorten the item. - Propertes.. Once the drawing redraws. Right click your mouse in blank space and select Place Views in order to correct this.. holes. if View properties Sae Attrues 1 Urilolded EUebrm Attrivtes 2 Load Label I fliaveas j 1yti.bM Aeptesentation oF deformed objects No No V Shortening Cut pails: Minimum cut part length: Space between cul pails: L1)128 Other Yes Cut skew parts: No V I No Specified v’ 1] Datum point for elevations: Dattxn level: Click Modify ft This setting shortens items on the drawing when it detects there are no events’ (bolts. The result is that the smaller the dimension specified is.) along the item for each section of the specified dimension. the views may be outside the border. plates etc.‘indow (1 44 TEK STRUCTURES BASIC TINING Stairs and Handralis pynghI @25 TekEa rporaIior BSOI .Go to the Attributes 2 tab and change the Minimum Cut Part Length as shown. Place views Part marks Update marks Update veids Nce:lJnhide tiCS Loom Update F4ext ‘. Thus the stair looks better on the drawing..

ensione en required — -- - Men Part’s Rotation in Model r. and movin g any and all necessary dimensions required for your shop. ntoI. this time use the setting Handrail_withfioM from the drop-down list. ElNsre 21 T& CoMes h&ta i’ing e#h mend re d -ee& thrnrn.eeds robe FRONt — -— 2)r- E Dimensen. The default settings for handrails is to list Total Length in the drawin gs BOM.- fl J 21 [ rsvzI Dimensiodni I 2) Eo. deleting. 12)It The handrail drawing should look like this. . BSO1 qyi @ 25 Tekia Corpo. - Add sections and dir.A STRuCTURES BASIC TINiNG Stairs and Handrails 45 . Assembly drawing properties Save Ii ioaJ RANDRML HandteiL with BUM ]j F &j Save as I HdLvuth.attn TEK. Once finished.. close and save the stair drawing. Handrail Drawing Repeat the steps to create a drawing for one of the handrails.Finish cleaning up the stair drawing by adding. Howev er.

A.— ii”- is ‘— — C—.’. Øc— — “‘ ““ Tj.CT ERLAL T BILL OF MA Ceszqr-—. 0 c AssmbIy part nark properties Caacn 2 - an 4 tJ::— t: F.3132 iA - :e-V - EZ rz - - EE ZZr In the Main part section. 46 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TF{AININC Stairs and Handrails Copyright 2005 Tekla CorraIion BSOI C V .—— a 3 — LEZiLfJ In the Secondary part section. DI If this is desired then all part marks need to be removed from the drawings. - A. Then click the Part mark button. remove the <<Part position>> element.. C) ‘:LpKs HPJI I PIPHI-lr2SCHdtI Q-&3il’93—0 ROD L4 1. F HØi F. remove the <<Part position>> element. Double-click in the drawings background. Assenbiy - port mark propertit..

PsoktL Ii) BILL OP MATERIAL ‘_ .’il. Click OK. :il.H-!.Finish cleaning up the handrail drawing by adding.H4fl PI}’il—i 5* I —: S& S PfPPI 1.F1JN ENGW REMARKS ‘IR’ 1 RAil :4 m46 - ‘-r-.1:’.* Now when you re-open the handrail drawing the BOM list each individual part as shown here. Once finished. ‘. change the option shown above to No and click Modify. Change the Handrail BOM type From the Properties menu. select the Project option.CEMO . ::‘1. deleting. 3!LL C MATERIAL MARK 0Th’ DE:C. Then hit the User-defined attributes button to open up the dialog box shown here. and moving any and all necessary dimensions required for your shop. tTAfl LJ L±J USL On the More Drawing Switches tab.itP’ jn/ -- PIPE.SOO Copyriçht @ 2005 Tda Corran TEKLA STRUCTURES BASC TR NIG 47 Stairs and Handrails . close and save the handrail drawing.

1 is .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful